Home

Garmin Part 23 AML STC Pilot's Guide

1. 4 5 4 3 1 2 Terrain Proximity Page Display on a Navigation Map Page 4 6 4 3 1 3 Terrain Proximity Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings 4 6 4 3 1 4 Terrain Proximity Page Aviation Data 4 7 4 3 2 Terrain Proximity Limitations s es 4 9 4 3 3 v cur tr ibis TERT E 4 9 Terrain Awareness and Warning System TAWS B Optional 4 10 4 4 1 TAWS B Requirements eese 4 10 4 4 2 TAWS B Limitations isassesa is caste eroe tre tht ped attese 4 10 4 4 3 SEM TU e 4 11 4 4 4 Displaying TAWS Data seen 4 11 BAAD TAWS 4 12 4 45 IT E 4 16 4 4 5 1 TAWS B Alerting Colors and Symbology 4 17 4 4 5 2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert esee 4 19 4 4 5 3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance ssssss 4 20 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 4 4 5 4 Premature Descent Alerting eeeeeee 4 4 5 5 Inhibiting Enabling TAWS Alerting eeeess 4 4 5 6 Five Hundred Aural Alert sees 4 4 5 7 Negative Climb Rate After Take Off Alert NCR 4 4 5 8 TAWS Not Available Alert 4 4 5 9 TAWS Failure Alert 4 4 6 TAWS System Status EM NU E Be MWe M eE E 4 6 1 Terrain SVT Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings 4 6 2 Terrain SVT Page
2. E o LL o 0800 600 2 400 9 DON T SINK 200 C gt a Ca I 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Altitude Loss Feet 1000 900 Height Above Terrain Feet 190 00601 02 Rev H mE ME EE DON T SINK E E S 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Sink Rate Feet Per Minute Figure 4 21 Negative Climb Rate NCR Alert Criteria Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 23 gt zZ O a T EI e rar NUaddY XIV UdIddy rere AV 3 A ix GARMIN 4 4 5 8 TAWS Not Available Alert TAWS requires a 3 D GPS position solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums Should the position solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area the annunciation TAWS N A is _ generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS page The aural message x TAWS Not Available is generated When the GPS signal is re established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area the aural message TAWS _ Available is generated 445 9 TAWS Failure Alert TAWS continually monitors several system critical items such as database validity hardware status and GPS status If the terrain obstacle database is not available the aural message TAWS System Failure is generated along with a TAWS FAIL annunciation 4 4 6 TAWS System Status During power up TAWS conducts a self test of
3. Each successive press of the DCLTR soft key will toggle through the declutter levels In the following table features marked with a e are shown at the indicated Declutter Level Features shown at level 0 will be displayed at all Declutter levels t E 5 NOTE Traffic is automatically decluttered from Nav Map pages when the map scale is above 40 NM 3 g XIU 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 5 TOC Feature 0 Oo me e m D Caw O nees e canas e ES 3 K B 3 Feature Airways Foreword Land Country Text Large City 0 1 ped EXE EXE Medium City ERE EANE ETE Sec 1 System Small City Small Town Freeways Wes e Roads pe f fof Medium Airports deme o o PehbdAms Poilis MS n Traffic Symbols e Runwaylabes e umnGis e e Tigro siena e e e ee Wh ees ee t Wewdos Wb eh tit CesBAmpxe e WaterDetal e eet CesCAmpxe e AdwfPles e eje desDAmpce e e TTT Table 3 1 Features Shown at Each Decluttering Level Sec 2 PFD OD a n Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Features Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Appendix B Index 3 6 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN ies 3 1 6 Panning The Panning Map Page function allows you to move the map beyond its
4. Figure 2 17 Extreme Pitch Indication Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 11 GARMIN Foreword Sec 1 System Figure 2 18 Extreme Pitch Indication Figure 2 19 Extreme Pitch Indication Nose Down Nose Up C Cn VU a9 N Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Figure 2 20 Extreme Roll Indication with Display Declutter Sec 8 Sec 7 Appendix A Glossary Symbols Appendix B Index 2312 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 2 4 Altimeter m The altimeter displays the current altitude altitude trend altitude bug setting altitude bug and the current BARO setting The Altitude Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line extending up or down on the left side of the Altitude scale The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted altitude in six seconds if the current vertical speed is maintained The Altitude Bug is displayed at the selected Altitude Bug setting A portion of the Altitude Bug will be displayed at the top or the bottom of the altitude tape if the selected Altitude Bug is off of the tape When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed the altitude received from the radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD See the Radar Altimeter section for more details 2 4 1 Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter 1 Press the ALT key to activate Altitude mode 2 Turn the
5. l Figure 1 1 G500 600 System LRU Configuration The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units LRUs GDU 620 Primary Flight Display PFD and Multi Function Display MFD GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer ADC GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System AHRS 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 1 TENG p10M9JO 29 ddd C 29 e2UPpIOAV Caw pJezeH c 29g Y 29S S9Jn 89J jeuonippv y Xipueddy AJeSSO S sioquJ S SUe v 9 9 29g 2998 uhuuv 9 298 G 29 Xapul g xipueddy Sec 1 System Foreword Sec 2 PFD MFD Sec 3 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Appendix B Index A TOC GARMIN Temperature Probe such as the GTP 59 GMU 44 Magnetometer At least one of the following GNS 480 CNX80 GNS 400W series GNS 500W series GIN 600 series GIN 700 series or a compatible GPS Navigator Interfaces to various other aircraft systems and equipment are supported including GAD 43 43e Adapter GDL 69 694 Satellite Data Link Receiver GDL 88 ADS B Transceiver GSR 56 Satellite Data Link Receiver NavCom Garmin GTR GNC or SL30 COM NAV radios or selected 3rd party radios Autopilot Flight Director ADF e Garmin GTS or GTX traffic awareness systems or selected 3rd party devices Audio Panel Garmin GWX radar systems or selected 3rd party
6. 29S selection and subdued black with dark gray characters If Synthetic Terrain is deactivated all other SVT features are also deactivated With Synthetic Terrain activated all other SVT features may be turned on or off at the pilots discretion SDULPIOAY H p 29S SYN TERR soft key enables synthetic terrain depiction HRZN HDG soft key enable horizon heading marks and digits e APTSIGNS soft key enables airport signposts C ew J j rro nnn p TI t te e a n euonippy Juv 9 SOV 8 UNL MAS oa Ac mm n Pressing the BACK soft key returns to the top level soft keys Alesso 5 C Ce RS BACK prs mm n Pressing the BACK soft key returns to the previous level of soft keys Figure 5 40 SVT Soft Keys y xipueddy X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 39 GARMIN 5 5 2 Activating and Deactivating SVT NOTE In some instances such as temporary loss of GPS signal the SVT functionality will be disabled To enable SVT 1 Press the PFD soft key 2 Press the SYN VIS soft key 3 Press the SYN TERR soft key to view the SVT display When SVT is enabled the pitch ladder will display a different pitch scale Figure 5 42 Pitch Scale with SVT Disabled 5 40 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN 5 5 3 SVTTM Features WPT Tr rel a EN CXNERELTRAFFICIS v
7. 3 2 6 5 Restore Defaults The Restore Defaults selection will return the Brightness Contrast and Saturation values to their original settings Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance 1 While viewing the External Video page press the MENU key Sec 5 Additional Features PADE Mer OPTIONS Restore Defoults Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Press the HFD knoh ta return to bose poga Figure 3 69 Restore Video Defaults Menu Selection 2 Restore Defaults will be highlighted Press the ENT key Sec 8 Sec 7 Appendix A Glossary Symbols Appendix B Index 3 54 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 2 6 6 X Full Screen The Full selection allows selection of the part of the video information for display DJOM9JOJ 1 While viewing the External Video page press the FULL key UJa1s g 29S ddd C 298 Selected Display Area 1 T O D ON CD Ww x no D Window of the Selected Display Area S9Jn 89J jeuonippv G 29 T WEE TIT ICI Full Screen Mode Figure 3 70 Full Video Selection 2 Press the small MFD knob to activate the selection window s y 8 unuuv sioquJ S LS 3 Turn the large MFD key to move the selection window 4 Press the small MFD knob to accept the selected display area shown in the window y xipuaddy AJeSSO 5 8 29S Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 55 7 29 9 29 A a GARMIN
8. A TOC GARMIN Attitude Heading Reference System AHRS NOTE Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating in normal mode may degrade AHRS accuracy Attitude and heading information is displayed on the PFD when the AHRS receives appropriate combinations of information from the external sensor inputs Sec 1 System Foreword AHRS Inputs AHRS AHRS Outputs GPS Magnetometer Air Data Mode Attitude Heading Available Available Normal Available Available gf Available Unavailable Available Available GPS Track Available Unavailable Unavailable No Air Available GPS Track No Mag Unavailable Available Available No GPS Available Available Unavailable Available Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Fd Unavailable Unavailable Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance amp E Table 1 2 AHRS Operation lt LL AHRS Normal Heading AHRS No GPS Attitude Heading Operation Invalid Mode Invalid Sec 6 Sec 7 Annun Symbols amp Alerts Figure 1 6 AHRS Operation Sec 8 Pa Wa 2 W Loss of GPS magnetometer or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts refer to Section 6 for specific AHRS alert information Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and 5 heading information indicated by red X flags over the corresponding flight instruments Appen A maximum of two GPS inputs
9. DAN a Figure 3 19 Navigation Map Terrain Data 3 16 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Obstacle Data Viewing Range The Obstacle Data Viewing Range option selects whether the Obstacle Data is shown on the Navigation Map Obstacles will be shown at and below the selected map range Map ranges above this value will not show the Obstacle Data In the range selection example below where 30 NM is selected obstacles will be shown at map ranges of 30 NM and lower 1 Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Height is less than Height is less Height is greater Height is greater than 1000 ft AGL than 1000 ft AGL than 1000 ft AGL 1000 ft AGL Nn RH Table 3 3 Navigation Map Obstacle Icons Tower Windmill Windmill in Group Power Line Table 3 4 Obstacle Icon Types Threat Location go Projected Flight Path gu 4 100 ft li l Unlighted Obstacle Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Figure 3 20 TERRAIN Altitude Color Correlation Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk as shown in the Windmill in Group example above The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude 5 2 of the highest obstacle in the group not other obstacles within that group Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap If map zoom scale is change sufficiently that
10. A GARMIN Action Specitic LRU has poor cooling where lt LRU gt denotes the specific LRU and power is being reduced Contact your Garmin dealer for service Replace or update database Contact your Garmin dealer for service Specific LRU should be serviced where LRU denotes the specific LRU Contact your Garmin dealer for service Contact your Garmin dealer for service 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Alert Message Description Action NAV1 2 e Communication with e Switch to alternate navigation NAV1 2 is lost GPS or otherwise if available e No navigation receiver 1 2 data AP NO RADAR e No data is being sent e Contact your Garmin dealer for DATA to the GDU service PIT NO COMP No data from oneor Contact your Garmin dealer for more pitch attitude service sensors PREV EXCEED Previous Engine Refer to ADAS documentation for Trend Monitor appropriate action hs exceedence e ADAS engine SEN trend monitor is ad reporting a previous exceedence P E RADAR e Data does not match e Contact your Garmin dealer for CONTROLS for 15 seconds or service DISAGREE more REGISTER GFDS Data services are Register with GFDS inoperative GFDS is not registered ROL NO COMP No data from one Contact your Garmin dealer for or more roll attitude service Sensors c RS 232 CONFIG RS 232 configuration e Contact your Garmin dealer for 2 error service
11. A TOC GARMIN Category Settings Affected Quantities Exceptions Navigation Magnetic North Heading Angle True North Course Bearing Track Desired Track Barometric Inches in Barometric pressure on PFD Setting Hectopascals hpa Temperature Celsius All nel on PFD Fahrenheit Data Link WX XM nad weather source TFR Source FIS GFDS Table 1 3 Display Units Settings System Setup Page 1 4 5 Display Backlighting The backlighting of the PFD and MFD displays and bezel keys can be adjusted automatically or manually The default setting automatic backlighting adjustment uses the photocell located at the top right corner of the bezel to automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions Photocell calibration curves are configured by the installer to optimize display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures Backlighting Adjustment 2 1 From the first AUX page press the small MFD knob to highlight the DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS MODE box 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired brightness Level and then press ENTER DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS Manual Adjustment 0 1 to 50 or Auto 1 7 Auto or Manual Figure 1 23 Display Brightness Adjustment 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the MODE field Turn the small MFD knob to s
12. Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 N U WM WY Mm W ab Nn Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B System Foreword PFD m LL Features amp Alerts Appendix A Index A GARMIN mMFD DISPLAY UNITS DIS SPD NAUTICAL NM KT ALT S Figure 3 49 Altitude and Vertical Speed MFD Display Units 3 2 1 9 System Display Units The System Display Units options allows the selection of units to display values for Navigation Angle Magnetic or True Barometric Setting inches or Hectopascals and Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius Pressing the DFIT UNIT soft key will restore the Default Unit settings 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the System Display Units selection titled Nav Angle 4 CAUTION The Nav Angle display units Magnetic or True must be set to the same type in both the GDU 620 and GPS navigators SYSTEM DISPLAY UNITS NAV ANGLE PRESS TEMP Figure 3 50 Nav Angle System Display Units 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Magnetic or True and then press ENT The Barometric Pressure Setting value will now be highlighted When True is selected a T will appear to the right of the heading value on the PFD SYSTEM DISPLAY UNITS gt NAV ANGLE MAGNETICC PRESS TEMP Figure 3 51 Barometric Setting System Display Units 3 40 Garmin G500 600 Pi
13. TIME FORMAT TIME OFFSET UJ91s g Figure 3 47 Date and Time Values ddd C 298 4 A Time Offset may be entered by using the large and small MFD knobs to change the values Press ENT after completing any changes 5 Press the small MFD knob to exit adjustments 3 2 1 8 MFD Display Units The MFD Display Units options allow you to select the units of measurement conventions displayed on the MFD Distance and Speed selections are Imperial Metric or Nautical Altitude and Vertical speed selections are Feet or Meters Traffic information is always shown in Nautical Miles distance and Feet altitude 92UPDIOAV S9Jn 89J jeuonippv G 298 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Distance and Speed DIS SPD units of measurement Suly 8 Uhuuv MFD DISPLAY UNITS DIS SPD ALT VS S OQWAS AJeSSO S Figure 3 48 Distance and Speed MFD Display Units 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Imperial Metric or Nautical and then press ENT The Altitude and Vertical Speed units selection will now be highlighted 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select Feet or Meters and then press ENT y xipueddy Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 39 29S piezeH 7 29 298 8 295 adi 92S 9 29 Oc m qp WOO o nmr eL lt Sec 5 Additional
14. e Sec 5 JCG nnun C C 3eco 4 118 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Waypoint GFDS Data Request 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Waypoint Press ENT 2 The Waypoint Selection field will now be highlighted Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the next character When finished selecting the waypoint name press ENT DJO0M9JOJ UJ91s g 99S IDENT FACILITY CITY 3 k E i ddd C 298 298 3IN pJezey 7 29 gt z e T E e rar SoJnjeo euontppv G 29 sua v 9 unuuv 9 299 WAYPOINT IMFORHATION CINED MAP M 1s 5 eC ADVISORY Figure 4 99 Waypoint GFDS Data Request sioquJ S L 29 3 The Waypoint box will be checked and weather information will be requested around the selected waypoint for the range selected next operation y xipuaddy Alesso s 8 299 XaPU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 119 A ix GARMIN Diameter Route Width GFDS Data Request E 1 After selecting a coverage option in the previous section the Diameter Route Width field will now be highlighted GFDS DATA REQUEST COVERAGE E PRESENT POSITION DESTINAT Titi FLIGHT FLAM WAYPOINT DIRPETER RTE WIDTH AUTO REQUEST UPDATE RATE HAMA REQUEST Figure 4 100 Waypoint GFDS Data Request Range Sec 4 S TE N O lt
15. locating a Service Center near you visit the Garmin web site at http www garmin com or contact Garmin Customer Service at 866 739 5687 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide E E i CD E i Taf A TOC GARMIN WARNING Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain function The GDU 620 Terrain Proximity feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight The Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring a certified terrain awareness system Terrain TAWS data is obtained from third party sources Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data WARNING The displayed minimum safe altitudes MSAs are only advisory in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes WARNING The Garmin GDU 620 has a very high degree of functional integrity However the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and or self test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical Although unlikely it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication sh
16. 2 4 4 Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height Alerting Cn lt Ta D For altitude awareness a Minimum Descent Altitude MDA alert can be displayed on the PFD The values are set in the Active Flight Plan page or from amp y the Charts page menu When active the minimum descent altitude setting is displayed in the minimums window at the bottom left of the Altitude Tape when you are within 2500 feet of the selected altitude A NOTE The Altitude Minimums Alerting Bug appears parked at the bottom 7 gt of the altitude tape as soon as a value is set in the minimums alerter The bug will unpark and start to move up the tape as soon as the altitude is within the range of the tape The bug is reset when power is cycled The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA DH When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the selected altitude setting the Minimums box appears with the altitude value in cyan text Once in range the Altitude Minimums Bug appears in cyan on the altitude tape e When the aircraft is within 100 feet of the selected altitude setting the bug and text turn white Once the aircraft reaches the selected altitude minimums setting the bug and the altitude text turn yellow and the aural alert Minimums minimums is heard one time The text remains in yellow until the aircraft altitude is more than 50 feet above the set altitude minimum value 190 00601 0
17. 29 c e2UepIoAV SoJn 89J jeuonippv G 29 sLaly 8 Uunuuv 9 29 sioqui S oe Alesso 5 y xipueddy Xapu g xipueddy S piezeH p 29S 29S 8 286 GARMIN No Options Available Options for MAP Window PASE HEH PysE REMH OPT Tons Hn Options hic Hara Boring Testonce Praca the APD keb to mtua bo bee pope Presa the ARO Enah fo relerm to bose pope Figure 1 21 Page Menu Examples 1 4 4 System Settings G500 600 system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup Page More detail on changing settings is in the Section 3 MFD Aux pages System Settings section 1 From the first AUX page press the small MFD knob and turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select ON or OFF 3 Press ENTER to save the setting mita GRIGHTNESS DATE TIHE LEVEL 1 74 DATE 24 NOV 14 HODE AUTO TIME 2054 40 L0L TINE FORMAT LOCAL 24hr AIRSPEEDS PFD 24i N TIME OFFSET NS GLIDE amp 88KT BOKT J N wep DISPLAY UNITS BSET OW ors SPO NAUTICALOPmET BK ON ALT v5 FEET FT FPH FFO OPTIONS gt S STEM DISPLAY UNITS MIND VECTOR STYLE Z NAV ANGLE MAGNETIC PRESS INCHESC IN TEHP REFERENCE TAT TEHP CELSIUSCC SYNCHRONIZATION DATA LINK CDI OFF WX TFR SOURCE XM BARI N i rem DATABASES UFF CYSTE SETUP HAP WX AUA BOO Y DFLT UNITI RA TEST DFLT SPD Figure 1 22 System Setup Page
18. 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 139 A TOC GARMIN 4 11 5 4 NEXRAD Source Selecting NEXRAD in the FIS B Weather Menu 8 1 While viewing the FIS B weather page press the Menu key 2 With the Weather Setup selection highlighted press ENT x 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Viewing Range Source option 4 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Source option and press ENT Continental US NEXRAD CONUS The Display CONUS NEXRAD selection shows NEXRAD radar information a for the entire continental United States CONUS NEXRAD data is updated every 15 minutes Sec 4 S CE N lt r FIS amp WEATHER HAP 1 LEGEND Figure 4 119 FIS B CONUS NEXRAD 4 140 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Regional NEXRAD The Regional NEXRAD selection shows available regional NEXRAD radar information from reporting ground stations within 500 NM of the aircraft location a B Leet TE ENUN FIS 8 WEATHER HAP 1 LEGEND ADVISORY Figure 4 120 FIS B Regional NEXRAD 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 141 DJO0M9JOJ UJ91s g
19. 3 2 7 Position Reporting optional 5 Position Reporting is a system which collects system variables and transmits 5 them over the Iridium satellite at a given interval through the GSR 56 3 2 7 1 Status The Status window shows the time until the next data transmission and the status of the reporting system NOTE The GSR 56 does not report its serial number until 90 seconds after power up of the GDU As a result for that period the product info for the GSR 56 will show Waiting Time Until Transmit The Time Until Transmit field is a countdown timer that shows the time until the next data transmission This field is blank when the aircraft is on the ground POSITION REPORTING ETATE TIME UNTIL TRANSHIT 2x Countdown Time Until Transmit REPORTING STATUS Figure 3 71 Position Reporting Time Until Transmit lt Position Reporting Status Position Reporting will be enabled when the aircraft is in the air Status Description The reporting system is not using the GSR 56 for reporting at this time E The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing Table 3 7 Position Reporting Status 3 2 7 2 Report Type Standard When the Standard reporting type is used the Position Reporting Period may be set to Off or Automatic The Automatic Position Reporting Period can be set to intervals of 2 to 60 minutes 3 56 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A
20. 8 299 Figure 4 27 Terrain SVT Advisory Pop Up on the MFD y Xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 29 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance A a GARMIN Alert Type PFD MFD Alert Aural Message Annunciation 2 GPS signal re established Terrain System Available Terrain System Test Successtul Terrain System test OK Terrain System Test in Progress TER TEST Terrain Alerting is disabled TER INH No GPS position Terrain System Not Available Excessively degraded GPS signal amp Terrain SVT System Test Fail CERF Terrain System Failure Table 4 9 Terrain SVT System Test Status Annunciations Alert Type PFD MFD Alert Aural Message Annunciation a FLTA Terrain Caution Caution Terrain Terrain EE RIC C ITI C inb FLTA Terrain Caution Tc s IRLC C ILL C CRE Caution Wire Wire EE lt FLTA Terrain Warning EE RTC W ITI W E M FLTA Terrain Warning Warnina Wire Wire RLCANL IUE WIRE Warning Wire Wire FLTA Obstacle Caution ROCC IOKC x 4 FLTA Obstacle Warning ROC W IOI W Table 4 10 Terrain SVT Alerts Summary Warning Terrain Terrain 4 30 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN is 4 7 Traffic Systems The Traffic function requires the installation of a compatible traffic device 2 and will then provide a separate traffic page in the Map page group as well as the overlay of traffic on the
21. G 29 Figure 1 10 GWX 68 Weather Radar 1 1 2 3 Stormscope Optional sue v 9 unuuy 9 22S NOTE Refer to the WX 500 Pilot s Guide for a detailed description of the WX 500 StormScope 998 The WX 500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft The StormScope measures relative bearing and distance of thunderstorm related electrical activity and reports the information to the display Interfaces are currently only available for the WX 500 StormScope System 1 1 2 4 GSR 56 Optional The GSR 56 is an IridiumQ satellite transceiver that supports voice telephone calls aircraft position reporting and world wide weather products y xipuaddy AJesso S S OQWAS 8 299 Xapu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 9 Sec 1 System Foreword Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 MFD Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Appendix B Index A ix GARMIN 1 1 2 5 GDL 69 69A Optional The GDL 69 69A is a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver that receives broadcast weather data The GDL 69A is the same as the GDL 69 with the addition of an Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment receiver Weather data and control of audio channel and volume is displayed on the MFD via a High Spee
22. Jeuonippy 8 295 GARMIN eo o LOI Brown Band Ground Representation Blue Band Sky Representation e T PIT At zn 1386 1886 Terrain Fills Display Figure 5 53 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain 5 46 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H ES GARMIN TOC 6 ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS 6 1 Alerts Alerts are displayed on the MFD and are accessible via the ALERTS MFD soft key When a new advisory is present the ALERTS soft key text changes to ADVISORY and flashes until the alerts page is viewed The MFD ALERTS page may have two additional soft keys TRND ACK and CAPTURE which are present when interfaced to an optional ADAS Engine Trend Monitor ETM Pressing the TRND ACK soft key is equivalent to pressing the ETM Trend key for one second Pressing the CAPTURE soft key is equivalent to pressing the ETM Trend key for five seconds Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and ADAS ETM documentation for the system description and operating procedures plomalo4 31s g ddd Alert Message Description Action ADC1 2 ALT EC ADC Altitude e Contact your Garmin dealer for Error Correction Is service E unavailable 3 The alert is enabled and the GDC is reporting that altitude correction is unavailable 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 6 1 dai gt xipueddy Cn MD C UJ cr d SeC 3 Sec 2 MFD Hazard CAS 7 S
23. SJOqW S Figure 5 12 Selected Chart for the carieni Aimon ChartView shown AJeSSO S 8 29S y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 13 2 C 298 pJezeH V 29S Jeuonippy 298 9 29 TOC 2 A GARMIN Press the Header Plan Profile or Minimums keys to view detailed sections for the chart tor those topics An aircraft icon will show in the lower right corner of the display if your aircraft is in the chart area ansaa ARH Climb r SO direc ARTTT eed held i TT fue d cdimbs in chal n3 ATEM Tea Bm FPL IOD digas il air rakti kia N iht heei NEM WINE licer er dig busto maris mik M ol i pleas Fe b Fai Wei Rari AMMAN Fai Reet Pee el buricm 1 p i Fy ae Ms ina ig a Fh d ath DEM ERE 4 fiai corirclad bgheng 110 1 En in 5 Uy Q a un E lt Nn w Ed gt 19 lt b LL PROFILE HTHTMIES RACE Figure 5 13 Detail of the Selected Chart Header Shown lt 3 Press the Back key to return to the view of the full chart 5 14 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 1 5 3 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter 1 While viewing the Charts Page of the FPL page group press the Menu Key With the Set Minimums item highlighted press ENT l 2 With the Minimums Source highlighted select the Altitude Minimums Meer i source with small MFD knob SOURCE af ALTITUDE Figure 5 14 Minimums S
24. Sky pointer 2 10 Sky representation 2 9 5 45 5 46 Slewing 2 25 Slip Skid Indicator 2 1 2 9 Smart airspace 3 28 lt T Snow 4 57 4 61 4 93 Soft keys 1 15 1 19 2 1 2 2 2 11 3 1 4 31 4 44 5 26 5 39 5 41 Software version 3 43 5 30 6 14 Speed 1 5 1 21 2 5 2 8 2 11 2 18 3 13 3 31 3 33 3 39 4 20 4 40 Speed range 2 7 STAB 4 108 B 6 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN Stabilization 4 101 4 108 STAR 5 3 5 4 Stationary front 4 78 Stormscope 1 9 4 152 Sunny 4 57 Surface analysis 4 56 4 77 Surface data 4 54 4 78 Surface winds 4 70 4 127 4 144 Symbols 4 17 4 34 4 40 4 55 4 57 2 44 7 1 Synchronization 1 21 3 31 3 36 3 37 Syn Terr 2 5 Synthetic Vision v 2 4 2 5 3 11 3 19 4 26 4 29 5 1 5 37 Synthetic Vision alerts 4 29 Syn Vis 2 4 System description 1 1 System display units 3 31 3 40 System power 1 5 1 12 1 14 System settings 1 20 3 31 System status 3 43 4 9 4 24 4 35 4 44 6 14 T TACAN 7 1 TAF 3 76 4 73 4 130 4 147 Target selection 4 47 TAS 4 31 4 101 5 1 TAWS alerts 4 4 4 16 4 17 TAWS B 4 1 4 10 TAWS failure alert 4 24 TAWS SVT 4 1 4 26 TAWS system test 4 11 4 14 4 24 TCA 3 11 3 26 Temperature 1 22 3 40 4 57 Temperature probe 1 1 1 2 1 8 Temperature reference 2 29 3 31 Terrain 1 21 2 11 3 1 3 13 3 15 4 1 4 5 4 10 4 26 4 43 4 94 4 111 7 4 A 1 Terrain alerts 4 23 4 26 4 29 4 30
25. i 14 45 ag NO Tnisehold Distance From Destination Airport nm Figure 4 19 PDA Alerting Threshold PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited Discretion should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when appropriate When TAWS is inhibited the alert annunciation TAWS INHB is shown on the PFD and MFD Figure 4 16 298 gt z e T E e a gt S9Jn189J jeuonippv Ayesso s S OQUUAS SH Y 8 g 09S L S unuuy 9 298 G 29 y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 21 A TOC GARMIN 4 4 5 5 Inhibiting Enabling TAWS Alerting TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA FLTA aural and visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always remember to enable the system when appropriate Only the PDA and FLTA alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode Sec 1 System A NOTE See AFMS for guidance on inhibiting TAWS Sec 2 PFD Figure 4 20 TAWS Alerting Disabled TAWS Inhibited Annunciation PFD amp MFD Sec 3 MFD In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS Page Press the INHIBIT soft key to inhibit or enable TAWS choice dependent on current state 9 4 2 mS ons oco gt lt Sg OR a 2 1 Press the MENU key 2 Use the large or small MFD knob to highlight Inhibit TAWS or Enable 2 2 TAWS choice depende
26. lt GDL69 e GDL 69 has failed Contact your Garmin dealer for BBS service GEO LIMITS e AHRS1 too far North e Use alternate means of navigation nS South no magnetic e Check AFMS for limitations 355 heading provided e Operating in extreme north latitudes has rendered heading data unreliable 2 GPS1 2 FAIL e Communication lost e Use an alternate navigation KE with GPS 1 2 source GPS 1 2 PPS e Timing data from e Contact your Garmin dealer for 5 FAIL GPS 1 2 is lost service C GSR FAIL e GSR has failed e Contact your Garmin dealer for service GWX CONFIG GWX config error Contact your Garmin dealer for Config service service required z GWX SERVICE GWX needs service e Contact your Garmin dealer for service 6 8 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN Alert Message Description Action HDG FAULT AHRS1 2 in Check AFMS for limitations no magnetometer Use Compass or other course reversionary mode information Heading fault state Contact your Garmin dealer for on AHRS service Heading data is unreliable HDG LOST HDG features disabled or detaulted to GPS1 TRK LS GDU is in the lk reversionary track based mode Sg DJOM 9404 AG UJa1s c 29S ddd C 298 dV 299 y 22S eDUPepIOAV aJn1eoJ jeuonippv G 29S 9 9S HTAWS External HTAWS not Contact your Garmin dealer for available Internal service
27. 1 Press the PFD soft key to display the navigation source keys i 2 Press the BRG 1 or BRG 2 soft keys to toggle between the available Nav receivers of the selected source such as GPS NAV or ADF E 8 A NOTE The Bearing Line for navigation source 1 BRG1 will be a single line The Bearing Line for navigation source 2 BRG2 will be a double line 2 28 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN BEEN 2 8 2 Temperature Display The outside air temperature is displayed to the left of the HSI The air data computer calculates the temperature based on temperature probe and pitot static inputs The units C or F and temperature reference are selected on the AUX SYSTEM SETUP page The temperature reference can be selected to one of the following choices 2 e Static Air Temperature SAT This is the calculated temperature of the stationary static outside air Conceptually this is the temperature that would be read on a thermometer floating stationary at the current location Total Air Temperature TAT This is the calculated temperature of the outside air as it moves past the aircraft including the rise in temperature due to air compression and friction at the current airspeed Difference from International Standard Atmosphere ISA This is the difference between SAT and standard ISA temperature at the current altitude This provides an indication of how much warmer colder the tempe
28. 1 20 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Category Display Level Brightness levels on the PFD Brightness Mode and MFD Synchronization PFD Options Wind Vector NAV Status Temperature Reference Distance and Speed Altitude and Vertical Speed 190 00601 02 Rev H Settings Glide or REF V V or V1 V or V2 CDI On Off BARO On Off Databases On Off Off Style 1 Style 4 Style 1 2 Date Time Time Format Time Offset SAT TAT ISA Imperial SM MPH Metric KM KPH Nautical NM KT Feet Meters Affected Quantities Reference markers on PFD airspeed tape Crossfill Nav information to GDU 620 Share databases PFD wind vector display format Location of GPS navigation data Bearing distances information windows Distance information window Flight plan distances Map ranges DIS field Navigation Status Box All distances on MFD All speeds on MFD All elevations on MFD Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide Exceptions Nav Status option not available in all installations Airspeed Indicator True Airspeed Wind speed vector Map range Trattic Page Terrain Proximity Page Altimeter Vertical Speed Indicator 1 21 TENG p10M9JOJ 28S 92JUPDIOAV saunjea4 euoRnIppy G 29 sue v 8 UnUUV y xipueddy Alesso 5 S OQWAS X9pU g xipueddy piezeH 99 8 29 y 28S 9 235
29. 8 Power down the GDU 620 D KJ KJ a gt E I gt lt gt 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN DJ0M3J04 UJa1s g 299 ddd C 29 Q3IAN 298 eDUepIOAV piezeH y 298 This page intentionally left blank S9Jn1eoJ euonippy G IVS sue v 8 unuuy 9 29 sioquJ S L 29 lesso D 8 299 y xilpuaddy Xapu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A 8 A GARMIN INDEX Symbols 1 2 key 2 3 A Above Ground Level 4 11 ACT 4 110 Activating XM 5 22 Active flight plan 2 15 3 1 3 67 3 68 3 69 Additional features 5 1 ADF 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 2 28 8 1 ADIZ 3 6 3 11 3 27 ADS B 4 47 AFF 3 58 Age 4 55 AHRS iii 1 1 1 5 1 6 1 12 3 37 6 2 6 7 6 9 Aircraft symbol 2 9 2 19 3 3 Air Data Computer 1 1 1 5 AIREP 4 128 4 145 AIRMETs 4 56 4 70 4 126 4 142 4 151 Airport beacon 7 2 Airport diagram 5 3 5 4 A 5 Airport Directory 3 75 A 6 Airport signs 2 5 5 42 Airspace labels 3 29 Airspeed Indicator 1 21 2 5 2 6 Airspeed reference 1 21 2 8 3 33 Airspeed tape 2 6 2 7 2 18 3 33 Airspeed trend vector 2 6 Air temperature 1 5 1 8 2 1 Airways 3 2 3 6 3 11 3 28 Alerts 2 14 2 15 3 69 4 16 4 17 4 19 4 24 4 29 4 40 4 43 6 1 Altimeter ii 2 13 2 15 4 4 Altitude 1 1 1 5 1 16 1 21 2 11 2 14 2 15 3 17 3 31 3 37 3 39 3 69 Altitude alerter 2 14 5 15 Altitu
30. A GARMIN us automatically be selected Figure 5 1 ChartView Chart Page 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the Flight Plan FPL page group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the Charts page 5 1 1 ChartView Optional Cover NOTE The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts The charts are displayed in full color with high resolution The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams Ihe ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen Inc ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer Available data includes e Arrivals STAR Departure Procedures DP Approaches Airport Diagrams e Chart NOTAMs 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 3 UJ ISAS DJOM9JOJ idd ds eDUepIOAV TI t te e fa n SHe V 8 unuuv 9 29 OquuAS Un leSso D y xipueddy X PU g xipueddy 298 Jeuonippy 8 295 7 29S 6 Annun Sec Sac L Sec c S 5 5 lt 3 Q ac d Ca nr liy Appendix B p po availability These indications are whether the databases are not configured not A ia GARMIN Cycle Number and Revision
31. ATE ideie Panna F FAT o FI 7 eT rar TE CELI Sec 4 S TE N o lt Press dhe HFD krob fo return to bese poce aH Figure 4 89 Weather Radar Page Menu 23 8 2 To deactivate ACT repeat the sequence 4 9 6 10 Turbulence Detection GWX 70 only optional E Turbulence Detection activates a feature that detects and displays severe turbulence Turbulence Detection is inactive at ranges greater that 160 NM This _ option feature requires a separate enablement See your dealer for details If Turbulence Detection is enabled and available Turbulence Detection will be Sawa as Inactive in any of the following conditions e Scan orientation is not Horizontal Scan range is greater than 160 NM 452 Radar mode is not Weather 1 While viewing the Weather Radar Menu turn the small or large MFD knob to E highlight Enable Turbulence Detection and then press ENT 2 To deactivate Turbulence Detection repeat sequence gt 4 6 11 Ground Clutter Suppression GCS GWX 70 only LE optional Ground Clutter Suppression reduces the amount of returns asa result of highly reflective objects on the ground such as buildings or cities while maintaining 4 110 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC the intensity and size of weather returns his optional feature requires a separate enablement See your dealer for details 1 While viewing the Weather Radar Menu turn the small or large MFD kn
32. CAUTION Activating rodar on ground Reod and follow oll safety precautions Continue activating radar Figure 4 91 Ground Radar Operation Caution 3 Press the BACK soft key 4 Press the MFD knob to activate the cursor 5 Turn the large MFD knob to place the cursor in the TILT field 6 Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small MFD knob to display ground returns at the desired distance Sec 4 5 te No S r 7 Press the MFD knob to remove the cursor 2224 10 GFDS Weather Optional z4 GFDS Weather is an optional feature available with the Iridium satellite system that is interfaced through the optional Garmin GSR 56 The primary gt maps for viewing Garmin Flight Data System GFDS Weather data are the Weather Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group These are the only GDU 620 map displays capable of all available GFDS weather products _ The Wx Weather pages may be oriented to either Track Up or North Up 55 Both GFDS and XM Weather may be installed and selected individually GFDS Weather coverage is available throughout most of Europe Canada and the U S Additional radar coverage areas are being added continuously Selection of the Weather Source is made on the Aux System Setup page More detail on GFDS weather products and coverage can be found at http fly garmin com fly garmin gids weather A NOTE A system can be configured for both XM and GFDS but both cannot z be di
33. Cell mode is most useful during periods of heavy storm activity Displaying cell data during these periods frees the user from sifting through a screen full of discharge points and helps to better determine where the storm cells are located gt lt I 2 D SoD Z m o a gt View S9Jn18924 euonippv G 235 The Mode selection allows you to select 360 or Arc views Clearing the StormScope Page unuuy Routinely clearing the StormScope Page of all discharge points is a good way to determine if a storm is building or dissipating In a building storm discharge points reappear faster and in larger numbers In a dissipating storm discharge points appear slower and in smaller numbers S 9 29 sioqui g 1 While viewing the Weather StormScope page press the Clear key to clear lightning strikes 0 5 2 Lightning strikes will be cleared from the display and the Rate value will be 2 reset MESSI NOTE When Heading is not available N A the pilot must clear the strikes S after each turn zi 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 153 GARMIN plomaio4 UJ91s g 29S ddd C 29 HIA 29 DULpIOAY pieze 7 9 This page intentionally left blank saunjed euonippy G 29 sue v S uhuuv 9 29 sioquJ S 298 Klesso D 8 29 y xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 154 A GARMIN TOC 5 ADDIT
34. ITI and IOI alerts are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS Page The alert is annunciated 2 when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table Minimum Clearance Altitude feet Flight Phase Level Flight Descending Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Approach Table 4 6 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values During final approach FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the _ aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0 5 NM of the approach runway or 2 below 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 NM of the runway threshold 4 4 5 4 Premature Descent Alerting z 5 A Premature Descent Alert PDA is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0 5 NM from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1 0 NM of the threshold During the final descent algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed distance and other parameters 4 20 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 700 T 600 m P z Z c 050 S S a p 400 H o 3 300 Dn WM D lt Eom PDA Alerting Area D 2 100 z Runway 1 gt 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d
35. Insert the SD card in the SD card slot the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel 2 To eject the card gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A 1 plomalo4 ula1s g ddd C 298 IN e2UepIOAV SJ9 v 8 SIN eo jeuonippv sioquu S UPSSO S we I KJ KJ a gt E a gt lt D X PU g xipueddy 235 298 ZEH Uunuuv o 288 Q 299 y 28g 5 298 C d 33S A TOC GARMIN Database Function Where Update Provider Name Stored Cycle z Aviation Airport NAVAID Internal 28 days on fly garmin com Updates installed via E Waypoint and GDU 620 Thursdays SD card and copied Airspace information memory into internal memory IGRF model AHRS magnetic Internal 5 years fly garmin com Included with PE variation model GRS 77 Aviation database u memory SafeTaxi Airport surface SD card 56 days on fly garmin com p diagrams Thursdays Z Terrain Topographic map SD card As required fly garmin com 9 arc second version SVT Terrain TAWS required for SVT Obstacle Obstacle information SD card 56 days on fly garmin com re for map SVT and Thursdays n TAWS Basemap Boundary and road Internal As required fly garmin com me information Memory or MEE SD card ur Airport Airport facility and SD card 56 days fly garmin com Database may be Directory FB
36. JAH 20 T5 Figure 1 14 System Startup Pages Pressing the ENT key or soft key indicated by the arrow acknowledges this information and displays the Navigation Map Page When the interfaced GPS 5 unit has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a position the aircrafts current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 13 Sec 1 System Foreword N Sec PFD Sec 3 MFD Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Sec 8 e Annun Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Features Appendix A Appendix B Index A ix GARMIN 13 International Geomagnetic Reference Field The IGRF International Geomagnetic Reference Field model is contained in the GRS 77 and is only updated once every five years The IGRF model is part of the Navigation Database At system power up the IGRF models in the GRS 77 and in the Navigation Database are compared and if the IGRF model in the GRS 77 is out of date the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in the GRS 77 The following prompt will appear after the G500 600 splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD GRS MV DB UPDATE AVAILABLE UPDATE FROM yyyy TO yyyy e g 2012 to 2014 Follow the on screen instructions 1 When the Update message appears to start the update process press the ENT key with OK highlighted To update at another time turn the Large knob to highlight Cancel and then press ENT P on L a
37. RS 485 CONFIG R 485 configuration e Contact your Garmin dealer for S error service SIMULATOR e Simulator mode is e Simulator mode is active active Do not use for navigation 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 6 11 An FAV J Cover Alert Message STORMSCOPE QD 45 qp tu Y a WY A A ua a 1 W L SW MISMATCH Ww OD so Ss CY Bio 2 1 O un CUO TN CT c D O Ou p OZ 6 Dh CO C 5 D a TERRAIN DSP ren RAI IC j u UDR UVa u L 7D CONFIG TRAFFIC FAIL 6 12 TOC Description Stormscope either reports a failure or has timed out Outside of terrain database coverage area Terrain database resolution is too low GDU software version mismatch No GDU crossfill External TAWS not available Internal TERRAIN SVT alerting enabled External TAWS contiguration mismatch Airframe does not support Terrain database Terrain or obstacle database error in TAWS B or TERRAIN SVT only ADS B traffic data does not match configuration Traffic device has failed Traffic data will no longer be displayed Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN Action Contact your Garmin dealer for service Repeat steps to reactivate SVT with the appropriate PFD soft keys Install 9 arc second database Contact your Garmin dealer for service Contact your Garmin dealer for service Update database
38. Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page Shown centered on the bottom of Traffic Map Page Table 4 15 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations For TAS traffic TEST MODE can be initiated from the Page Menu press the MENU key when the traffic device is in Standby mode 4 36 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 7 1 7 Traffic Pop Up When the GDU 620 MFD is displaying any page other than the Traffic page and a traffic alert becomes active the Traffic pop up will be displayed NOTE The traffic pop up will not appear when your aircraft is on the ground Press ENT to go directly to the Traffic page OR Press CLR to return to the previously viewed page Traffic Pop Up NAVIGATION MAP 1 Figure 4 29 Traffic Pop Up 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 3 d Ula1s g pJOmao4 HIA 298 gt z T E e rar SoJnjeo euontppv SUV 8 uhnuuv y xipueddy Klesso D sioqui S 29 9 29 Xopu g xipueddy 299 C 298 8 295 G 29 A TOC GARMIN 4 7 2 TIS Traffic Optional 5 WARNING The Traffic Information Service TIS is intended for advisory use only TIS is intended to help the pilot locate traffic visually It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic Eu A NOTE TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of i aTIS capable terminal radar site Aircraft without an operati
39. The ChartView database is revised every 14 days Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available _ for viewing upon reaching the disable date When turning on the GDU 620 the eal Power up Page indicates any of nine different possible criteria for ChartView availability See the table below for the various ChartView Power up Page displays and the definition of each 5 1 2 FliteCharts FliteCharts resemble the paper version of FAA published terminal procedures c charts FliteChart data may also be provided by sources other than the FAA The charts are displayed with high resolution and in color for applicable charts The MFD FliteCharts depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of approach charts FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin Available data includes e Arrivals STAR Departure Procedures DP Approaches 2 e Airport Diagrams not geo referenced Cycle Number and Revision FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer _ available for viewing upon reaching the disables date When turning on the GDU 620 the Power up p
40. The transponder provides traffic information to the display through an ARINC 429 digital interface 3 3 R A NOTE GTX 33 33D can also be used to display traffic information on the GDU 620 su Jy unuuy 9 22S y xipuaddy AJeSSO S sioquJ S 9 9S 98g XaPU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 11 v lis Appendix B O pendix TOC 1 2 A GARMIN System Power Up NOTE See the Aircraft Flight Manual AFM for specific procedures concerning avionics power application and emergency power supply operation NOTE Refer to Section 6 for system specific annunciations and alerts The G500 600 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses The GDU 620 and supporting sub systems include both power on and continuous built in test features that exercise the processor memory external inputs and outputs to ensure safe Operation During system initialization test annunciations are displayed All system annunciations should disappear typically within the first 30 seconds after power up Upon power up bezel key backlights also become momentarily illuminated on the GDU 620 display bezel On the PFD the AHRS begins to initialize and AHRS ALIGN Keep Wings Level is displayed The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute after power up The AHRS can align itself both w
41. alerting requirements outlined in Section 7 b of AC 23 26 Terrain SVT is a subset of Class B TAWS that provides a Class B TAWS FLTA functionality including visual alerting and aural alerting Terrain SVT is provided with the Synthetic Vision functionality and not marketed separately NOTE Terrain SVT is not a fully functional TAWS and does not meet the TAWS TSO C15 1c Terrain Proximity Refers to the display of the relative terrain elevations on the moving map No aural or visual alerts of any type are provided by a Terrain Proximity configuration j During power up of the GDU 620 the terrain obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer At the same time the Terrain system self test begins A failure message is issued if the terrain test fails a messge will not be issued forTerrain Proximity Sec 4 lt b te Ns lt Alert Source MFD Terrain Aural Obstacle Callouts Alerts Terrain PFD SVT Terrain Configuration Annunciator Obstacle Text Shading gro Terrain Proximity 2 0 c 0 0o Terrain Proximity GNS GTN ees emus a m z Terrain Proximity 3rd party wi3rd party EN m Terrain Terrain G500 600 G500 600 G500 600 G500 600 Terrain LUE GNS GTN G500 600 G500 600 GNS GTN GNSIGINTAWS TAWS GIN GIN TAWS Terrain SVT 3rd party s w 3rd party TAWS TAWS 500 600 ansa G500 600 G500 600 GSO0 60
42. e T E e rar calculated distance and direction of the traffic target A longer duration will lt result in a longer vector Press the smart key for the desired duration Altitude Filter pJezey Y 29 The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below Normal Above or x Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the Displayed Traffic Range table The filter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude Press the Alt Mode smart key to display the altitude smart keys Press the smart key to select the altitude filter value Altitude Mode Displayed Traffic Range 9900 ft to 2700 ft 2700 ft to 2700 f 2700 ft to 9900 f Unrestricted All Traffic Shown 9900 to 9900 feet Table 4 21 Displayed Traffic Range 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 5 Sec 4 Sec 5 Additional Feature Sec 6 A TOC GARMIN 4 8 XM WX Satellite Weather Optional The primary map for viewing XM WX Satellite Weather data are the Weather Data Link Pages in the Map Page Group These are the only GDU 620 map displays capable of all available XM WX Satellite weather products The XM WW Satellite Weather pages may be oriented to either Track Up or North Up N Pa 4 8 1 Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page the age of the data is displayed on the screen The age of the product is bas
43. e rar SH JY 9 QUJAG eS section describes the display and control functions available on the G500 600 d system A NOTE TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive 2 A A NOTE Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both _ Traffic Advisory Systems TAS and TIS Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent si indication d A NOTE Traffic is also displayed in the SVT feature on the PFD 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 31 5 N 1 au A ix GARMIN 4 7 1 1 Displaying and Operating Traffic TAS TCAS Systems The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS TCAS traffic data in relation to the aircrafts current position and altitude Traffic page orientation is always heading up The traffic mode and altitude filter mode are annunciated in the upper left corner Operating TAS TCAS OPER Mode UAG Range Ring Diameter Non Threat Traffic Traffic Advisory Ownship Off Scale Aircraft Symbol is Out of Range Traffic Advisory ES ANO Aircraft is 5000 ft Above and Proximity Advisory Descending 1200 ft Above and Climbing TRAFFIC H P L OPERATE F Non Bearing Traffic System is Unable to Determine Bearing Aircraft Distance Is 8 0 NM 1100 ft Above and Descending Figure 4 28 Traffic Map Page TAS TCAS 4 7 1 2 Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Modes The unit must be in operating mo
44. eee 5 1 3 3 E 5 1 Viewing FliteCharts and ChartView ssenenne 5 2 a 5 1 1 ChartView Optional 5 3 A 5 1 2 sl s 6 E AE 5 4 E E 5 1 3 Determining Chart Database Type Coverage and Currency 5 5 ge BA Selecting a Chalier eae cantore rnit rere 5 7 5 1 4 1 Selecting FliteCharts or ChartView seeeeese 5 7 St 5 1 4 2 Selecting a New Chart by FPL NRST or RECENT 5 8 Le 5 1 4 3 Selecting a Chart Manually es 5 8 5 1 4 4 Chart Auto Selection cccccesssssssssssssssssssessesssssessessrseesees 5 9 SN UE R8 UPPER TREND 5 11 2 E 5 1 5 1 Chart ZOOMING and PANNING sene 5 12 5 1 5 2 Viewing Chart Details in ChartView s es 5 13 5 1 5 3 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter 5 15 2 51 54 Viewing Chart NOTAMS sssseennnnnnnnee 5 16 5 1 5 5 Day Night View sieisen 5 17 GM I EEA AAA 5 18 E 5 2 1 STIG D eE E ES 5 19 i 52 11 DeclUttefilhiguasaset cseteris rete retire ions 5 19 m Dou THOR SOON WONMM a lO sees ruit tee teret demie ate tone 5 19 E E 5 2 2 SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision 5 21 5 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment e 5 22 5 3 1 Activating Sirius XM Satellite Radio Services 5 22 XIV Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 5 4 2 9
45. increases For example when the first TA is displayed a voice and visual annunciation are generated As long as a single TA remains on the display no additional voice alerts are generated If a second TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases another voice alert is generated C 298 298 gt z 9 T EI e rar A Traffic Not Available TNA voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of range Traffic may not be displayed in the radar coverage area due to the following SoJn e9J euonippv G 235 e Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS capable Mode S radar site Helv 8 uhuuv 9 IPS Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site sioquu S 29g e Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage In flat terrain the coverage extends from about 3000 feet upward at 55 miles Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all 5 directions 3 gt 8 235 Aless Traffic does not have an operating transponder y xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 43 A is GARMIN 4 7 2 5 TIS System Status The GDU 620 performs an automatic test of T
46. selected and are located at the bottom of the MFD display Press the soft key located directly below the soft key label To select the function indicated on the soft key label press the soft key directly below the label Selected Soft Key Unselected Soft Keys HAVIGATION HAP 1 MH TERRAIN BACK Soft Key Labels Soft Keys Figure 1 20 MFD Soft Key Layout 1 4 3 Using the Page Menus The GDU 620 has a dedicated MENU key that when pressed displays a context sensitive list of options for functions in the MFD This options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently displayed window page There is no all encompassing menu Some menus provide access to additional submenus that are used to view edit select and review options Menus display No Options when there are no options for the window page selected Soft key presses do not display menus or submenus Navigating within a Menu 1 Press the MENU key to display the menu 2 Turn the small or large MFD knob to scroll through a list of available options a scroll bar always appears to the right of the window box when the option list is longer than the window box 3 Press the ENT key to select the desired option 4 Press the CLR key or MFD knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 19 m eO D TENE DJOM 29S ddd C 298 qA
47. 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN __ s BEEN 7 Miscellaneous Symbols Symbol Description i Fixed Wing Low Win Fixed Wing High Wing Kit Plane ORE 00 i Single Engine Jet Default Map Cursor H Parallel Track Waypoint Ff Restricted Prohibited Warning Alert TFR Temporary Flight Restrictions ee Chass Balrspace uH User Waypoint Table 7 7 Miscellaneous Symbols 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 1 GARMIN plomalo4 UJa1s g 29S ddd C 298 di 298 eDUPpIOAV piezeH Y 29 This page intentionally left blank SoJniea euonppy G 29 S y 8 uhnuuv 9 29 sjoquuiAs L Alesso 5 8 29S y xipuaddy Xapul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 8 A GARMIN 8 GLOSSARY ACT ACTV active activate ADC Air Data Computer ADF Automatic Direction Finder ADI Attitude Direction Indicator ADS B Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast AFF Automatic Flight Following AFM Airplane Flight Manual AFMS Airplane Flight Manual Supplement AGL Above Ground Level AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System AIM Airman s Information Manual AIRMET Airman s Meteorological Information ALT altitude AP autopilot APR approach APT airport aerodrome ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated ARSPC airspace ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center AS airspeed ASOS Automated Surface Observing System ATC Air Traf
48. 2 The appropriate ILS frequency must be activate in the navigator 3 Verity that the waypoints for the approach are displayed on the Nav Map Page or the FPL Page of the MFD 4 Upon approaching the tinal course select LOC on the HSI Sec 7 Symbols NOTE If auto CDI switching is active on the GPS unit the GPS will force the GPS GDU 620 to NAV when the aircraft is close to the LOC course Sec 8 Glossary 5 The CDI and course pointer will change trom magenta to green and the pointer will move or slew to the final approach course or 180 from the final approach course for LOC BC approaches Appendix A Appendix B Index 2 26 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN ARITE IT rr oodbor and lor tina sapma tix ODAS MRD AOAO Cab vo 3000 din RANO LOM n repente bh dee rot noy m Can C 53 he 3000 DJOM9JOJ cn WN 48 T Course Pointer slewed to 0 for the Backcourse WOO TY GO eR iN E TI Figure 2 36 Auto Slewing HSI with Localizer Backcourse Loaded and Shown with the X Corresponding Approach Plate d 2 8 Supplemental Flight Data PE 2 8 1 Bearing Pointers Two Bearing Pointers can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources The pointers are light blue and are single BRG1 or double lined BRG2 an icon is shown in the respective information window to indicate the pointer type The system must be configured for a second navigation source to show the BRG2 selection
49. 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired Diameter Route Width and then press ENT A C WY gt i 4 10 4 2 GFDS Data Request Auto Request 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Auto Request Update Rate lt 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Off or an Update Rate When finished selecting the Update Rate press ENT The Update Rate will default to OFF at each power cycle AUTO REQUEST UPDATE RATE ED HAMUAL REQUEST REQUEST STATUS Ed Figure 4 101 GFDS Data Request Auto Update Rate 4 120 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H amp GARMIN ims 4 10 4 3 GFDS Data Request Manual Request The GFDS weather data may be updated at any time regardless of the automatic 2 update timing by selecting a Manual Request When multiple requests are made some products are merged with the old data SIGMETs AIRMETs TAFs TFRs and METARs but the old data of other products is discarded Yu 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Manual Request Send Req S 2 Press ENT REQUEST STATUS Ok Hext auto updote 8 Minutes Figure 4 102 Manual GFDS Data Request 3 The update request will occur immediately The action will be noted in the Request Status window The Auto Request time will be reset to the selected value T gt zZ e T E e rar pJezey Y 29 4 10 4 4 GFDS Data Request Status Window The Request Status window will show a response such as OK when
50. 2 27 Best glide 2 8 3 33 Bezel keys 1 16 1 18 Blind Alley 4 99 TOC o BRG 1 2 2 4 Brightness 1 21 1 22 3 31 3 32 C Calibrated gain 4 106 Call suppression 3 60 Canadian Nexrad 4 64 x Cautions iv 3 6 3 40 4 13 4 17 4 30 Annun A 101 4 102 4 112 5 31 EDI 116 121 272 2 3219 2720 271 2722p 222a 3 36 3 37 3 67 lt CDI source 2 22 2 25 2 28 Cell movement 3 21 3 22 4 56 4 82 Channel 1 10 3 42 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 29 Chart category 3 71 5 8 Charts 3 77 5 1 5 2 5 4 5 17 ChartView 5 1 5 2 5 3 A 1 A 3 A 7 ChartView database 5 3 5 4 A 1 A 3 ChartView subscription A 3 Check attitude 5 31 City 3 6 3 70 3 73 4 56 4 94 gt City forecast 4 56 4 77 4 78 Class B airspace 3 6 3 26 7 7 Class C airspace 3 6 3 26 7 7 Class D airspace 3 6 3 27 7 7 Cloud tops 4 56 4 67 4 68 Cloudy 4 57 Cold front 4 77 Color scheme 5 17 Combined NEXRAD 4 142 Compass card 2 19 2 21 Continental US NEXRAD 4 140 CONUS 4 140 County warnings 4 56 4 79 Course Deviation Indicator CDI 2 19 B 2 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN 2 20 2 21 2 22 Course pointer 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 25 Course select 1 16 2 1 2 23 Crossfill 1 21 3 36 Cross track error 2 22 Current heading 1 16 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 24 Current track indicator 2 19 2 21 Cursor 1 18 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 21 3 32 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 73 3 75 7 7 Customizing
51. 235 ddd C 298 HIA 298 gt lt T E e rar Ajesso q sioqu S sue v 9 saJnjea 8 29 L 29 unuuy euonppy y xXipueddy Xopu g xipueddy G 29 9 29 Sec 4 Sec 5 Additional A TOC GARMIN Combined NEXRAD Regional NEXRAD data and CONUS NEXRAD data are shown together The two types of NEXRAD are separated by a white stippled border This boundary is updated whenever new Regional or CONUS NEXRAD data is received The radius of the boundary is fixed at 150 NM APA Ara Foreword CONUS Data Area Regional Boundary S N S lt Features NAVIGATION HAF 1 DCLTR Annun amp Alerts Figure 4 121 FIS B Combined NEXRAD 4 11 5 5 SIGMETs and AIRMETs SIG AIR SIGMETs SIGnificant METeorological Information and AIRMETs _ AIRmens METeorological Information are broadcast for potentially hazardous co amp weather considered of importance to aircraft A Convective SIGMET is issued E for hazardous convective weather A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position When enabled SIGMET AIRMETS advise the pilot of potentially hazardous weather to all aircraft SIGMET AIRMET data covers icing turbulence dust and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service The update rate is every 12 minutes E i Sec 7 mbols Sy Appendix A 4 142 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev
52. 3 1 Target Selection Traffic targets displayed on the dedicated traffic page may be selected in order to obtain additional information about a traffic target 1 Press the small MFD knob to start target selection NE 23 23 mt C CD hie Cn D C C JJ 2 Turn the small or large MFD knobs clockwise or counter clockwise to step R through selection of the available targets a 3 After selecting a target you can press the small MFD knob to leave the target e M selected and return the small MFD to page selection mode E 4 Use the DESELECT softkey to turn off selected traffic 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 4 A TOC GARMIN ADS B and TCAS Status and E m Altitude Filter a an TA Selected Map enum EN Traffic Info Orientation P aa ae Range Ring Radius Iraffic Motion Basic Directional EC Vector Tr affic 4000 ft At 4 t7 t Below and Climbing Ownship Icon Range Rings w MEE Selected Vector P E Motion and ABSOLUTE MQTION 1 MIN to Exit eee d i Duration SEE SES TIT ext Targe MOTION ALT MODE DESELECT ADVISORY Figure 4 32 ADS B Traffic Page Absolute Motion NOTE Traffic targets within 1200 ft vertical separation and 6NM from the ownship are depicted as proximate targets Symbol Description Basic Non Directional Traffic Basic Directional Traffic Basic Off scale Selected Traffic n Proximate Non Directional Traffic Proximate
53. 5 50 Obstacle Depiction on PFD Unlike the MFD moving map display obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors based on relative altitude but will be colored to 5 match any SVT TERRAIN or TAWS Alert from that obstacle Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircrafts altitude are not shown Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays 5 44 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 5 3 8 Unusual Attitudes Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display pointing to the direction to fly to correct the unusual attitude condition The display shows either a brown or blue band of color at the top or bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme pitch attitudes Two conditions that inhibit SVT and generate alerts on the PFD The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database The terrain database is out of date using an older terrain database card Blue Band Sky Representation del EA Ci ragg sR 1900 igna Figure 5 51 Unusual Attitude Display Blue Band 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 45 DJOM9JOJ UJa1s g ddd 3IN 298 e2UPepIOAV pJezeH Y 29S TI 0 te 1 ua suly 8 unuuy y xipuaddy AJeSSO S sioquJ S L 29 9 29 Xopu g xipueddy 298 C 298
54. 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary GDL 88 is inoperative or connection to GDU is lost GDL 88 CSA failure Appendix A Appendix B Index 6 4 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action DATALINK e GDL 88 external 3 cont traffic system has a 3 low battery e GDL 88 external Ze traffic system in standby for more than 60 seconds Ls DATA LOST e Pilot stored data was e Reset your settings On lost Recheck data e 500 600 pilot configurable items and settings have been returned to default settings DB ERR e Database foundon e Remove database or move to top card bottom slot 3 T DB SYNC e Database sync e Restart required to use new 2d COMPLETE complete databases DB SYNC e No database card e Contact your Garmin dealer for DISABLED found to receive service databases DB SYNC e Not enough space to Contact your Garmin dealer for ERROR receive one or more Service databases DIAG MODE e System is in L Diagnostic Mode S 4 DSCRT CONFIG Discrete outpout e Contact your Garmin dealer for configuration error service D ENG SENSOR e Configuration error e Contact your Garmin dealer for UNIT 1 2 Communication with service sensors is halted e Communication with sensors lost 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 6 5 A La GARMIN Alert Message Description Action 5 ETM CAPTURE Engine Trend Monitor e Ref
55. 7 Selecting Items on the Map When the target pointer is placed on an object the name of that object is highlighted even if the name wasn t originally displayed on the map This feature applies to airports NAVAIDs user created waypoints roads lakes rivers just about everything displayed on the map except route lines When ord Em y an airport NAVAID or user waypoint is selected on the map display you can Sec 2 OD a A Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B review information about the item 1 While viewing the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group press the small MFD knob to activate panning PFD No U1 A W lt x Sxe Se Move the cursor with the small and large MFD knobs to highlight a feature Press ENT to display information about the highlighted feature Press one of the soft keys for details of the selected topic Press the small MFD knob again to return to panning amp Alerts Features Avoidance Symbols Appendix A Index 3 8 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 1 8 Measuring Distances The Measure Bearing Distance function provides a quick and easy method to determine the bearing and distance between any two points on the Navigation Map 1 While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group press MENU 2 Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight Measure Bearing Distance and then press EN
56. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops gradients and cell buildup activity at various altitudes HIA 298 pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar See the documentation of each radar for specific features S9Jn189J jeuonippv Alesso s S OQUWAS SHY 8 Q 29g aS unuuv 9 28g G aS y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 89 Sec 5 Additional D Sec 1 Sec 2 lt N au Annun Appendix B A TOC GARMIN 4 9 1 1 Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting and Ranging Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting a microwave pulse beam that upon encountering a target is then reflected back to the radar receiver as a return echo The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna with the most intense energy in the center of the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge The same antenna is used for both transmitting and receiving The returned signal is then processed and displayed on the G500 600 MFD Foreword System Radar detection is a two way process that requires 12 36 micro seconds for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out and back for each nautical mile of target range It takes 123 6 micro seconds for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip if a target is 10 NM away The GWX weather radar should be used to avoid sev
57. AUS HII Gaisras rrari teers UPS rds 4 9 6 5 Sector Scan GWX Radars Only 4 9 6 6 Antenna Stabilization sseeeeeeee 4 9 6 7 Weather Attenuated Color Highlight WATCH 4 9 6 8 Weather Alert GWX Radars Only 4 9 6 9 Altitude Compensated Tilt ACT GWX 70 only 4 9 6 10 Turbulence Detection GWX 70 only optional 4 9 6 11 Ground Clutter Suppression GCS GWX 70 only optional m 4 110 38 4 9 7 Ground Mapping and Interpretation sse 4 111 410 GFDS Weather Optional nsi FADE UEM VEM II rhrdptUri DE 20102 4 10 1 GFDS Registration 4 113 22 8 4 10 1 1 Register With GFDS ccsscccscssecseessessessesseessesseesseeseeseeen 4 113 89 4 10 1 2 Deactivate Unit Registration With GFDS 4 114 4 10 2 Using GFDS Satellite Weather Products 4 114 Z 4 4 10 3 Customizing the GFDS Weather Map se 4 115 3 9 4 10 4 GFDS Data Request esent ee ee een 4 116 4 10 4 1 GFDS Data Request Coverage eneee 4 117 ex 4 10 4 2 GFDS Data Request Auto Request 4 120 a So 4 10 4 3 GFDS Data Request Manual Request 4 121 4 10 4 4 GFDS Data Request Status Window ote 4 121 Zu Weatner Page Map OMe atl Ol tenastrern sniedenenenceettoctiorsien 4 121 2 R 4 10 6 Precipit
58. Altitude 0 Foot Difference On Ground PJOM 104 e Cn aR D e gt Brown Band Indicating The Ground Radar Altimeter Value Figure 2 46 Radar Altimeter Display 0 foot RA Altitude The Radar Altimeter self test process will be annunciated on the PFD above _ the Radar Altimeter altitude value The self test is a wiring test to indicate communication between the GDU and the Radar Altimeter The self test will be cancelled after 15 seconds the Test key is pressed again or you leave the System Setup page e2UPDIOAV piezeH Y 29S A NOTE Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function sounjea4 euontppy G 298 1 Turn the large MFD knob to Aux mode and then turn the small MFD knob to the System Setup page 2 Press the RA TEST soft key RA TEST will be annunciated above the Radar Altimeter value The Radar Altimeter value will show a certain number to indicate that communication is taking place between the Radar Altimeter and the GDU See your Radar Altimeter documentation for the appropriate value sue v 9 unuuv 9 29 sioquJ S 29 RA TEST Figure 2 47 Radar Altimeter Test Annunciation 3 Press the RA TEST key again to stop the self test leSso D 8 29 4 Ifthe unit fails the self test the RA value will not match the expected value The RA FAIL annunciation will appear on the PFD when the GDU is not receiving any Radar Altimeter data RA FAIL is not related to
59. B Traffic Wire Obstacle Figure 3 4 Map Overlay Icon Samples D Iu o e O 3 1 3 Selecting Page Options Change the fields or the setup of a page by pressing the MENU key and make the necessary adjustments with the MFD knobs Features 2 Turn the large MFD knob to select desired item i 3 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 4 Press ENT to accept the displayed value 3 5 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing Appendix A Index 34 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 1 4 Changing the Navigation Map Range The Range RNG keys on the right side of the bezel are used to change the map display range Pressing the ZW RNG key will zoom out increasing the displayed map range and pressing the ul RNG key will zoom in the displayed map range The Map Range is shown on the outer range ring The y map ranges available are from 250 feet to 500 NM 3 1 5 Decluttering Map Pages The Map Declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of decluttering to remove map information The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR soft key NAVIGATION MAP 1 DCLTR T Y Figure 3 5 Map Declutter Soft Key P 1 There are four levels of decluttering DCLTR 0 shows the most detail DCLTR 3 removes the most detail i 2 While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages press the DCLTR soft key
60. DS M 4 59 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide Xi m Foreword Sec 6 Annun Hazard Sec 3 Additional kannan y Appendix B Cored Syste J PFD MFD Q Avoidance Features Ces Symbols sSa y Appendix A Index Cover 4 9 Xii A GARMIN sie 2 OMEN iar Pen 4 61 4 8 5 2 NEXRAD Limitations Geseseunsa sacas E ear axe FUE OE R138 USE UI ERE REIR eR 4 61 4 8 6 XM Weather Page Map Orientation esses 4 62 4 8 7 NEXRAD Data Viewing Range sseeeeeeee 4 63 4 8 8 NEXRAD Legend E 4 63 4 8 9 NEXRAD SOUL CC zcemeacsacmcarateicnsceceacesace acesce cece utadetaiescdatecneatets 4 64 48 10 AMENO TODS ereraa pon nisar eene ENESES TAE EEES Eaa 4 65 ASTI AM Coud TOD eeren a A AE 4 67 4 8 12 XMWX Satellite Lightning eeennns 4 69 45 13 XM SIGMETs and AIR METS ccrte tonto eot et tette cota 4 70 BOM nud 4 72 dodo AM METARS rsisi itapet ti be iu EE EAD ERR 4 73 9 15 UNOS FOI secs AR UP DESEE ot LES SENE UUE 4 75 4 8 17 XM Surface Analysis and City Forecast ssssss 4 7 4 8 18 XM County VUOERITIOS e ebesenecentitseseue sacram 2omig ea tie depen Eois hiat 4 9 1 om pS A 4 80 4 8 20 XM Cell MOVGITIGDI 225 cca2ces sesiuedsteacuedsscsaedstestaedeeesauedetexeecica 4 82 4821 REPS censore uie ate EOE ETE i 4 83 4822 AMC ONE soseer ee en ee 4 85 2 22 AM FEEN LNE saesae
61. Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions Forecasts are available for intervals of 12 24 36 8 R and 48 hours by pressing the SRFC TIME soft key or in the Page Menu Weather Setup options When enabled the Surface Analysis forecast shows frontal lines indicat ing weather fronts and the direction they are moving High and Low pressure centers are noted with a large H or L The Forecast Time menu item will step through the intervals manually E C 29 EN I Q C CD j un D unuuy TTG AN tS sjoq Figure 4 53 XM M Weather cries m n di Forecast A Cold Front is a front where cold air replaces warm air A blue line with blue triangles that point in the direction of the cold air flow a v Figure 4 54 XM Weather Cold Front A Warm Front is where warm air replaces cold air An orange line with orange half moons that point in the direction of the warm air flow Ai aie Figure 4 55 XM Weather Warm Front IPCC UE Sol A v xipuaddwv y xipuaddy X9pu zu C XIpuadav 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 Sec 5 Sec 1 System Sec 2 A La GARMIN A Stationary Front is a front with very little horizontal movement The line E alternates with orange and blue sections which point in opposite directions to symbolize little movement B m Figure 4 56 XM Weather Stationary Front An
62. G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Radar Altimeter Minimums When a radar altimeter is installed and configured the pilot has the option to select either Radar Altimeter RAD ALT or Barometric Altitude BARO Minimums Radar Altimeter Minimums behave the same coloring and operation as the Barometric Minimums except that Baro Minimums are based on barometric altitude while the Radar Altimeter Minimums reflect distance above the ground For instance while the Baro Minimums bug may remain constant where in the same situation the Radar Altimeter value could move up and down due to terrain 3 DJOM9JOJ Wass HINIHUMm SOLURDE ALTITUDE O I Barometric Altitude S Radar Altimeter Minimums Bug 200 Foot Difference Qo I Brown Band Indicating D The Ground B Radar Altimeter Minimums Value 3 Radar Altimeter Value j Figure 2 25 Minimums Values with a Radar Altimeter a g 3 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 17 29 unuuy euonippy pJezeH 29g 9 298 y 29g 298 8 295 g xipuaddy G 29 10C GARMIN 25 Vertical Speed V S Indicator Vertical speed data is presented on the bottom right of the PFD A Vertical Speed bug and a bug setting are also available Vertical Speed Bug Current Vertical Speed Vertical Speed Bug Setting Figure 2 26 Vertical Speed V S Tape and Window S 5 The Vertical Speed Indicator displays the aircraft
63. GFDS Satellite Weather Products When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the o Navigation Map Page the age of the data is displayed on the screen The age of 5 the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time Weather products are refreshed at selectable intervals If for any reason a weather product is not refreshed within the 30 60 90 or 120 minute Expiration Time intervals the data is considered expired and is removed from the display This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by GFDS Satellite Radio services If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow 4 114 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN iss 4 10 3 Customizing the GFDS Weather Map Each Wx Map page may be customized individually The Wx Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu The Page Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the Weather Legends The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the viewing ranges of the _ weather products ZR 1 While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the _ Weather Setup option Press ENT IS d Presa tha
64. Ground Speed GTX Garmin Transponder HDG heading Heading The direction an aircraft is pointed based upon indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro HFOM Horizontal Figure of Merit Hg mercury hPa hectopascal HPL Horizontal Protection Level 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 8 3 DJ0M3J04 Wass 29 ddd C 298 diN 295 e2UepIOAV piezeH Y 29 SoJn e9J jeuonippv G 29 SHV 8 uhuuv 9 IPS sioquJ S 29 y xipueddy STIS 8299 X9pu g xipueddy Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 2 Sec 1 Sec 3 Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Appendix B Foreword System Features amp Alerts gt EI N j Oo Appendix A Index Cover HSDB HSI Hz IAF ICAO IFR IGRF ILS IMC IOI INFO in HG INT INTEG ITI L LAT LCD LCL LED Leg LIFR LNAV LOC LOI LON LPV LRU m LTNG MAG MAG VAR MapMX MAX 8 4 TOC A GARMIN High Speed Data Bus Horizontal Situation Indicator Hertz Initial Approach Fix International Civil Aviation Organization Instrument Flight Rules International Geomagnetic Reference Field Instrument Landing System Instrument Meteorological Conditions Imminent Obstacle Impact information inches of mercury intersection s integrity RAIM unavailable Imminent Terrain Impact left lett runway latitude Liquid Crystal Display local Light
65. H TOC Cursor Location Turbulence Line Surface Winds Line FIS B WEATHER MAP 4 LEGEND ADVISORY Figure 4 122 FIS B AIRMETs SIGMETs SIGMET AIRMET SIG AIR Viewing Range gt zZ e T E e rar Cursor On AIRMETISIGMET Line IFR and Mountain Obscured Line pJezey Y 29 The SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value SIGMET AIRMET products will be gt shown on the selected MFD FIS B Weather Map page 1 2 or 3 When Of 2 5 is selected SIGMET AIRMET will not be shown For a value selected such as 150 NM SIGMET AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of that value p 150 NM and lower 1 While viewing a FIS B Weather Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the SIG AIR Viewing Range value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 143 A TOC GARMIN Viewing Textual SIGMETs AIRMETs Textual SIGMET AIRMETs can be viewed by selecting an SIGMET AIRMET 5 li
66. NM Wnd Aloft Data Viewing Range Off 10 NM to 500 NM TFR Data Viewing Range Off 10 NM to 500 NM Table 4 27 GFDS Weather Page Menu Setup Options 4 10 4 GFDS Data Request It is necessary to request the downloading of weather products Requests can a m E lt o be sent manually or set to automatically update at a selected rate lt 3 1 While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight GFDS Data Request Press ENT OPTIONS A d Press the HFD knob to return to bose poge 9 Figure 4 96 Select GFDS Data Request 4 116 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to the next position z DFDS DATA REQUEST COVERAGE E PRESENT POSITION DESTINATION A D E FLIGHT PLAN E is WAYPOINT DIAHETER ATE WIDTH AUTO REQUEST UPDATE RATE Haril REGUEST 15608 si STATUS OK Hgxt auto updote 5 Hinutes gt z T E e rar pJezey 7 29 Press the MFD knob to return to bose page Figure 4 97 GFDS Data Request Page 4 10 4 1 GFDS Data Request Coverage Present Position GFDS Data Request Ze R 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options 2 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight GFDS Data Request Pres
67. Occluded Front is where a cold front has overtaken and merged with a warm front The line alternates with the blue triangle and orange half moon sym bols on the same side of the line pointing in the direction the front is moving M O A d Figure 4 57 XM Weather Occluded Front Forew PFD Surface Data Viewing Range Sec 7 Annun Additional Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B The Surface Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Surface Data weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Surface Data will not be shown Where a value such as 150 NM is selected Surface data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 150 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Surface Data Viewing Range value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted a I S s Features amp Alerts 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Forecast Time The Forecast Time option allows you to select the forecast time when the Surface and City Forecast weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 Forecasts are ava
68. Other E 6 ADIZ airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower TFR Viewing Range optional Jt The Temporary Flight Restriction TFR viewing range option selects whether TFR information is shown on the Navigation Map TFR information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected TFR information will 2 be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower This optional feature requires an active data link receiver TFRs are provided through the datalink Some TFRs _ may exist that are not available to the datalink provider and as such will not be displayed XIDUSQC 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 2 A TOC GARMIN Airways The Airways option allows you to select the airways that are shown on the Navigation Map All Low only and Hi only Airways may be selected When Off is selected airways will not be shown Foreword Smart Airspace The Smart Airspaces selection filters airspaces to show the ones appropriate for your altitude Garmin s Smart Airspace feature aids visual clarity on screen by de emphasizing airspace thats well above or below the aircrafts current altitude The vertical separation is 1 000 feet at sea level and the vertical separation will gradually increase to 2 000 feet until the aircraft reaches 10 000 feet Anything above 10 000 feet keeps the 2 000 feet vertical
69. Page Menu Option Selection to Restore Defaults 3 3 1 3 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts if interfaced to an audio panel when approaching the Selected Altitude See x 2 4 4 Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height Alerting section of the PFD 5 section for more details 1 While viewing the Charts Page of the FPL page group press the Menu key With the Set Minimums item highlighted press ENT 2 With the Minimums Source highlighted select the Altitude Minimums Alerter source with small MFD knob Figure 3 94 Minimums Source Selection 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value Turn the large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value SOLIRCE ARO ALTITUDE Figure 3 95 Minimums Altitude Selection 4 Press ENT to activate the selected value 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 69 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 5 Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Additional Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A lt a GARMIN In dual installations the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units Foreword NOTE If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and press the CLR key it will turn the minimums functionality off System 3 3 2 Waypoint Information Page The Waypoint Information page pr
70. Sec System 1 While viewing one of the Navigation Map pages of the Map page group press the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu PeGE MEME Ma g a n PT Tih Er m L Prive he HED took te reir to bows pe Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Figure 3 11 Navigation Map Page Menu With the cursor flashing on the Map Setup option Press the ENT key to display the Map Setup Menu Sec 5 Additional Features I UO Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Group and press ENT to allow editing of the selected group The groups shown depend on the features available for equipment installed in your aircraft Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Figure 3 12 Navigation Map Page Menu Map Group Selection 4 Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page Appendix A Appendix B Index 3 10 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Map Group Weather Group Traffic Group Aviation Group optional optional Orientation North Up NEXRAD Off Range Traffic off Safe Taxi Off Range Track Up Viewing All Traffic Viewing DTK Up Range TA PA Range kh R HDG Up TA Only BC North Up At Off Range NEXRAD Off Range Rwy Off Range Cell Mov Extension Range Auto Zoom On Off NEXRAD On Off INT NDB ofiRange Legend Viewing Range Land Data On Off NEXRAD US Canada VOR Off Range ESA Source Viewin
71. Status page Power line data is available for the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico SafeTaxi The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports These diagrams aid in following ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways ramps runways terminals and services This database is updated on a 56 day cycle SafeTaxi will still be shown after it has expired FliteCharts The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only This database is updated on a 28 day cycle If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date FliteCharts no longer functions 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A 5 A TOC GARMIN Airport Directory optional The airport directory database contains airport facility and FBO information This database is optional and N A will be displayed in white text on the startup screen if the database is not installed This database may be available in multiple versions with varying update cycles and or content Since these databases are not stored internally in the GDU 620 a Supplemental Data Card containing identical database versions must be kept in each display unit for dual installations After subscribing to the desired database product the database product will need to be downloaded to a Supplemental Data Card Insert the Supplemental Dat
72. Table 4 8 G500 600 TAWS Annunciations 46 Terrain SVT Garmin Terrain SVI refers to a subset of Class B TAWS that meets the terrain alerting requirements outlined in Section 7 b of AC 23 26 Terrain SVT is 5 a subset of Class B TAWS that provides a Class B TAWS FLTA functionality with 5 visual alerting and aural alerting Terrain SVT is provided with Synthetic Vision Technology SVI functionality and not marketed separately 252 Garmin Terrain SVT alerting consists of the following alert types Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance FLTA Alerting which consists of Em Required Terrain Clearance RTC Required Obstacle Clearance ROC s Alerting E Imminent Terrain Impact ITI Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI Alerting Garmin Terrain SVT is available in G500 600 GDU 620 SW version 3 00 and later 5 Garmin Terrain SVT is required for those SVT installations that do not have E TAWS A or TAWS B enabled 4 26 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 6 1 Terrain SVT Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings Select the 120 Arc or 360 rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the 360 Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu arts AL Ei aas rc ne eid pe E D NTS COM uro Figure 4 23 Terrain SVT 360 and Arc Views 1 Press VIEW and then the 360 or Arc soft key OR gt z fo T e rar 2 Press MENU and the with the View Arc or View 360 selection
73. Tr UE FDUERDER ES Scd ODOODUOHS Nay SAU enatis inar aia o M 202 135 etuer IEF BIGEBBICBS rererere EE HE DERE TCR 3 35 3 2 1 6 Synchronization Dual Installations Only 3 36 SA EDI SIMI NUM P m 3 38 p 3 21 8 MFD Display Units 3 39 X 3 2 1 9 System Display Units occse 3 40 2 3 2 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Information Optional 3 41 E 3 2 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Entertainment Radio Optional 3 42 Be 3 2 4 SSIS IIR SOG 3 43 8 S B 3 2 4 1 Database Sync ODGIaEUOLD secos ccs tereti atienden ines 3 44 3 2 4 2 Resolving Database Conflicts 0 eee 3 48 9 3 2 5 ADS B FIS B Status optional e 3 50 88 o 3 2 6 External Video TODUODOsssewaeciree tor trit rotor 3 51 SP MERC e VICO SOUCO ener eee eer eer eee re 3 9 ga DA V ME ENERO ene E eee ee ee 3 52 85 3 2 6 3 Panning eee ee er ERE ER 3 52 SPP MS c Cc a eee 3 52 320 5 Restore Deau esenee EEE SEEE EENES 3 548 3200 FOSCO sssaaa EE rE IE DRIED EOE 355 22 Position Reporting optional ecemiired dato Ren Rm 3 56 oP E T E EEE 3 56 Deck RONDO iope eE D E a 3 56 3 2 8 Iridium Phone Operation Optional 3 59 IP CM UU 3 59 3 2 8 2 Managing the Phone Book 3 61 Ded PRONE V UNE eE E 3 64 7 3 2 8 4 Making a Phone Call s cixcateiasnsacesinniateisscsdcesdenddtelasetaceiiensedels 3 65 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 60
74. When a Bearing Pointer is displayed its associated information window is also displayed Suly 79 unuuv 9 22S S OQWAS 29 AJeSSO D 8 299 The Bearing Information windows are displayed to the lower sides of the HSI and show e Bearing source GPS NAV or ADF Pointer icon BRGI single line BRG2 double line 3 The Bearing Pointer is removed from the HSI if gt The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station T The NAV radio is tuned to a Localizer frequency 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 2 A TOC GARMIN GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected e ADF is selected and a signal is not received if you have an ADF that supports a valid flag then the bearing pointer will be removed If your ADF system does not include a valid flag then the bearing pointer will still be displayed regardless of ADF signal validity Foreword System U D WY Bearing 2 Pointer m GPS Level Current Navigation Source of Service Bearing 1 Pointer CDI S Bearing 1 Source Bearing 2 Source Bearing 1 Bearing 2 e 2 Pointer Icon Pointer Icon 59 E Figure 2 37 HSI with Bearing Information lt L OCN ENR in E TERM E35 APR ac LNAV GPS i LNAV V GPS2 LPV wee eu LNAVIVNAV S i VOR2 LP t o LOCI LP V LOC oO a p 1 00nm i 0 50nm XE jon Ps ug eM OBS F LOI LOI SUSP vn NS Sec 8 Glossary Figure 2 38 PFD HSI Annunciations lt L
75. amp Alerts 5488 Sec 7 Symbols Current Beacon Icon Standard Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Table 2 2 Marker Beacons Appendix B Index 2 30 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 2 8 6 Miscompare Annunciations Miscompare annunciations are capable of being displayed on the PFD if the S miscompare Monitor is enabled during the installation configuration Q Messages will appear in the MFD alerts window if monitors are enabled and required data is not present W JS S g A miscompare condition is triggered if the difference between the data reported by GDU 1 and GDU 2 exceeds the threshold described in the following table for at least one second Parameter Range of Trigger Threshold 200 feet Indicated Airspeed Both IAS lt 35 kts Inhibited Indicated Airspeed Either IAS gt 35 kts ad on ddd 85 Loa Indicated Airspeed Either IAS gt 80 kts Rl AL degrees Table 2 3 Miscompare Conditions UPDIOAV pJezeH 2u In e 4 euonippy A MISCOMP annunciation is displayed on the airspeed tape if a miscompare condition exists for indicated airspeed A MISCOMP annunciation is on the altitude tape if a miscompare condition exists for altitude A PITCH gt MISCOMP annunciation is displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for pitch and not roll A ROLL MISCOMP annunciation is displaye
76. and ADC2 will only be displayed on GDU2 The CDI soft key toggles between selection of GPS or VOR LOC as the active navigation source In a single GDU 620 system the GDU CDI soft key will change the source in the connected navigator and making a source change in the navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620 In a dual GDU 620 system the CDI keys in the navigator are disabled s y 8 unuuv y xipueddy leSso D sioquifs 9 29g aS X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 37 ain 92S y 23S 9 29 A TOC GARMIN 3 2 1 7 Date and Time The Date and Time options allow you to select the time to change UTC time 2 to local time with a time offset DATE TIME DATE TIME TIME FORMAT TIME OFFSET Figure 3 46 Time Format and Offset Time Zone Local Standard Time Local Daylight Savings Offset Time Offset Table 3 6 U S Time Zone Offsets 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small A MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Time Format 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Local 12hr Local 24hr or UTC and then press ENT When Local 12 or 24 hour mode is selected the Time Offset value will then be highlighted 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired offset and then press ENT 3 38 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H Cover A GARMIN 48 FEB 88 LER WR n DJOM9JOJ
77. and LOC2 which points in the direction of the set course LOC will automatically be displayed if a localizer frequency is tuned The To From arrow rotates with the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received 2 6 1 Setting the Heading Bug The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds after being adjusted The light blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading Y C LL Foreword C Y CD Un YN gt val o NOTE The current heading will have a T to the right of the heading value when the Nav Angle is set to True in the System Setup page of the E z Aux page group E Current Heading _ Magnetic North S New Heading Bug Setting Heading Bug ES Magnetic North Current Heading True north e New Heading Bug Setting a True North c Figure 2 28 Heading Bug Setting 1 Press the HDG key to activate HDG mode 2 Turn the PFD knob to change the Heading Bug Sec 7 Symbols O JO Sec 8 Glossary 3 Press the PFD knob in HDG mode to set the Heading Bug to the current heading Appendix A Appendix B Index 2 20 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 2 6 2 Turn Rate Indicator The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card Tick marks to the left and right of the lubber line denote half standard and standard turn rates A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector s
78. are provided to the AHRS If GPS information from one of the inputs fails the AHRS uses the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot If both GPS inputs fail the AHRS x lt D O Appendix B 1 6 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC will continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid m O e D O o o It the magnetometer input fails the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information and GPS Track information is used however the heading display on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red X TRK in magenta is annunciated to the right of the Track value and the Track value color is changed from white to magenta NOTE In this case the magnetic standby compass and GPS ground track can be used to keep the aircraft on the desired heading U dd C 29 Note that SVT is turned off in track based reversionary mode SVT will automatically re enable when heading is restored Also map orientations change from HDG UP to TRACK UP and Map orientations will change back to HDG up when heading is restored 299 When heading fails the heading bug is not removed and the GDU continues driving the autopilot heading error output using track in place of heading e2UPpIOAV piezeH Y 29 SoJn eo euonippv G 29 Suly 8 unuuv 9 298 Heading Fail
79. aviation database update into the either card slot of the GDU 620 to be updated label of SD card should face up 2 Turn the G500 600 System ON 3 Verify the correct update cycle is loaded during power up Press the ENT key to So continue or the CLR key to cancel loading Figure A 1 Database Initialization Display 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A 3 y Xipuaddy GARMIN 4 A notice on the display will indicate successful updating of the database Figure A 2 Database Loading Completed 5 The following display will show the databases and their current status A 4 THAT AERA ru Basemap Lond 4 BB A Safeloxi Expires 18 NO0V 2018 ae Terron 2 04 E Airport Terrain 2 84 amp Obstocle Expires T8 NOV 28 18 a Aviation Expires 19 HOV 2B 10 d Apt Directory Expires 18 HO0Y 28 10 E ChortVieu Disables 20 JAN 2011 All nap and toroa dala provided is only to ba usedugeg were reference to your surroundag ew ge an aid io crfuntional gmr Figure A 3 Database Information on the Splash Screen Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then small MFD knob to reach the System Status Page Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the DATABASE window Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases are current and there are no errors If a database is highlighted in yellow it is either expired or the G500 600 can not determine the d
80. be lt presented to restart the unit No pop up will appear if the aircraft is moving or has been in the air since the unit was turned on 5 Pressthe Restart soft key to continue updating the database ALERTS DH SYNC COMPLETE Race NS Ups HIDE Rgstort required to use new dotoboses Press the ENT key to return to the bose poge RESTART BACK Figure 3 59 System Restart Step 1 WARNING The unit will reset and all GPS navigation and moving map functions may be lost while the unit regains GPS position 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 47 A TOC GARMIN 3 2 4 2 X Resolving Database Conflicts If the G500 600 determines that there are multiple LRUs with the newest cycle of a database but they have different regions or types of that database i e Fixed wing vs Rotorcraft navigation database different regions of the navigation database or different obstacle database types then a database conflict will occur When a database conflict occurs that database will not be SYNC until the pilot resolves the conflict Initiate the resolve conflicts function on the unit that contains the databases which the pilot wishes to use These databases will amp then be sent to other units 1 Press the DB SYNC soft key and then select the Resolve Conflicts function on the LRU with the desired databases DATRGASS SYME DATABASE CY CLESVER ME STATUS SHC CONFLICTS The Fallawing active dotoboses
81. certain autopilots Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the vertical speed mode if available Jeuonippy Tl 0 te e 1 ua s y 8 unuuy sioquJ S L 29 Adjust the vertical speed bug in the normal manner when using the vertical speed mode interface Some autopilot installations support engaging disengaging the vertical speed mode using the VS key on the PFD The PFD 2 knob window will indicate when this function is available The vertical speed mode may be alternately engaged or disengaged by pressing and holding the VS D 8 295 I key on the PFD bezel E HOLD HOLD TO DISENG TO ENGAGE I Fk i a 8 y 9 y e V 5 LN a Figure 5 37 Pressing and Holding the VS Key to Engage Disengage VS mode 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 35 7 29S G 29 9 29 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 c 5 a lt Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B A a GARMIN 5 4 7 Autopilot Mode Annunciations Some autopilots support mode annunciations located at the top of the PFD Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for details on the autopilot mode annunciations Foreword When autopilot annunciations are displayed at the top of the PFD the Nav Status information will be located to the left of the HSI NAV STAT
82. ddd C 29 JN 299 Vertical Speed Bug Setting e2UPpIOAV piezeH Figure 1 18 Pressing V S Knob Sets Vertical Speed Bug to Current Vertical Speed For aircraft with vertical speed operating limitations red bands showing Vertical Speed Maximum and Minimum ranges will be shown on the left side of the Vertical Speed tape When the Vertical Speed Indicator is in one of the red ranges the background color of the Vertical Speed Indicator will turn red euontppy sue v unuuy Vertical Speed Maximum Vertical Speed Bug Vertical Speed Indicator Current Vertical Speed O Vertical Soeed Minimum o i Vertical Speed Bug Setting lt lt Figure 1 19 Vertical Speed Warning Indication gt 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 17 y 285 G 29 9 29 A TOC GARMIN Barometer BARO Selects Barometric Setting Select mode Pressing the PFD knob in Baro mode toggles between standard pressure 29 92 in 1013 mb and the previously selected value 1 4 1 3 MFD Knobs The MFD knobs are for navigating and selecting information on the MFD pages More details are provided in the MFD section Se Small Inner MFD Knob Selects a specific page within a page group Pressing the small MFD knob turns the selection cursor ON and OFE When the cursor is ON data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small and large MFD knobs In this case the large MFD knob moves the cursor o
83. display operation 1 1 North up 3 1 3 11 3 12 4 52 4 54 4 116 NOTAM 5 3 5 16 Notes v NRST 5 8 O OAT 1 5 1 8 OBS 1 16 2 19 2 23 2 28 3 37 8 5 Obstacle data 3 17 4 4 4 24 A 5 Obstacles 3 13 3 15 3 17 4 4 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 43 5 44 7 4 A 5 Obstructions 4 9 4 10 Occluded front 4 78 Operating distance 4 95 Other airspace 3 27 Outside air temperature 1 5 1 8 2 1 Overspeed 2 6 Overview 1 1 P Page group 1 18 3 2 Page menus 1 18 1 19 1 20 3 10 3 11 3 21 3 24 3 25 3 32 3 68 4 6 4 14 4 27 4 53 4 54 Panning 3 7 5 12 5 19 Parallel track 7 7 Part Sun 4 57 PFD 1 4 1 15 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide TOC PFD display units 2 34 PFD options 1 21 3 31 3 34 3 35 PFD soft keys 2 2 Phone book 3 61 Phone call 3 65 Phone volume 3 64 Photocell 1 22 Pilot Controlled Lighting 3 74 PIREP 4 72 4 128 4 145 Pitch indication 2 9 2 11 Pitch scale 2 9 5 40 Position reporting 3 56 Power 4 137 Power up 1 5 1 12 1 14 4 11 4 24 4 44 5 4 5 21 A 3 A 7 Precipitation 4 61 4 65 4 73 4 90 4 92 4 93 4 101 4 108 4 122 4 130 4 147 Precipitation intensity levels 4 98 4 105 Premature descent alerting 4 20 Preset 5 29 Product age 4 52 4 55 Proximate advisory 7 2 Proximity advisory 4 32 R Radar 4 41 4 43 4 59 4 61 4 65 4 89 4 136 4 137 Radar altimeter 2 13 2 17 2 32 3 32 Radar gain 4 105 Rainy 4 57 Range key
84. e Mountain obscuration e Surface winds 4 70 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range The SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value SIGMET AIRMET products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected SIGMET AIRMET will not be shown Where a value such as 100 NM is v selected SIGMET AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 100 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight a AN the SIG AIR Viewing Range value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Viewing Textual Sigmet Airmets gt z T E e rar pJezey Y 29 Textual Sigmet Airmets can be viewed by selecting the Sigmet Airmet outline on the Weather WX page 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight a Sigmet Airmet line Press ENT 2 The Sigmet Airmet information will be shown Press the small MFD knob to return to the previously viewed page aso IHFORPHAT IGH SIGHET AIRET Fi
85. flight safety associated with weather terrain and air traffic This section is divided into the following groups ula1s g Terrain Avoidance Terrain Proximity e TAWS B Optional Terrain SVI Optional Traffic Avoidance e Traffic Advisory System Optional e Traffic Information Service TIS Optional GTX 33 330 Transponder did Z 286 U A required 3 Fp ADS B Optional GDL 88 required aoe Weather G 29 Jn1eo jeuol Ipp GDL 69 69A XM Satellite Weather Optional Weather Radar Optional GFDS Weather with the Iridium satellite system through GSR 56 Optional FIS B Weather with the GDL 88 Optional e Stormscope Optional 41 Terrain Details sia sue v 8 4 1 1 Terrain Configurations The following terrain awareness configurations and alerting are available in the G500 600 system TAWS B A system developed to meet the terrain alerting and ground proximity requirements for Class B TAWS systems as defined in TSO C151c Garmin s G500 600 Terrain Awareness and Warning System TAWS B is an optional feature and is intended to provide the flight crew with both aural _ and visual alerts to aid in preventing inadvertent Controlled Flight Into Terrain CFIT ipt Jy y dy Ipuad X d 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 1 A TOC GARMIN Terrain SVT Refers to a subset of Class B TAWS that will meet the terrain
86. highlighted press ENT 2 I E ETT fi Procs tho W inb te return to bose poca Free the APG kaob fit return te bise page Figure 4 24 Terrain SVT Page Menu Viewing Selections 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 2 piezep 7 22 A TOC GARMIN 4 6 2 Terrain SVT Page Aviation Data Select the display of Aviation data on the Terrain SVT page The Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain or the Map Setup options for the Navigation Map pages reword FO 1 While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group press MENU for Map g2 Selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain or the Map Setup options for the Navigation Map pages Pair Held oO AT DDS GFT Ee GT Prts tho HD imb ta return fo bose pace Press Ehe Mri kab to return tn base ange Figure 4 25 Show Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain SVT Page Sec 4 S S o N lt r 2 Press ENT to save the highlighted value 4 6 3 Inhibiting Enabling Terrain SVT Alerting Terrain SVT has an inhibit mode that deactivates the FLTA aural and visual alerts Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting Terrain SVT and always remember to enable the system when appropriate Sec 5 Additional Feature Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts TER INH TERRAIN SVT a NEN INHIBIT Sec 7 Symbols Figure 4 26 Terrain SVT Alerting Disabled Alerts Inhibit
87. if available to view XM weather information about the highlighted waypoint 4 Press the small MFD knob to return to the Active Flight Plan page 3 3 1 2 Active Flight Plan Options zc The Active Flight Plan page provides information for the flight plan currently in use for navigation To change data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page 22 5 1 While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window uM 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Change Fields and then press ENT Press the AAD bab to reium n bo mue Figure 3 91 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Option Selection 273 Turn the large MED knob to highlight the field you wish to change mALCTIVE FLIGHT PLAN DTK ETA CHRTHETAR Figure 3 92 Active Flight Plan Page Menu Change Fields Option Selection 3 68 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 10C 4 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired data item and press ENT 5 Press the small MFD knob to remove the cursor To restore factory default settings for data fields on the Active Flight Plan Page 1 While viewing the Active Flight Plan Page of the FPL page group press MENU to display the Active Flight Plan Page Options window 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Restore Defaults and then press ENT Press the AAD ken to reiua to bose acere Figure 3 93 Active Flight Plan
88. manual z 3 8 requests are made The time for the next auto update will be shown dc 4 10 5 Weather Page Map Orientation A The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages S N 1 While viewing the GFDS Weather Map 1 2 or 3 of the Wx page group press the MENU key With Weather Setup highlighted press ENT S 2 With the Map Orientation option active turn the small MFD knob to change m the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to gt the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option a 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 121 Sec 4 5 N zu A GARMIN 4 10 6 Precipitation PRECIP Data Viewing Range The PRECIP Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where 5 at and below the selected value PRECIP weather products will be shown on ab o Ss lt a the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected PRECIP weather data will not be shown In the figure below where 500 NM is selected PRECIP data will be shown at map ranges of 500 NM and lower TFRs and METARs are the only weather products shown below 10 NM Coverage Boundary GFOS WEATHER HAP 1 LEGEND Figure 4 103 GFDS PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend 1 While viewing a WX Data Li
89. maps 3 10 Customizing Nav Map pages 3 10 Cycle number 5 4 5 21 Cyclone 4 54 4 56 4 85 D Database 1 5 1 14 3 11 3 43 4 9 4 24 4 73 4 77 4 130 4 147 5 3 5 4 5 21 6 10 6 14 A 1 A 5 Databases A 1 Database SYNC 3 44 Data fields 3 68 3 69 Data link 1 2 1 10 4 38 4 52 4 55 4 59 4 62 4 66 4 68 4 69 4 71 A 73 4 75 4 76 4 78 4 79 4 82 4 86 4 112 4 121 4 127 4 131 4 133 4 138 4 151 Data Link Receiver troubleshooting 5 30 Date 1 21 3 31 3 38 5 4 5 21 6 14 A 5 Day view 5 17 DCLTR soft key 3 5 5 18 5 19 Decision Height DH 3 67 Declutter 2 11 3 5 3 6 4 31 5 19 Departures 4 20 5 3 5 4 Display brightness 1 21 1 22 3 31 3 32 Display units 1 22 2 34 3 31 3 39 3 40 Distance 1 21 3 7 3 9 3 10 3 12 3 13 3 39 3 67 3 70 Distance measuring 3 9 DME 2 30 7 1 Don t sink 4 18 4 23 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN DP 5 3 5 4 Dual installation 2 16 3 36 3 70 5 15 A 6 E Echo tops 4 56 4 61 4 65 4 66 4 67 ETA 3 67 Excessive descent rate alert 4 18 4 19 Expiration time 4 52 4 55 4 151 Exposure level 4 95 External TAWS 4 25 Extreme attitude 2 11 Extreme Pitch 2 11 5 45 Extreme Roll 2 12 F Facility 3 70 3 72 3 73 Fast Slow indication 2 34 Field of view 3 11 3 19 Five hundred aural alert 4 18 4 22 Flight director 5 34 Flight path marker 5 37 5 41 Flight phase 4 20 Flight plan 1 21 2 15 2 24 3 1 3 2 3 12 3 67
90. option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 79 A TOC GARMIN 4 8 19 XM TFRS Temporary Flight Restrictions TFRs provide detailed information for local short term restrictions The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes Sec 4 5 o 2 No lt TFR Detail Select TFR Symbol To View Details XM WEATHER MAP 1 P WX i LEGEND ADVISORY Figure 4 59 XM Weather TFRs The Temporary Flight Restriction TFR viewing range option selects whether TFR information is shown on the GFDS Weather Map TFR information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown For the value such as 500 NM selected TFR information will be shown at map ranges of that value 500 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 80 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Viewing Textual TFRs Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather WX 2 pages S 1 While viewing a XM Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cur
91. page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 4 5 te No lt Features Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Appendix B Index 4 66 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN n 4 8 11 XM Cloud Tops NOTE Due to similarities in color schemes the display of Cloud Tops is mutually exclusive with Echo Tops and NEXRAD DJ0M9JOJ Cloud Tops data depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery UJ91s g 299 ddd C 298 HIA 298 gt lt T EI e rar SoJnjeo euontppv G 29 Figure 4 44 XM Weather Cloud Tops To display the Cloud Tops legend select the LEGEND soft key when Cloud Tops is selected for display Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude display of these weather products is mutually exclusive When Cloud Tops is activated Echo Tops or NEXRAD data is not shown S y 8 unuuv 9 298 y xipuaddy Alesso s sioquJ S 8 29 L 28 Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 67 A ia GARMIN Cloud Top Data Viewing Range Ihe Cloud Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Cloud Top weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Cloud Tops will not be shown Where a value
92. radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground The following discussion explains one way of achieving this a YU S r A Featul With the aircraft flying level adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals the aircrafts current altitude AGL divided by 1 000 For example if the aircraft is at 14 000 feet adjust the tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 NM Note this antenna tilt angle setting Now raise the antenna tilt 6 above this setting The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4 from parallel with the ground amp Alerts Symbols J gt Practical Application Using the Basic Tilt Setup Glossar At this point when flying at altitudes between 2 000 and 30 000 feet AGL any displayed target return should scrutinized If the displayed target advances on the screen to 5 NM of the aircraft avoid it This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2 000 feet or less below the aircraft Raising the antenna tilt 4 can help separate ground returns from weather returns in relatively flat terrain This will place the bottom of the radar beam level with the ground Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps Appendix A 4 06 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC If the aircraft is above 29 000 feet be cautious of any target return that gets to 30 NM or closer
93. radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency Ju Iu de UC AD DE 4 0 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 9 2 Radar Signal Reflectivity 4 9 2 1 Precipitation Precipitation or objects more dense than water such as earth or solid structures will be detected by the weather radar The weather radar will not detect clouds thunderstorms or turbulence directly It detects precipitation associated with clouds thunderstorms and turbulence The best radar signal reflectors are raindrops wet snow or wet hail The larger the raindrop the better it reflects The size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity Because large drops in a small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm the radar displays the storm as a strong return Ice dry snow and dry hail have low reflective levels and often will not be displayed by the radar A cloud that contains only small raindrops such as fog or drizzle will not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return d Ula1s g pJomao4 3IN gt zZ e T E e rar oo G40 lee O Crystals Qo gt Wet T Qe Ox J Hail 3 Ah Dry Reflective X Q Figure 4 69 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity 7 E gt 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 93 29 2898 298 unuuy jeuonippy 9 29S 998 8 295 g xip
94. separate avionics bay gt if desired This design greatly eases troubleshooting and maintenance of the G500 600 system A failure or problem can be isolated to a particular LRU which can be replaced quickly and easily Each LRU has a particular function or set of functions that contributes to the system s operation uhl Il 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 3 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 2 Sec 3 Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B GARMIN 1 1 1 1 GDU 620 The GDU 620 has dual VGA 640 x 480 pixels 6 5 inch LCD displays The left side of the GDU is a PFD and the right side is the MFD In some models or installations the PFD and MFD and their controls are switched to the other side NM The MFD shows a moving map flight plan weather and other supplemental data The PFD shows primary flight information in place of traditional pitot static and gyroscopic systems and also provides an HSI for navigation Foreword Features Avoidance MFD PFD amp Alerts Figure 1 3 GDU 620 PFD and MFD with PFD on Right Appendix A Index 1 4 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 1 1 1 2 GDC 74A 74B The GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer ADC compiles information from 5 the pitot static system and an Outside Air Temperature OAT sensor The GDC 74A 74B provides pressure altitude airspeed vertical speed and OAT information to
95. separation E QD 4 cn N Sec 1 NOTE Smart Airspace only changes the depiction of the airspace on the moving map display It does not alter the Airspace Alerts that can be set on the System Alerts portion of the system b 9c o D N O u o nrg lt L Smart Airspaces De Emphasized Smart Airspaces Emphasized On Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Figure 3 32 Display of Smart Airspaces Airspace Borders Grayed When Emphasized Sec 7 Symbols Show Airspace The Airspace viewing range options select whether the Airspaces are shown on the Map and at and below the selected map ranges RESTRICTED Sec 8 Glossary HJA AIL ITA lt OTHER ADIZ gt x lt T TFR Cc e AIRMAYS C lt CHART AIRSPACE CHOW ATRSPACES a Z x AIRSPACE LABELS LT TO cc 1 P E Figure 3 33 Display of Smart Airspaces lt 3 28 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Airspace Labels The Airspace Label feature shows the airspace altitude limits within the selected range Airspace Labels Figure 3 34 Airspace Labels 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 29 pPJOM JOJ wW JS S ddd D O eO D 5 e D sainjee4 PUO pp y xipueddy Alesso 5 S OQUIAS SHV 8 9 aS unuuy Xepul g xipueddy 29 C 29 T c m e o D a 298 G 29 9 29 Sec 4 GARMIN 3 1 11 Split Screen Optio
96. store the Active Channel into a selected 5 preset position for easy later recall A delay of several seconds can occur when setting or recalling a preset DJOM3JO 29 Active Channel Number and Name UJ91s gG C 298 ddd di 298 Active Channel and Song Title eDUPpIOAV pJezeH Y 29 Feature Tip mi mm r liil TI 0 te r 1 ua Jeuonippy Preset Soft Keys te zm a ME FPL 7 Figure 5 28 XM Radio Presets SH y 8 unuuy 9 29 Setting a Preset 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group you may set a preset for the Active Channel Press the PRESETS soft key 2 Press and hold a preset soft key such as PS1 S OQWAS 29 3 Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets Alesso 5 8 29S Recalling a Preset 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group press the PRESETS soft key y xipueddy 2 Press the preset soft key for the desired stored channel such as PS1 3 Press the MORE soft key to display the next series of presets Xapul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 29 Le YW wo ua c S a lt A TOC GARMIN 5 3 4 GDL 69 69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure Ensure the owner operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has
97. subscribed to Sirius XM Satellite Radio Ensure the Sirius XM Satellite Radio subscription has been activated Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver For troubleshooting purposes check the LRU Information Box on the AUX System Status Page for Data Link Receiver GDL 69 694 status serial number and software version number If a failure has been detected in the GDL 69 69A the status will be marked with a red X ua w El gt 19 lt b LL 1 Turn the large MFD knob to select the AUX Page Group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the System Status Page the last page in the AUX Page Group STATUS SOA AL HUMBER SERS DN GDL 69 Status OK LRU Selection ae ae LRU Figure 5 29 LRU Status Window 5 30 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN n 5 4 Autopilot Operation The G500 600 is able to interface to certain autopilot systems to provide the functions described in this section Please refer to your particular Airplane Flight 3 Manual and autopilot documentation for specific information and operating instructions 5 4 1 GAD 43 Attitude The GAD 43 Adapter may Optionally provide attitude information from the Garmin GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System to certain autopilots The GAD 43 has the ability to disconnect the autopilot if an error in the GAD 43 output or GRS 77 is detected This disconnect me
98. such as 150 NM is selected Cloud Top data will be shown at map ranges of that value 150 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Cloud Top Data Viewing Range value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Foreword Sec System Sec 2 PFD 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Sec 3 Sec 4 5 te No lt Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Appendix B Index 4 68 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN us 4 8 12 XM WX Satellite Lightning Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud to ground lightning strikes A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two kilometer region The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed gt zZ e T E e rar pJezey Y 29 Figure 4 45 XM Weather Lightning Lightning Data Viewing Range The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Lightning will not be shown Where a
99. tables The broadcast rate represents the interval at which XM WX Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new weather data It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the Data Link Receiver Weather data is updated at intervals that are defined and controlled by XM WX Satellite Radio and its data vendors jac bp VS Ud The product label in the legend will turn yellow at half the expiration time and grey when expired Expired products will not be shown on the display 3 WARNING Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in near or around areas of hazardous weather Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions WARNING Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission the weather information shown Dg the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated 5 weather product age E gt zZ e T E e a gt s V IVN V uon unuuv 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 55 st i 3 Nn A b GARMIN Weather Product Expiration Time Minutes NEXRAD NEXRAD and Echo Top are Mutually Exclusive E
100. that help the user navigate more easily The Table of Contents Index side tabs i e Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 MFD etc and the TOC and Cover boxes at the top of pages are hyperlinks that will take you directly to the selected item Versions of aviation products in the pdf format are available at www garmin lt lt COM Sec 8 Sec 7 Appendix A Glossary Symbols Appendix B Index XVI Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 1 1 System Description This section provides an overview of the G500 600 Avionics Display System The G500 600 system is an integrated display system that presents primary flight instrumentation navigation and a moving map to the pilot through large format displays In normal operating mode the Primary Flight Display PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation attitude heading airspeed altitude vertical speed replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster The Multi Function Display MFD normally displays a full color moving map with navigation information as well as supplemental data GMU 44 Magnetometer Garmin Navigator s GTP 59 Temperature Probe EE A uut GRS 77 AHRS 1 r 1 A C p LE 7 Autopilot Weather l Radar AD 43 4 eren s ESI Navigation Weather External L o ou SS eed ne mmn
101. the AUX System Status page Power up Page Display a Chort iew oe Flitecharts BG chert Dota Sa F BS Chort Data 1583 Expires 1 FEB 2015 1488 Expires e 1 AUG 2B 14 Verifying H A Definition Database s effective date is in the future 2 Database s effective date is the current day 1 2 Current date is unknown e g no GPS fix yet Database is active Database s expiration date is the current day 1 Database s expiration date has passed Expired notes that the database expired less than 70 days ago but may still be used Database s disable data has passed Disabled notes that the database expired more than 70 days ago and is no longer available for use System is verifying database when new cycle is installed Database verification failed No database is installed Blank Line GDU 620 system is not configured for any chart data Contact a Garmin authorized service center for configuration Table 5 1 Power up Page Annunciations and Definitions 5 6 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 1 When the effective or expiration date is the current day the following message is displayed at the bottom of the page Check local rules for database effective times DJOM9JOJ 2 ChartView does not have Effective dates 5 1 4 Selecting a Chart The G500 600 will only allow the pilot to select the chart type in normal mode if it
102. the G500 600 system The GDC 74A 74B communicates with the GDU 620 and GRS 77 using an ARINC 429 digital interface PS M s Er 4 i yj x xd lm a Es d Figure 1 4 GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer 1 1 1 3 GRS 77 The GRS 77 is an Attitude and Heading Reference System AHRS unit that provides aircraft attitude information to the G620 display The unit contains advanced tilt sensors accelerometers and rate sensors In addition the GRS 77 interfaces with both the GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer and the GMU 44 magnetometer The GRS 77 also utilizes GPS data forwarded trom the GDU 620 Actual attitude and heading information is sent to the GDU 620 using an ARINC 429 digital interface ddd C 29 Saunjeo4 92UepIOAV HIN euonippy pJezeH 299 Suly 8 unuuv sioquJ S LS AJeSSO S 8 299 Figure 1 5 GRS 77 AHRS The IGRF International Geomagnetic Reference Field model is contained in the GRS 77 and is only updated once every five years The IGRF model is part of 5 the Navigation Database At system power up the IGRF models in the GRS 77 3 and in the Navigation Database are compared and if the IGRF model in the GRS 77 is out of date the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in the GRS 77 The prompt will appear after the G500 600 splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 5 TES pJOMaL S y 295 G 29 9 29
103. the NEXRAD z amp weather products Where 100 NM is selected the NEXRAD weather products will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower Foreword O System NEXRAD Cell Movement The NEXRAD Cell Movement option selects whether NEXRAD Cell Movement is shown on the Navigation Map NEXRAD Legend Ihe NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD Oo 2 E CO g9 N O T T NEXRAD Data Viewing Range Features Cell Movement Legend Source AM Lightning Viewing Range F Figure 3 27 NEXRAD Legend Selection Annun amp Alerts p nbols Sv Datalink Lightning Viewing Range The Lightning Viewing Range option selects whether the datalink provided Lightning weather products is shown on the Navigation Map Lightning weather products will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected Lightning weather will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected Lightning symbols will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower co U D WY Glossary opendix A Appendix B Index 3 22 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC XM FIS B NEXRAD Source The XM or FIS B NEXRAD Source selection allows the choice of the available sources for NEXRAD weather products DJOMoJO4 ul91s g 298 HEXREZXJ Date WViawies Hansa Coll Aovemont Liraend ELIT ce ddd C 2
104. the x DCLTR soft key and map page MENU selections The Navigation Map can n be oriented four different ways North Up NORTH UP Track Up TRACK UP Desired Track Up DTK UP or Heading Up HDG UP DJOMoJ04 La MD C Wals Map Orientation gt lt I Og D m e pu a 2 eu e D TZ Temainand Obstacles Symbols Range Select Qo Page Group Position Red Menu wc Page Group Clear Page Label a Enter 3 SD Card Slots Small MFD Knob Select Page Soft Key Labels Soft Keys Large MFD Knob A d Select Page Group 5 v Figure 3 1 MFD Description The nose of the aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are based on information received from the y xipuaddy currently selected GPS navigator The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation map The other 2 legs are shown in white 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 1 Sec 1 Sec 2 Hazard Additional Annun Appendix B A a GARMIN There are map ranges available from 500 feet to 500 NM The range is now indicated in the box on the range ring at the 11 o clock position relative to the ownship To change the map range on any map press the RNG keys on the right side of the bezel 3 1 Navigation Map Pages Map disp
105. u source that is displayed on the HSI is sent to the autopilot Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilot navigation functions DOM GPS Steering GPSS provides roll command signals calculated by the GPS navigator to the autopilot in order to allow the aircraft to anticipate turns make smooth transitions when passing waypoints and fly leg types such as Procedure Turns and Holding Patterns The autopilot must have the ability to interpret the GPSS commands The G500 600 can provide GPSS information to autopilots that have built in support for GPSS commands as well as to older autopilots that do not have built in support for GPSS Wbpt 2 Flight Plan Leg 2 Flight Plan Leg 1 e es Turn Anticipation Wot 3 Curve Aircraft Present Wot 1 Position Figure 5 33 GPSS Turn Anticipation 5 4 4 1 Autopilot Operation with GPSS Enabled Autopilots Some autopilots have built in support for GPS Steering GPSS commands ONY Tl t te e a gt 72 DJezer jeuonippy unuuy from a GPS navigator The GDU 620 will send the GPSS commands from the displayed GPS source to the autopilot For example if GPS 1 is displayed on the HSI the GPSS commands from GPS 1 will be sent to the autopilot Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilots GPSS fun
106. value such as 100 NM is selected NEXRAD data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 100 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Lightning Data Viewing Range value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept T the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 69 A TOC GARMIN 4 8 13 XM SIGMETs and AIRMETs 5 SIGMETs SIGnificant METeorological Information and AIRMETs 5 AlRmen s METeorological Information are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather considered of importance to aircraft A Convective SIGMET is issued _ c for hazardous convective weather A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position When enabled SIGMET AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous _ weather to all aircraft SIGMET AIRMET data covers icing turbulence dust Z and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service The update rate is every 12 minutes Sec4 5 o 2 No lt Fi ALERTS Figure 4 46 XM Weather AIRMETs Graphic When enabled the following AIRMETs are available for display e Icing e Turbulence e IFR conditions x
107. vertical speed using a non AS E moving tape The tape can be scaled at 2000 3000 or 4000 fpm as set by the installer Major gradations are every 1000 fpm and minor gradations every 500 fpm The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer along the tape Rs 8 Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm If the rate of ascent descent exceeds the vertical speed displayed on the tape the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer The Vertical Speed Indicator range determines the airspeed tape range nal Iti Annun VSI set by installer Airspeed Tape Range 8 2000 fpm 3000 fpm a 4000 fom Table 2 1 Vertical Speed Settings Setting the Vertical Speed Indicator Bug 3 1 Press the V S key to activate Vertical Speed mode 2 Turn the PFD knob to change the Vertical Speed Bug 3 Press the center of the PFD knob to set the Vertical Speed value to the current vertical speed 2 18 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H Cover A GARMIN um 2 6 Horizontal Situational Indicator The Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI displays a rotating compass card in a heading up orientation Letters indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30 Major tick marks are at 10 intervals and minor tick marks at 5 intervals A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of
108. xipueddy G 29 A is GARMIN PFD MFD Alert Annunciation Z Excessive Descent Rate SUMMITS Pull Up Warning EDR W _ FLTA Terrain Warning PULL UP Terrain Ahead Pull Up Terrain Ahead 2 RTC W ITI W Pull Up or Terrain Terrain Pull Up Pull Up FLTA Obstacle Warning Obstacle Ahead Pull Up Obstacle Ahead ROC W IOI W Pull Up or Obstacle Obstacle Pull Up Pull Up FLTA Wire Warning JU Wire Ahead Pull Up Wire Ahead Pull Up ILI W RLC W or Wire Wire Pull Up Pull Up Terrain Ahead Terrain Ahead or Caution Terrain Caution Terrain Alert Type Aural Message Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance FLTA Terrain Caution RTC C ITI C FLTA Wire Caution ILI C RLC C Wire Ahead Premature Descent 5 Alert Caution PDA 5 Voice Callout None Five Hundred n VCO 500 Excessive Descent Rate Sink Rate Too Low Terrain FLTA Obstacle Caution Obstacle Ahead Obstacle Ahead ROC C IOI C or Caution Obstacle Caution Obstacle Caution EDR C Negative Climb Rate Don t Sink Caution NCR C zi Too Low Terrain e amp Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation dependent Alerts for the default configuration are indicated with asterisks Table 4 5 TAWS B Alerts Summary 4 18 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN is 4 4 5 2
109. 0 G500 600 Table 4 1 G500 600 Terrain Annunciations SVT Terrain Obstacle shading is only available when SVT is enabled and displayed 4 2 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Ifthe Garmin GPS TAWS is not available the G500 600 Terrain SVT will generate PFD annunciator text and aural callouts An advisory message will 3 T indicate when reversion to Terrain SVT alerting has occurred z GTN v5 10 and later with GDU v7 00 and later E GNS GTN TAWS may be provided by a GNS 500WT series or GTN series _ navigator with TAWS The GNS GTN TAWS must be interfaced to the G500 600 2 as GPS 1 j Each of the terrain awareness configurations are detailed in the following sub sections z 4 1 2 Terrain Scale The Terrain Scale option in the Map page group selects whether the Terrain Scale is shown on the Navigation Map The Terrain scale is located on the right R side of the display Obstacle ET Terrain alg on F gt zZ 2 T EI e a gt pJezey Y 29 10008 qm rt Figure 4 1 Terrain Scale Color Description EN Terrain is less than 100 ft below the aircraft or above the aircraft altitude Terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude 8 Terrain is more than 1000 feet below the aircraft Table 4 2 Terrain Scale Color Codes Q 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 3 A TOC GARMIN E Terrain Altitude A 2 1 Comp
110. 0 Pilot s Guide IX View WE mazara onal Addition Annun Sec 1 System Foreword lirim l4 nrc yh bols A TOC GARMIN UJ UJ 23 2 0 b Answering a Phone all xsssescessususieup reus eget ne sa peus euius 3 66 Mont Pa PAGS recess St dene E EEEE Tir 3 67 3 3 1 Active Flight Plan Pagus entente nn toas 3 67 3 3 1 1 Active Flight Plan Detail eene 3 68 3 3 1 2 Active Flight Plan ODEIOFIS cssseissssskas tos cai apesecteorsescieseipenaeen 3 68 3 3 1 3 Setting the Altitude Minimums Alerter 3 69 3 3 2 Waypoint Information Page sseeee 3 0 3 3 2 1 Selecting a Waypoint 3 71 3 3 2 2 Waypoint Runway Frequency Information Detail 3 72 SES MSS MEI o 1B aisi eesse tren erent NE tor ae rt EES 3 75 3 3 2 4 Waypoint Weather Information Optional 3 76 3 3 3 Charts Page Optional esce cia sepa estet yer Eten beoe des 3 77 Hazard AVOIDANCE oa eec edo DOPO ID DEDE IM 4 1 M 4 1 4 1 1 Terain O AG CAT ONG orori tuicevts cites rto Kirri TK 4 1 4 1 2 Eee EEEE 4 3 EEE a e E 4 4 4 2 1 Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS ssseeese 4 4 4 2 2 Baro Corrected Altitude Versus GPS MSL Altitude 4 4 Uus TIONAL T 4 5 4 3 1 Displaying Terrain Proximity s eseseueuu re eot setenta rutru tns oae 4 5 4 3 1 1 Terrain Proximity Page Display on the Terrain Page
111. 01 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 8 7 NEXRAD Data Viewing Range The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range z where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected NEXRAD weather data will not be shown For the value such as 100 NM that is selected NEXRAD data will be shown at the selected map ranges such as 100 NM and lower 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the 52 Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Weather Setup 1 2 and press ENT 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight he NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value 4 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted gt zZ 9 T EI e rar pJezey Y 29 5 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 8 8 NEXRAD Legend E Ihe NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key e Figure 4 41 NEXRAD Legend Selection 1 While viewing Weather Se
112. 1 AIRCRAFT LANDING RHY 34C AND EXITING THY H WHO TURN RIGHT ON THY J MUST CLEAR THE RWY 34C HOLD BAR COMPLETELY WHILE USING VIGILANCE NOT TU CROSS THE HOLD BAR FOR RWY 34R 34C 34R HOLD BAR SEPERATION DISTANCE 189 FEET Hot Spot Information Aircraft Location Cursor Hot spot Border Figure 5 19 SafeTaxi Hot Spot Information An information window will be shown on the MFD After viewing press the small MFD knob CLR or ENT keys to remove the information window Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the cursor Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 2 2 SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date When turning on the GDU 620 the Power up Page indicates whether the databases are current out of date or not available The Power up Page shows the SateTaxi database is current when the SafeTaxi Expires date is shown in white When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired the 2 SafeTaxi Expires date appears in yellow The message SafeTaxi N A appears in white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card JOM JOJ4 D WISA ddd CS dj 29 SafeTaxi Database Status eH S 92UPpIOAV 7p g DJEz Figure 5 20 Power up Page SafeTaxi Database The SafeTaxi Region Version Cycle Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be fou
113. 1 02 Rev H A GARMIN Symbol A NOTE Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on airborne on ground status of target target is brown when on the ground see the surface vehicles 190 00601 02 Rev H Description Basic Non Directional Traffic Basic Directional Traffic Basic Off scale Selected Traffic Proximate Non Directional Traffic Proximate Directional Traffic Proximate Off scale Selected Traffic Non Directional Alerted Traffic Off Scale Non Directional Alerted Traffic Directional Alerted Traffic Off Scale Directional Alerted Traffic Non Directional Surface Vehicle Directional Surface Vehicle Table 7 4 ADS B Traffic Symbols Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide wialshs pIOM IOJ ddd C 295 dN E D S DULPIOAY pJeZeH SoJhn1eo 7 225 jeuonippv sue v 8 unuuv G Q 2 n Oo amp oo lt lt y xipueddy Xapu g xipueddy 9 28S ix GARMIN 7 4 Terrain Obstacle Symbols Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Height is less than Height is less Height is greater Height is greater than 1000 ft AGL than 1000 ft AGL than 1000 ft AGL 1000 ft AGL Figure 7 1 Obstacle Altitude Color Correlation Tower Windmill Grouped Power Line Obstacles The notes grouped obstacles Figure 7 2 Obstacle Icon Types ceg Threat Location 69 5 og Projected Flight Path amp Yoo re ERU Of 100 E ind Unlighted
114. 2 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 15 AJeSSO E CO nll Ac OC W INN J gt O ks C M 2 Xapu g xipuaddy A TOC GARMIN Yellow When White Within 100 ft Altitude Reached E EL rag n l CW g HI Foreword Barometric OH Minimums Bug Barometric Minimums Box BB System U D WY SARO HIN SE ar a T Figure 2 24 Barometric MDA DH Alerting Visual Annunciations Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the selected Minimum Altitude Normally the altitude alerter only allows selection of altitudes in 100 foot increments When a value other than 100 feet is set for Baro Mins it becomes a selectable value in the altitude alerter Sec 3 M N E 8 In dual installations the minimums alerting altitude value may be set from either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units 2 Setting the Altitude Minimums Bug is performed on either the FPL Active 5 Flight Plan page or the FPL Charts page aie For details for setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Active Flight Plan page refer to Section 3 MFD Flight Plan Pages Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts For details for setting the Altitude Minimums Bug on the Charts page refer to Section 5 Additional Features Charts Menu Selections Sec 8 Sec 7 Appendix A Glossary Symbols Appendix B Index 2 16 Garmin
115. 29 sjoquJ S L J Kipecn MESSO y xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 4 209 C 298 C 23S cC I G 29 A TOC GARMIN Foreword Sec 1 System Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage Operation of the ground stations is the responsibility of the FAA Refer to the Aeronautical Information Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map covering the U S Sec 2 PFD A NOTE TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U S particularly in mountainous regions Also when flying near the floor of radar coverage in a particular area intruders below the client aircraft may not be detected by TIS Sec 3 MFD a m S lt TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which the uplink occurs Therefore the surveillance information is approximately five seconds old In order to present the intruders in a real time position the TIS ground station uses a predictive algorithm in its tracking software This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit Occasionally aircraft maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the display These errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector Gt will lag intruder distance and altitude will r
116. 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing OR 4 Press CHNL and then the CH or CH soft keys to increment up or down one channel at a time in the active category OR 5 Press CHNL and then the DIR CH soft key to directly select a channel in the 3 active category Use the large and small MFD knobs to select desired channel 6 Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel selection 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 2 A a 8 GARMIN 5 3 3 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Volume The Volume control allows you to set the audio volume level as well as mute the audio ao ze v z amp AE Volume Bar Graph Volume Soft Key Label ua w E rm a gt lt P LL c x lt Figure 5 26 XM Radio Volume Setting 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group press the VOL soft esa key 2 Press the VOL or VOL soft keys or turn the small MFD knob to adjust the 7 radio volume Xt A Volume Bar Graph z E Volume Soft Key Labels D Figure 5 27 XM I Radio Velie Controls 3 Press MUTE to mute the radio volume Press MUTE again or the VOL or VOL soft keys to unmute the radio volume Appendix A He Appendix B Index 5 28 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN ies 5 3 3 4 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel Presets The PRESET soit key allows you to
117. 5 3 Tum the small MFD knob to highlight the desired selection IRIDTUM PHONE STATUS DALL TIME PHONE STATUS CALL SUPPRESSION PHONES HAHE PHONE NUHBER Figure 3 77 Select Call Suppression lt 4 Press the ENT key Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor 3 60 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 2 8 2 Managing the Phone Book The Phone Book is stored on the SD card in the bottom slot The Phone Book will only be available for use when the SD card is in the bottom slot The Phone Book may hold up to 128 entries A phone number may be entered and dialed without saving it to the Phone Book Note that it is necessary to dial a 1 the J area code and then the number Creating Phone Number Names 1 Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group Turn the small MFD knob to reach the Iridium Phone page 2 Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Name item in the Phone Book The Name field will blink SR 3 If items already exist in the catalog turn the large MFD knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon Then turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the New Entry selection and press ENT PHONHEBOUK MAKE GARMIN AT Zu EE New Entry Selected for New Entry Phone Book Catalog Entry Figure 3 78 New Entry Selected for P
118. 5 37 Terrain data 3 11 3 16 4 8 4 9 A 5 Terrain obstacle symbols 4 12 7 4 Terrain proximity ii 1 21 4 1 4 5 4 11 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 7 6 Terrain scale 4 6 Terrain SVT iv 4 2 4 26 Textual METARs 4 74 4 131 4 148 TFR 3 11 3 25 3 27 4 80 4 134 4 150 7 7 Thunderstorm 4 136 Thunderstorms 4 57 4 79 4 93 4 97 4 98 4 100 Time 1 21 3 13 3 31 3 38 4 52 4 56 4 77 4 78 4 151 Time zone 3 38 TIS 4 31 4 38 4 40 4 41 4 43 5 1 TMA 3 11 3 26 To From Indicator 2 19 2 20 Topo data 3 11 3 15 Topo scale 3 11 3 15 Tornadoes 4 57 4 79 4 100 Tornados 4 136 Track indicator 2 19 2 21 Track vector 3 2 3 11 3 13 4 42 Traffic Advisory 3 24 4 1 4 31 4 34 4 38 7 2 Traffic Pop Up 4 37 Traffic symbols 4 40 4 49 5 44 7 2 Transponder 1 11 4 1 4 31 4 38 4 41 4 43 4 44 Trend Vector 2 6 2 13 2 19 2 21 True Airspeed 1 21 2 6 2 11 True North 2 20 3 40 Turbulence 4 70 4 88 4 90 4 93 4 98 4 126 4 142 Turbulence Detection 4 110 Turn Rate 2 19 Turn Rate Indicator 2 19 2 21 U Unusual attitude 2 11 5 45 V VDI 2 24 5 41 Vector Duration 4 51 Vector motion 4 50 Version 1 12 3 43 4 11 4 26 5 21 A 6 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide TOC Vertical deviation 2 24 Vertical scan 4 89 4 98 4 99 4 103 4 105 4 107 Vertical speed 1 1 1 5 1 17 1 21 2 1 2 11 2 13 2 18 3 31 3 37 3 39 Vertical Speed Indicat
119. 5 8 FliteCharts 5 3 5 4 A 5 A 7 FliteCharts database 5 4 A 7 Flood 4 57 4 79 Fog 4 5 4 93 Forecast time 4 78 Forward looking terrain avoidance 4 20 4 26 4 28 Freezing level 4 56 4 86 4 104 Frequency 2 20 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 27 3 72 3 74 G GAD 43 1 1 1 2 2 3 5 31 6 6 GDC 74A ii 1 1 1 5 1 8 GDL 69 69A 1 2 1 10 3 21 3 41 3 42 4 1 5 1 5 22 5 24 5 25 5 30 GDL 69 troubleshooting 5 30 GDL 88 models 1 9 GDU 620 1 1 1 4 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide TOC GDU 1040 1 1 GFDS Weather 4 112 Glideslope 2 22 2 24 Glossary 8 1 GMU 44 1 1 1 2 1 8 GPS altitude ii 4 4 GPS level of service 2 19 2 21 2 28 GPSS 5 34 Ground Clutter Suppression 4 110 Ground mapping 4 111 4 112 Ground pointer 2 1 2 10 Ground Radar 4 112 Ground return 4 94 4 96 4 112 Ground speed 2 5 2 6 2 11 4 24 5 41 GRS 77 1 1 1 5 1 14 5 31 GSR 56 1 9 3 56 3 59 GIP 59 1 2 GTX 33 1 11 4 1 GTX 330 330D 1 11 GWX 68 4 89 H Hail 4 61 4 93 4 98 4 100 Hazard avoidance 4 1 Haze 4 57 Heading 1 6 1 16 2 19 2 20 3 1 3 37 4 13 4 32 4 38 5 32 Heading bug 1 16 2 1 2 19 2 20 Heading select 1 16 Helipad 7 2 Heliport 7 1 Home page 3 3 Horizon heading 2 5 5 37 5 39 5 42 Horizon line 2 9 Horizontal scan 4 89 4 101 4 104 4 107 4 108 4 109 Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI 1 4 1 16 2 1 2 19 2 34 5 42 Hot spots 5 18 5 19 Hrzn Hdg 2 5 Hu
120. 6 6 1 6 2 1 1 rA L3 1 4 5 3 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Information 5 3 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment 5 4 Channel Categories stern care tesi onet cd mundani aris cesis 5 3 3 2 Selecting a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel 5 3 3 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Volume sssssse 5 3 3 4 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel Presets 5 3 4 GDL 69 69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting 5 302 Autopilot OO CRAG Oi Sosesuteeus cut ERR EIREMSIU RII PEFEESE PASE UEMU CAU E REIHE UES 5 31 5 4 1 GAD 43 Attitude 5 31 oy JT MEMBRE 5 32 UN 5 4 3 Altitude Capture Optional Upgrade 5 32 5 4 4 Autopilot Navigation se er aset dette ht rta er aree tad ualet ibas 399 N 5 4 4 1 Autopilot Operation with GPSS Enabled Autopilots 5 33 3 5 4 4 2 Autopilot Operation with the GDU 620 Emulating GPSS 5 34 5 4 5 ze umm ero g o TC 5 34 gt 5 4 6 Vertical Speed Control sss 5 35 EE 5 4 7 Autopilot Mode Annunciations eeeenne 5 36 5 Synthetic Vision Technology Optional SVT sessen 5 37 5 5 1 SVT M Operation 5 39 5 5 2 Activating and Deactivating SVT ooo 5 40 3 8 5 9 3 OVO aI 5 4 5 5 3 1 Flight Path Marker FPM scictscussiinssenssiasiuneciinseuntrdeasnesstngi
121. 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 2 2 1 Markings A color coded white green yellow and red white barber pole speed range strip is located on the moving tape The colors are configured to match the approved markings for the installation See the AFM POH 2S cn WN st MD 3 NOTE The actual colors and patterns of the airspeed tape may vary by installation See your AFM POH for more details DULpIONY JN piezeH c 29g Y 29S SoJn eo euonippy sua v 9 unuuv G 299 9 29 S OQWAS L 29 leSso D 8 29S Figure 2 10 Additional Reference Markings y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Cv U CD Un Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A a GARMIN 2 2 20 Reference Speeds V speeds Glide V V and V default values are set during the installation process but can be changed and turned on off from the System Setup page on the first page of the Aux page group When active on the V speeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale Foreword System Glide Reference Marker Vr Reference Marker Vx Reference Marker Vy Reference Marker Ca Figure 2 11 Reference Speeds The labels for the reference markers may vary as configured during installation amp V Reference Marker V2 Referenc
122. 7 29S c 9S pJezey euonippy unuuv S 9 aS g xipueddy p 29S G 29S 9 39S 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 8 8 A GARMIN APPENDIX A SD Card Use and Databases The G500 600 System uses Secure Digital SD cards to load and store various types of data For basic flight operations SD cards are required for database storage as well as database updates SD cards are required for Terrain Obstacle FliteChart SafeTaxi and ChartView database storage as well as Jeppesen aviation and ChartView database updates The Aviation Database update card may be inserted in either SD card slot for database updates and then removed Other database cards must be located in the lower SD card slot ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer The unit will generate an error in the event that a database SD card is inserted into the top slot Aviation databases can be loaded from an SD card in either slot If the aviation database on the SD card is more than two cycles expired and the pilot declines the systems prompt to update the aviation database the system will provide a second prompt that allows the pilot to suppress future prompts to update to that particular aviation database on that SD card A NOTE Ensure the GDU 620 is powered off before inserting or removing an SD card A NOTE Refer to Appendix A for instructions on updating the aviation database Inserting an SD Card 1
123. 8 G 2399 SUV 8 unuuv sioqui g 29 y xipusddy TESTS 8299 Xopu g xipueddy Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Sec 6 Annun Sec 2 Sec 1 Additional Sec 3 Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Appendix B Foreword System MFD Features amp Alerts gt E 4 j Oo Appendix A Index Cover R RAIM RAM REF REQ REV RMI RNG RNWY ROC RT RTC TOC SBAS SCIT SD SFC SIAP SID SIGMET SLP SKD SMBL SPD SRVC SVC STAR STATS STBY STD SUA SUSP SVT SW SYS T TA TACAN TAF TAS TAS 8 6 A GARMIN right right runway Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring random access memory reference required reverse revision revise Radio Magnetic Indicator range runway Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance right Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Satellite Based Augmentation System Storm Cell Identification and Tracking Secure Digital surface Standard Instrument Approach Procedures Standard Instrument Departure Significant Meteorological Information slip skid symbol speed service Standard Terminal Arrival Route statistics standby standard Special Use Airspace suspend Synthetic Vision software system true Traffic Advisory Tactical Air Navigation System Terminal Aerodrome Forecast True Airspeed Traffic Advisory System Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TAT TAWS TCA TCAS TEMP TERM TFR T HD
124. 98 XH Lightning Viewing Range Sturmscupn Wirwing Punsn Strike Cell Mada Figure 3 28 NEXRAD Weather Source Selection Stormscope Viewing Range I S Em Oa O N c a D m gt The Stormscope Viewing Range option selects Stormscope cells or strikes are shown on the Navigation Map Products will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected cells or strikes will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected symbols will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower S9Jn 89J G 28S jeuonippv A NOTE The selected lightning display type cell or strike will be shown the same on both the StormScope and the Map pages Say S unuuv A NOTE StormScope data is displayed on the Map Page only if aircraft heading is available SJOQWIAS LS e NOTE The G500 600 will display StormScope data with or without a heading source If no heading source is available the display will indicate this by placing HDG N A in the upper right portion of the display If no heading is available the pilot must clear the strikes after each heading change Strike Cell Mode When the Stormscope Viewing Range option has a range greater than zero the Stormscope cells or strikes option is made available and can determine which type are shown on the Navigation Map y xipueddy AJeSSO 9 29g X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 23 A TOC GARMIN 3 1 10 3 Traffic Feature Option
125. A GARMIN G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2015 Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries All rights reserved This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 7 00 or later Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151st Street Olathe KS 66062 U S A Tel 913 397 8200 Fax 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Road SE Salem OR 97302 U S A Tel 503 391 3411 Fax 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton 040 9RB U K Tel 44 0 870 850 1243 Fax 44 0 238 052 4004 Garmin Singapore Pte Ltd 46 East Coast Road 05 06 Eastgate Singapore 428766 Tel 65 63480378 Fax 65 63480278 At Garmin we value your opinion For comments about this guide please e mail Techpubs Salem Garmin com www garmin com Except as expressly provided herein no part of this manual may be reproduced copied transmitted disseminated downloaded or stored in any storage medium for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright not
126. AIRBORNE ALERTS CSA BDS E FIS B STATUS i ALIX Figure 3 63 ADS B FIS B Status Page 3 50 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 2 6 External Video optional External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an externally mounted video source on the aircraft 3 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the Aux page group 2 The External Video page is the first page in the Aux page group 38 g Display of External Video Source zo E ES Current Zoom Level E mE EE Sou CURRENT m BRIGHTHESS S0 Current Setup Values For CONTRAST j The Selected Video Source SATURATION e D A SATU 25 2 D c o OO EXTERNAL VIDEO p 1 ID E VIDEO 2 FULL SETUP ADVISORY Video Source Selections Video Source Setup Full Screen Mode Figure 3 64 External Video 3 2 6 1 Select Video Source If more than one video source is available the Video 1 and Video 2 soft keys will be available at the bottom of the display sioquJ S LS AJeSSO S 8 29S 1 Press the Video 1 soft key to select Video 1 source for viewing and setup 3 2 Press the Video 2 soft key to select Video 2 source for viewing and setup 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 51 A TOC GARMIN 3 2 6 2 Zoom 1 While viewing the External Video function press the Up Rng Arrow key to increase the zoom up to 10x magnification Zoom level is made through digital magnification 2 Pr
127. ARO ened n rotor io ban cose pJezey 7 29 gt z T E e rar Figure 4 94 Weather Page Menu Options 2 With the Weather Setup Menu displayed turn the Large MFD knob to select the desired item SoJnjeo euontppv G 29 SUV 8 unuuv 9 298 Hop Or pret Sot PRECIP Dain Viewed Aare PRELIF Led IK SAT Daio imis Hang sioqui S 29 DL LTD Des vim Resa BIRAI Vissi Boer PIRS Oan Wima Ronee METAR Dato Vim Ferm Wes lott Dto Vire Harar TFR Dris Wieslm Racge Alesso 5 8 299 Z5 Press the MED knh te rebi bo bost pige _ Figure 4 95 Weather Data Link Setup Menu Options 2 2 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired weather feature option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 115 Sec 4 A TOC GARMIN 4 Press ENT to save a selection b Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD knob to cancel and return to the GFDS Weather Data Link Map Page WX Page Menu Weather Setup q Menultem Ss Ajustment 48 North Up Track Up PRECIP Data Viewing Range Off 50 NM to 500 NM uu PRECIP Legend On Off EE IR SAT Data Viewing Range Off 10 NM to 500 NM Lightning Data Viewing Range Off 10 NM to 500 NM SIG Air Viewing Range Off 10 NM to 500 NM Zs PIREPS Viewing Range Off 10 NM to 500 NM 5 N au e Lf C IWOn C E METAR Data Viewing Range Off 10 NM to 500
128. Aloft Legend 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 75 gt zZ 2 T E e a gt pJezey Y 29 Sec 4 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 A TOC GARMIN Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected _ Winds Aloft will not be shown Where a value such as 100 NM is selected g Winds Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 100 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Winds Alott Data Viewing Range value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Foreword Sec 2 PFD Sec 3 MFD 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 5 te No lt Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Appendix A Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Features Appendix B Index 4 76 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 8 17 XM Surface Analysis and City Forecast NOTE Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database service area S Surface Analysis and City
129. Aviation Dalec seii petentes 4 6 3 Inhibiting Enabling Terrain SVT Alerting 4 6 4 Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations 29 3 4 7 Well SYS E E EEEE 4 31 4 7 1 He SAL Tranic COMO MEN omm M qM arene ahead 4 31 4 7 1 1 Displaying and Operating Traffic TAS TCAS Systems 4 32 3 E 4 1 1 2 Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Modes 4 32 Bo AN ES MEE Range RING e Ee rE EO EEEIEE EOE Erri Aas NN 4 7 1 4 Altitude Display 4 33 4 1 1 5 TAS TCAS Symbology e 4 34 8g 7 4A TESI oystein StatUS E ccce codes ees teri um enc Er SS Eme 4 35 NM EIC idee 4 37 9r 4 7 2 TIS Traffic Optional ee 4 38 3 5 o 2 7 24 Tatie Map Pigesni Rev Urbey Pp ES 4 38 412 2 TIS SYMBIO sninn ntt oom rodent orco a 4 40 4 1 2 3 TIS Limitations 4 41 38 LA TE 4 43 VN I MEE CICER 4 44 4 7 3 ADS B Traffic Optional 4 47 2 4 13 4 Taget SCLC COM e essent ieu is tei ar rare etre S orn chius 44 7 Ly ie ME rU ere eee E ee eee rr 4 49 2c oco CLO de 4 50 z 4 8 XM WX Satellite Weather Optional 4 52 3 4 8 1 Using XM WX Satellite Weather Products 4 52 4 8 2 Customizing the XM WX Satellite Weather Map 4 53 8 4 8 3 XM WX Weather Symbols and Product Age 4 55 amp 3 4 8 4 AM Weather Legends pasccasre acis snioschs aristis Tn 4 58 7 4 8 5
130. Aviation group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to customize the display of SafeTaxi information Runway Extensions Intersection NDB locations VOR locations and TFR icons on the Navigation Map R GROUP zr Figure 3 31 Navigation Map Page Menu Aviation Group Selection SafeTaxi Viewing Range T The SafeTaxi viewing range option selects the range at which SafeTaxi information is shown on the Navigation Map SateTaxi will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected SafeTaxi information will not be shown Where 1 NM is selected the SafeTaxi information will be shown at map ranges of 1 NM and lower su jy unuuy 9 39S y xipuaddy AJeSSO S sioquJ S g 29S 29S Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 25 A TOC GARMIN Runway Extension Range E The Runway Extension Range option selects the whether Runway Extensions is shown for the flight plan destination airport runway and will extend 10 NM i Runway Extensions will be shown at and below the selected map range When Offis selected Runway Extensions will not be shown INT NDB Viewing Range The INT NDB viewing range option selects whether Intersection and NDB information is shown on the Navigation Map Intersection and NDB information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown Where 15 NM is s
131. Contact your Garmin dealer for service Contact your Garmin dealer for service 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Alert Message Description TRAFFIC STDBY Traffic is in Standby Check traffic system controls on Mode while airborne the MFD traffic map page or traffic TRK LOST e Heading and track from active GPS lost HSI is using secondary GPS track TRK TRAFFIC e Heading lost Traffic is now based on track DJ0A 3404 UJ91s G 298 ddd C 298 c as diW WX ALERT e Possible severe e Check weather radar weather ahead WX RADAR e Communication with e Contact your Garmin dealer for Weather Radar lost service WX RDR e Weather radar needs e Contact your Garmin dealer for SERVICE service service WXR INPUT e Weather radar is e Contact your Garmin dealer for FAULT not receiving one or service more inputs y 295 eDUPpIOAV piezeH SoJn eoJ euonippv G 29 9 9S Ro n z unuuy Table 6 1 Alert Messages Alesso 5 sioqui S 8 299 L 29S y Xipueddy X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 6 13 GARMIN 6 2 System Status The System Status page of Aux mode shows the status serial number and software version of LRUs and the date of databases There are no menu pages In the LRU Status column a green check means the unit is present and operat ing properly while a red X indicates an absence or failure z A FAG ST ORY REG
132. DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace with a new or newly overhauled replacement gt product the product or software or offer a full retund of the purchase price at its sole discretion SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY Online Auction Purchases Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for 5 warranty coverage Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification To obtain warranty service an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction International Purchases A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices purchased outside the United States depending on the country If applicable this warranty is provided by the local in country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device Distributor warranties are only valid in the area of intended distribution Devices purchased in the gt United States or Canada must be returned to the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom the United States Canada or Taiwan for service To obtain warranty service contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center For assistance in
133. Day View offers a better presentation in a bright environment The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark environment When AUTO is selected it allows the user to set a threshold for the transition between the Day and Night color schemes 3 BUE eri DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS Figure 5 17 Chart Color Scheme Auto Selection and Aux Display Brightness 33C IIN The threshold is compared to the Display Brightness Level that is displayed on the Aux System Setup page If the color scheme percentage on the Chart 58 Setup page is less than the display brightness percentage selected on the Aux System Setup page then the Chart AUTO Color Scheme will draw the chart as _ though the NIGHT scheme were selected Otherwise the AUTO scheme will 2 draw the chart as though the DAY scheme were selected z 1 In the FPL page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the Charts page Press MENU to display the Options menu 3 Press ENT to go to Chart Setup The Color Scheme option will be highlighted Tl t te e a n Jeuonippy G 99S Turn the small MFD knob to select Day AUTO Night If Auto is selected turn the large MFD knob CW to the percentage value and 2 turn the small MFD knob to change the value 6 Press the small MFD knob or the ENT key to save the selected value and return to the Charts page NOTE Once an adjustment is made to the percentage field in Auto m
134. Directional Traffic Proximate Off scale Selected Traffic D Non Directional Alerted Traffic 4 48 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Symbol Description a Off Scale Non Directional Alerted Traffic Directional Alerted Traffic DJO0M9JOJ UJ91s g 99S Off Scale Directional Alerted Traffic a Non Directional Surface Vehicle a Directional Surface Vehicle Table 4 20 ADS B Traffic Symbols ddd C 298 J 298 NOTE Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on airborne on ground status of target target is brown when on the ground see the surface vehicles 4 7 3 2 Status ADS B Status ADS B Status displays the current status of traffic application Off Surface Airborne N A Fail or Test TCAS Status If a TCAS system is integrated with the ADS B system then this shows the current status of the TCAS system gt z a T E e a gt S9Jn 89J jeuonippv G 28S SuJe v 9 unuuv 9 IPS When the ADS B system is integrated with a TCAS system the controls are provided on the installed navigator y xXipueddy Alesso s S OQUAS 9 9S 29S X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 49 A a GARMIN 4 7 3 3 Motion Vector When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected the vectors extending from the traffic targets depict the target reported track and speed over the ground When Relative Motion Vecto
135. EC Sec 8 B Appendix Avoidance WYN D 5 D 1 Appendix A Index Cover J b 3 AHRS1 2 TAS 6 2 Alert Message AHRS1 2 SRVC TOC Description AHRS1 2 not receiving any GPS information AHRS1 2 operating exclusively in no GPS reversionary mode AHRS1 2 using backup GPS source AHRS1 2 not receiving backup GPS information Two GPS devices are configured as present and AHRS1 is not recelving GPS data from the backup 2nd device AHRS1 2 magnetic field model needs update Appears on ground only AHRS1 2 not receiving true airspeed from ADC Displayed heading and attitude data is still valid Additional loss of GPS data will cause loss of heading and attitude data Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A GARMIN Action e Verity navigators are on and have a GPS signal and are not in self test mode Check AFMS for limitations Contact your Garmin dealer for service AHRS magnetic field model should be upgraded Contact your Garmin dealer for service Check ADC cable Contact your Garmin dealer for service 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action ALT KEY INOP The ALT key is e ALT key is not available disabled ALT NO COMP Nodatafromone Contact your Garmin dealer for DIOMIIO DJOM9JO J or more altitude service re Sensors m ARINC 429 e ARINC 429 e Contact you
136. EXRAD Limitations NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations o zZ 9 T E e rar 99 n1eeJ uol sH JY 9 e NEXRAD composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics For example it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow wet hail and rain e NEXRAD composite reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna cine S C UU S elevation angle An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges It has no information about storms directly over the site Alesso 5 When zoomed in to a range of 30 NM each square block on the hn represents an area of four square kilometers The intensity level reflected gt by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data sampled 2 d within the area gt The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images D x lt Ground clutter e Strobes and spurious radar data 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 61 UaV IMI N 4 N Cn D M NO ppv unuuv Sec 5 Sec 4 Additional Sec 6 Sec 1 System m N lt Annun Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B A ia GARMIN e Sun strobes when the radar antenna points directly at the sun nterference from buildings or mountains which may cause shadows Foreword Metallic dust from military aircraft
137. Emitting Diode The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints Low Instrument Flight Rules Lateral Navigation localizer loss of integrity GPS longitude Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance Line Replacement Unit left lightning Magnetic Magnetic Variation A proprietary data format used to forward navigation information from the Garmin GPS units to the GDU 620 maximum Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC MAXSPD maximum speed overspeed MDA barometric minimum descent altitude METAR Aviation Routine Weather Report MFD Multi Function Display MIN minimum Minimum Safe Altitude Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of the aircraft present position MKR marker beacon MOA Military Operations Area MOV movement mpm meters per minute MSA Minimum Safe Altitude MSG message MSL Mean Sea Level MT meter mV millivolt s MVFR Marginal Visual Flight Rules NAV navigation NAVAID NAVigation AID NCR Negative Climb Rate NDB Non Directional Beacon NEXRAD Next Generation Radar OAT Outside Air Temperature OBS Omni Bearing Selector PA Proximity Advisory PC personal computer PDA Premature Descent Alert PFD Primary Flight Display P POS Present Position PTK parallel track QTY quantity 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 8 5 e2UPepIOAV N ddd W JS S pJOMaJO4 pJeZeH c 28g Z 29g 29g Y 29 S9Jn 89J jeuonippv 9 59
138. Excessive Descent Rate Alert Cover The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate EDR alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an excessive rate The parameters for the alert as defined by TSO C151c are shown below Height Above Terrain Feet 190 00601 02 Rev H 6000 5500 5000 4500 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000 1500 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 Descent Rate Figure 4 18 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 19 DJ0M9JOJ UJ91s g 29 ddd C 298 HIA 298 gt z a T E e a gt Ajesso s sioqu S sue v 9 saJnjea 8 29 L 29 unuuy euonIppy y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy G 29 9 29 A TOC GARMIN 4 4 5 3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Reduced Required Terrain Clearance RTC and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance ROC alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in _ the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values table When an z RTC alert and or a ROC is issued a potential impact point is displayed on the TAWS Page uu Imminent Terrain Impact ITI and Imminent Obstacle Impact IOI 2 alerts are issued when the aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircrafts projected path
139. FD Sec 3 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance MFD Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary lt 2s Oo c D Q Q lt B 8 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 2015 Garmin Corporation Garmin International Inc 1200 East 151 Street Olathe Kansas 66062 U S A Tel 913 397 8200 or 800 800 1020 Fax 913 397 8282 Garmin AT Inc 2345 Turner Rd S E Salem Oregon 97302 U S A Tel 503 581 8101 or 800 525 6726 Fax 503 364 2138 Garmin Europe Ltd Liberty House Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton SO40 ORB U K Tel 44 0 870 850 1243 Fax 44 0 238 052 4004 Garmin Corporation No 68 Zhangshu 2nd Road Xizhi Dist New Taipei City 221 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2642 9199 Fax 886 2 2642 9099 Garmin Singapore Pte Ltd 46 East Coast Road 05 06 Eastgate Singapore 428766 Tel 65 63480378 Fax 65 63480278 www garmin com Part Number 190 00601 02 Rev H
140. FD knob to the next option suay 8 UNUUY 9 235 SJOQWAS L 286 Alesso 5 8 299 y xipueddy Xopu g xipusddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 123 A TOC GARMIN 4 10 8 GFDS Infrared Satellite IR SAT Data Viewing Range IR SAT data is available over North America and Europe and depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes Information is updated every half hour a i m T ji T i mr Sec 4 5 o 2 No lt A HANER HF ie LEED ADVISORY Figure 4 105 GFDS Infrared Satellite Data Map Display and Legend IR SAT Data Viewing Range The IR SAT Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value IR SAT weather products will be shown on the selected MFD GFDS Weather Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected IR SAT will not be shown For the selected value such as 250 NM is selected IR SAT data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 250 NM and lower 1 While viewing a GFDS Weather Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight IR SAT Data Viewing Range Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlig
141. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND AOPA DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING ITS ACCURACY 2 RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE E E SHALL AOPA BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF AOPA OR AN AOPA AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN v z ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES USER AGREES NOT TO SUE AOPA AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AOPA FROM ANY CAUSES OF ACTION CLAIMS OR LOSSES RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES IN THE INFORMATION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT co APPLY TO YOU Vi Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Contents 1 System Overview eeeeeeeeeeeennnnne nnne nnn nnn nnn nnn IMNE cCuP wed 1 1 1 Standard System Line Replaceable Units LRU UNESCO c 1 1 1 2 GDC 74A 74B kit MEC I A E E A 1 5 gt EREPMEOIUU 1 8 7 Lelo OD pvc 1 8 1 1 1 6 Garmin Ve IG GEOINT ACG E M 1 8 x 1 1 2 Optional Line Replaceable Units LRU 1 9 S5 UN PP MEC UE SOC
142. Figure 5 44 Horizon Heading 5 5 3 4 Airport Signs Airports Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain display When activated the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 NM from an airport and disappear at approximately 4 5 NM Airport signs are shown without the identifier until the aircraft is approximately 9 NM from the airport Airport signs are shown behind the airspeed or altitude display Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APT SIGNS soft key Airport Sign without Identifier Airport Sign with Identifier Between 9 NM and 15 NM Between 4 5 NM and 9 0 NM c 5 a lt Sec 6 Sec 7 Annun Symbols amp Alerts Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Index Figure 5 45 Airport Signs Appendix B 5 42 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 5 3 5 Runway Depiction Runways are shown on the PFD in various ways Soft surface runways such as grass runways are depicted in green Hard surface runways such as asphalt are depicted in gray Your flight plan will determine how the runway is displayed on the PFD Without a loaded flight plan a runway is shown as dark gray with the boundaries of the runway in light gray OM 29S WN un cr D 3 ddd C 29S Runway JN 298 2UPepIOAV pJezeH Y 29S Figure 5 46 Depiction of Runway with a Loaded F
143. G TIS TMA Topo Track TRK TRSA UNAVAIL USR UTC UTM UPS V Vspeed VAR VFR VHF VLOC VMC VNAV VNV VOR VORTAC VS VSI WAAS WGS 84 WPT WX 190 00601 02 Rev H TOC Total Air Temperature Terrain Awareness and Warning System Terminal Control Area Traffic Collision Avoidance System temperature terminal Temporary Flight Restriction True Heading Traffic Information System Terminal Maneuvering Area topographic Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position also Ground Track track Terminal Radar Service Area DJ0M3J04 Wass Z 29S 28g ddd N 29S unavailable user Coordinated Universal Time Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar Stereographic Grid DULPIOAY pJeZeH y 29S S9Jn 89J jeuonippv G 29 velocity airspeed variation Visual Flight Rules Very High Frequency VOR Localizer Receiver Visual Meteorological Conditions vertical navigation VHF Omni directional Range very high frequency omnidirectional range station and tactical air navigation Vertical speed Vertical Speed Indicator SHV 9 unuuv 9 IPS sioqui g 29 y xipueddy STIS 8299 Wide Area Augmentation System World Geodetic System 1984 waypoint s weather Xopu g xipueddy Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 8 7 GARMIN transponder cross track XPDR XTK pJOMa04 Wass ddd QJIN S2UPpIOAV sainjee Sue v 9 sjoquu S TESTIS y xipueddy xopu 28g
144. GARMIN TOC 1 Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group Turn the small MFD knob to reach the Position Reporting page 2 Press the small MFD knob to select the Report Type 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Standard and then press the ENT key POSITION REPORTING TER STATUS 3 TIHE UNTIL TRANSHIT REPORTING STATUS SETTINGS REPORT TYPE PERIOD Figure 3 72 Select Standard Reporting 4 The Position Reporting Period type will now be selected Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or Automatic and then press the ENT key The Position Reporting Period interval will now be selected 5 Turn the small MFD knob to select the reporting frequency POSITION REPORTING STATUS TIME UNTIL TRANSHIT REPORTING STATUS SETTINGS gt 5 REPORT TYPE PERIOD Figure 3 73 Select Standard Reporting Period Frequency 6 Press the small MFD knob to exit editing 7 With the Standard Reporting Type the reporting period may be manuel overridden by pressing the SEND soft key to send data POSITION REPORT IMG SEND Soft Key Label SEND SEND Soft Key Figure 3 74 Press SEND to Override the Reporting Period 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 57 A TOC GARMIN Automatic Flight Following AFF The G500 600 system when combined with a GSR 56 Iridium datalink can send position reports that contain data as required by the U S Government Automated Flight Following system
145. IN Map orientation 3 1 3 3 3 12 3 70 4 5 4 13 4 54 4 62 4 116 4 121 4 138 Map panning 3 7 Map pointer 3 2 3 7 Map range 1 21 3 2 3 5 3 12 4 13 5 18 Map setup 3 10 4 28 Map symbols 7 1 7 5 Map toolbar symbols 7 6 Marker beacon 2 30 Markings 2 7 5 18 5 19 Measuring distance 3 9 Menu Key 1 18 1 19 3 4 3 10 Menus 1 18 1 19 Message 2 19 4 18 4 24 4 30 METARs 3 67 3 76 4 54 4 56 4 73 4 116 4 130 4 131 4 147 4 151 MFD 1 1 1 4 1 15 1 18 3 1 MFD display units 3 31 3 39 Military 3 11 3 27 4 62 Minimum Descent Altitude MDA 2 15 Minimums 5 15 Miscellaneous symbols 7 7 Miscompare 2 31 MOA 3 6 3 11 3 27 7 7 Motion vector 4 50 Mountains 4 136 Moving map 1 1 1 4 1 18 3 1 3 2 3 11 MPEL 4 95 MSL 4 4 Mute 5 28 N National Weather Service 4 59 4 70 4 79 4 126 4 142 Nav angle 1 22 2 20 3 40 Navigation database 1 5 1 14 A 3 A 6 Navigation map 1 13 1 18 3 1 3 2 3 10 4 5 4 28 4 52 5 18 5 19 Navigation source iii 2 3 2 19 2 22 2 24 2 27 2 28 3 37 3 67 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Nav range ring 3 2 3 11 3 13 Nav Status Bar 2 1 Nav status style 2 1 3 31 3 35 NDB 3 6 3 11 3 25 3 26 5 19 7 1 Negative climb rate 4 18 4 23 NEXRAD 3 21 4 56 4 59 4 137 4 138 4 151 Legend 4 63 4 139 Limitations 4 61 Viewing range 4 63 4 138 NEXRAD Legend 3 22 Nexrad source 4 64 NEXRAD Viewing Range 3 22 Night view 5 17 Normal
146. ION Works MK re ORY CYCLE ORY EFFECTIVE DRY EMPIRES HOT RFCETVIMD ANY DETARASTS Jeppesen rtie EHLI H B8 DEC 14 SYSTEM STATUE Li Ln E Pa BACT System LRUs Figure 6 1 System Status Displays 6 14 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 7 SYMBOLS The following tables describe the symbols that are found on the MFD Map displays 7 1 Map Page Symbols Description Unknown Airport Non towered Non serviced Airport Towered Non serviced Airport Non towered Serviced Airport Towered Serviced Airport Soft Surface Serviced Airport Soft Surface Non serviced Airport Heliport LOM compass locator at outer marker NDB Non directional Radio Beacon VR Table 7 1 Map Page Symbols 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 1 DJOM9JOJ Ul91s g 29 ddd C 295 S2UPpIOAV CN pJeZeH c 29g Y 29S G 29S S9Jn 89J jeuonippv SUJelv 3 Uhuuv 9 29 sjoquiAs L 99S y xipueddy leSsO D 9 29g X PU g xipueddy 10C GARMIN 7 2 SafeTaxi Symbols Description Helipad Under Construction Zones a2 rare Designated Water Areas Table 7 2 SafeTaxi Symbols 13 Traffic Symbols Description Highest to Lowest Priority z E 2 Dn Traffic Advisory TA In Range Symbol m Traffic Advisory TA Out of Range n Proximate Advisory PA z mn Other Traffic Table 7 3 Traffic Symbols 1 2 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 0060
147. IONAL FEATURES OPTIONAL A NOTE The availability of SafeTaxi ChartView or FliteCharts in electronic form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the aircraft See the AFMS for more information e NOTE ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer Additional features of the GDU 620 include the following ChartView and FliteCharts electronic charts e SafeTaxi diagrams e Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment e XM WX Satellite Weather covered in Section 4 7 e Traffic covered in Sections 4 5 and 4 6 e Synthetic Vision Technology SVI The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on board electronic terminal procedures charts Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured in the system SaleTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway runway and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the United States By decreasing the range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available a close up view of the airport layout can be seen The optional Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170 channels of music news and sports Sirius XM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices and 2 longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations XM WX Satellite Weather is an optional service that pro
148. IS during power up If TIS passes the test TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating Mode in the air If TIS fails the power up test an annunciation is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page Traffic Map Page Annunciation Description Data is not being received from the transponder Data is being received from the transponder but a failure is detected in the data stream The transponder has failed TIS is unavailable or out of range Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action Table 4 17 TIS Failure Annunciations Sec4 Hazard Avoidance The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page When the aircraft is on the ground TIS automatically enters Standby Mode If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby Mode is selected the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out also the case when TIS has failed Once the aircraft is airborne TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed The mode can be changed manually using soft keys or the page menu Mod Traffic Mode Annunciation Traffic Display Enabled Icon Traffic Map Page Other Maps TIS Operating OPERATING STANDBY TIS Standby INTR RR RESET SI page TIS Failed FAIL Table 4 18 TIS Modes 4 44 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Switching Between TIS Operating Modes 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page gr
149. If the unit fails an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page Data is not being received from the TAS unit TAS unit has failed unit is self reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data Data is not being received from the TAS unit Data is being received from the TAS unit but the unit is self reporting a failure Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit Table 4 14 TAS Failure Annunciations 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 35 A ia GARMIN The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed Traffic Status Banner Annunciation Description A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory Annunciation indicates distance in NM altitude separation in hundreds of feet and altitude trend arrow climbing descending System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory Annunciation indicates distance in NM altitude separation in hundreds of feet and altitude trend arrow climbing descending The system distance units are set to Metric or Imperial and are shown as such in all other cases except for the trattic distance annunciation g q 2c o G o N S ngo gt lt
150. Interpretation When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display the colors denote approximate rainfall intensity and rates as shown in the table below 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 97 JaC 2UN DOW d p EUOI unuuv J ISS A TOC GARMIN 3rd Party Radars Weather Radar Return Mode ter Approximate Level see Color Pdl Rainfall Rate radar docu rial d in hr mentation for details D WW O eet Table 4 25 Precipitation Intensity Levels 4 9 5 2 Thunderstorms Updratts and downdratts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud The more severe the drafts the greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets With this in mind the following interpretations can be made trom what is displayed on the weather radar Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin GWX 68 Radars GWX 70 Radars Approximate Intensity Sec 4 5 te No lt n areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta indicating large amounts of precipitation the turbulence is considered severe Areas that show steep color gradients intense color changes over thin bands or short distances suggest irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence as well as heavy precipitation Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity
151. Iridium Phone page press the VOL key at the bottom of the display d pJOMelc VOLUME zavoccn n Phone Volume EHE 07777 Level Bar Graph Press to Dial ESON EEE Press to Select e Selected m Volume Keys Number Figure 3 86 Select Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment u 2 Press the VOL or VOL keys as necessary to adjust the phone volume TU Press to Show Press to Dial ize oos Selected DL Xii V Wis Previous List of Number Soft Keys 220 Press to Press to Press to EN R Attenuate Decrease Increase Phone ad or Mute Phone Volume Volume Figure 3 87 Using Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment 2E 3 Pressing the ATT soft key will attenuate the volume Press the ATT soft key 3g again to return to the previous volume V unuuv 3 2 8 4 Making a Phone Call a 1 While viewing the Iridium Phone page enter a phone number or select one trom the Phone Book catalog P 2 Press the DIAL key 2 3 After completing the call press the HANG UP key o g xipueacy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 65 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B System Foreword PFD OD E a amp Alerts Features Avoidance Symbols Appendix A Index TOC A GARMIN 3 2 8 5 Answering a Phone Call An incoming phone call will generate a pop up announcing the call When a call is accepted the pop
152. MEC CHEN 1 9 TLA WEER deos tantae E RESO 1 9 gt 1 1 2 3 Stormscope Optional 1 9 T N R 1 1 2 4 GSR 56 Optional 1 9 1 1 2 5 CM OO ACO MOGI cece snansetisesnestase senersseiasnsedexanesesecaheesaes leo ETD GAAS SC OPT OA MUN 1 10 228 1 1 2 7 GTX 330 330D Optional 1 11 28 12 System Power m siaina a O D oE 1 17 1 3 International Geomagnetic Reference Field ssussss 1 14 3 14 System ODGIADELsmaentenstataesctenentctiespactenenkis ttes isle act estie 1 15 359 1 4 1 Pilot CONOIS Mee Fs 1 15 XE PEOR M HE 1 15 4 AAA IPRDIBEZO GUR site ercgee ieee eastern 1 16 ES LAL MEDODSeesiasciiee E dius nie Rae 1 18 P MN UI E C c M 1 18 1 4 Using the Soft Key Controls sse 1 19 28 1 4 3 Using the Page Menus 1 19 1 4 4 BS MINS CIES sacs cateccen ance parncietieamtedionitesmtiecnte cette engem treated ondes 1 20 gt 1 4 5 Display BACKIGMUUN G sccuctesessvedeeustusbseentucseeusscetennesesieusecatenasts 1 22 2 Primary Flight Display PFD eere 24 maroc m 2 2 x ME 6518 lt 10 Ae e 0 m E M 2 5 38 2 22 CLL LiL Seen eee PEN 2 7 2 2 2 orare ec S E once ERO ERGO ROUND 2 8 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide Vii Sec 6 Annun QO Alarte amp Alerts Hazard Sec 3 Additional kannan y Appendix B m Foreword Cored Syste J PFD MFD Q Avoida
153. MFD knob to highlight the Cell Movement Data Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 8 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 8 21 XM AIREPs Air Reports AIREPs are messages from an aircraft typically from commercia aircraft to a ground station AIREPs are similar to PIREPs 1 While viewing Weather Setup 2 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the AIREPs Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar E eadh WH WEATHER EP TO Wy dii u LEDEMD ADVISORY Figure 4 62 XM Weather AIREPs 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 83 A TOC GARMIN Viewing Textual AIREPs PIREPs c Textual AIREPs PIREPs can be viewed by selecting a AIREP on the Map or Weather WX pages 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight an
154. MIN Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Threat Location Terrain Terrain Obstacle lt 1000 ft gt 1000 ft lt 1000 ft gt 1000 ft BLISS C MPO EN Location AGL AGL AGL AGL Terrain Obstacle at or within 100 ft below current aircraft altitude Terrain Obstacle between 100 ft and 1000 ft below current aircraft altitude Neo 2 92 ED J d N Ale le Terrain Obstacle between 1000 ft and 2000 ft below current aircraft altitude Table 4 3 TAWS Terrain Obstacle Colors and Symbology Tower Windmill Windmill in Group Power Line Table 4 4 Obstacle Icon Types gt 4 4 4 1 TAWS Page TAWS information is displayed on the last page of the Map page group The _ TAWS Page is specialized to show terrain obstacle and Threat Area Indication data in relation to the aircrafts current altitude without clutter from the basemap Aviation data airports VORs and other NAVAIDs can be displayed for reference The display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point _ of impact on the TAWS Page 4 12 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading If orientation is not heading up it will be track up Two views are available relative to the position of the aircraft the 360 default display and the radar like ARC 120 display Map range is adjustable with the RNG k
155. Map Navigation pages TIS and TAS cannot be ee at the same time If the aircraft has a TAS unit installed the GDU 620 will be E configured for TAS If no TAS unit is installed and a GTX Mode S transponder is installed then the GDU 620 will be configured for TIS A pilot can tell which data is being displayed by the label in the top left corner TAS TCAS OPER v for TAS TCAS data and TIS OPER for TIS data TIS data comes from a GTX transponder Coverage is limited to specific areas as shown in the Airmens Information Manual AIM TAS data comes from a TAS unit such as a Garmin _ GTS 800 or 820 Skywatch 497 KTA 810 or other unit Coverage follows the 3 4 aircraft In the Navigation Map page setup you can select the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown Once outside of the selected range traffic will be decluttered The Traffic soft key will still be available The Garmin GDL 88 can provide TIS B and ADS B information The Garmin GTS ADS B products can also provide ADS B information 4 7 1 TAS TCAS 1 Traffic Optional 3 TAS refers to an active Traffic Advisory System that may be optionally displayed on the PFD and or MFD The TAS is installed separately from the G500 600 system There are variations in performance and control among the various G500 600 compatible TAS systems Refer to the appropriate TAS documentation for detailed information on the operation of the TAS system This gt zZ T E
156. O information available in different By versions Update vez cycle and content i may vary FliteCharts FAA published SD card 28 days on fly garmin com Disables 180 days oc terminal procedures Thursdays after expiration date E E lt ChartView Jeppesen terminal SD card 14 days on Contact Optional feature procedures Fridays Jeppesen that requires Garmin dealer enablement Disables 70 days after expiration date Sec 7 Symbols Table A 1 Database List Sec 8 Glossary lt 2 5 D 2 2 lt Appendix B Index A 2 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Jeppesen Databases The aviation database is updated on a 28 day cycle Aviation database updates are provided by Garmin and may be downloaded from the Garmin web 2 site fly garmin com onto a Garmin provided Supplemental Datacard Contact Garmin at fly garmin com for aviation database updates and update kits The Aviation database is stored internally and the Datacard is only used to transfer the database into the unit The optional ChartView database is updated on a 14 day cycle The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen ChartView is an optional feature that requires enablement by a Garmin dealer Contact Jeppesen www jeppesen com for ChartView subscription and update information Updating the Jeppesen Database 1 With the G500 600 System OFF insert the SD card containing the
157. Obstacle Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Figure 7 3 TERRAIN Altitude Color Correlation 1 4 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 7 5 Basemap Symbols Symbol Description Interstate Highway o State Highway mtm omm ew Table 7 5 Basemap Symbols 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 7 5 did Wass plomao4 29S C 298 HIA 298 e2UPepIOAV pJezeH Y 29S SoJn eo euonippv G 29 suly 8 unuuv 9 298 sjoquiAs L 99S y xipuaddy AJesso S 8 29S Xopu g xipueddy is GARMIN 7 6 Map Tool Bar Symbols Description Terrain Proximity Enabled and Available Indicator Terrain Proximity Enabled and Not Available Indicator Point Obstacle Enabled and Available Indicator Software version 5 12 and later Point Obstacle Enabled and Not Available Indicator Software version 5 12 and later Wire Obstacles Enabled and Available Indicator Software version 5 12 and later Wire Obstacles Enabled and Not Available Indicator Software version 5 12 and later StormScope StormScope Enabled and Not Available Indicator Ownship is receiving TIS B and ADS R services Software version 5 11 or earlier Possible incomplete traffic picture ownship is not receiving one or both of the TIS B or ADS R services Software version 5 11 or earlier Table 7 6 Map Tool Bar Symbols 1 6 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190
158. PFD knob to move the Altitude Bug to a desired altitude OR 3 Press the center of the PFD knob to set the selected altitude to the current altitude ALT A 190 00601 02 Rev H Selected Altitude Bug Altitude Trend Indicator Figure 2 21 Altimeter Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide Selected Altitude in the Altitude Alerter window Current Altitude Barometric Setting Ala PJOM 104 W JS S ddd C 92S DULpIOAY asin sounjea4 euontppy y xipueddy leSsO D sioquJ S SOV 9 unuuv G 296 Xapul g xipuaddy 29 298 piezeH Y 29 298 8 295 9 29 A TOC GARMIN 2 4 2 Altitude Alerting E The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts if interfaced to an audio panel when approaching the Selected Altitude Puma the Selected Altitude is changed the Altitude Alerter is reset c NOTE The Altitude Alerter function may be disabled in some installations When the Altitude Alerter is disabled pressing the ALT key will result in an ALT KEY INOP message The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude the Selected Altitude shown above the Altimeter changes to black text on a light blue background and flashes for five seconds An audio alert may be generated if configured e When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude the Sel
159. RNING Changing the gain in weather mode will cause precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color not representative of the true intensity Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of precipitation A NOTE Gain can be adjusted in Weather mode on the GWX radars only 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 105 A ix GARMIN 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the MENU key 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Manual Gain and press ENT This will highlight the Gain value in the Control window 3 Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Gain OR 1 Press the MFD knob and turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Gain value in the Control window TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Sec 4 5 o 2 No lt Figure 4 81 Highlight Gain Cal Value 6 2 Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Gain Cal value Press the MFD knob again to accept the value and end editing TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Figure 4 82 Adjust Gain Cal Value Restore Calibrated Gain 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the MENU key 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Restore Calibrated Gain and press ENT 4 106 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Press the APD boob fo retirm te beset pane Figure 4 83 Restore Calibrated Gain OR 1 While viewing the Weather
160. Radar page of the Wx page group press the CONTROL soft key Ju 2 Press the GAIN CAL soft key to restore the calibrated gain value Press the MFD knob again to accept the value and end editing 4 9 6 5 Sector Scan GWX Radars Only Adjusting the Sector Scan reduces the scan angle from Full in increments of 20 40 and 60 in horizontal scanning Sector scanning is not available for lt fr vertical scanning lis gt zZ T E e rar pJezey Y 29 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the CONTROL soft key 2 Press the BRG soft key to display the Bearing Line 3 Turn the small MFD knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position The location of the Bearing Line will become the center point of the Sector Scan 4 Turn the large MFD knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Figure 4 84 Sector Scan Full 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 107 A TOC GARMIN 5 Turn the small MFD knob to select FULL 60 40 or 20 scan TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Figure 4 85 Sector Scan 40 6 It desired readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan 7 Remove Sector Scanning by returning the SECTOR SCAN value to FULL 4 9 6 6 Antenna Stabilization 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the CON
161. Rs The Temporary Flight Restriction TFR viewing range option selects whether TFR information is shown on the GFDS Weather Map TFR information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown For the value such as 500 NM selected TFR information will be shown at map ranges of that value 500 NM and lower 1 While viewing a GFDS Weather Map page of the WX page group turn the large MFD knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the GFDS Weather Map page 4 134 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Viewing Textual TFRs Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather WX pages 1 While viewing a GFDS Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight a TFR symbol yellow circle Press ENT 2 The TFR details will be shown 3 Press the small MFD knob or ENT to return to the Weather page TAF OGRAAT TOA FR LOCALIZED TFA f d F Figure 4 116 GFDS Weather Textual TFRs and Legend pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 135 A TOC GARMIN 4 11 FIS B Weather Optional c WSR 88D weather surveillance ra
162. S DCLTR 3 each time the soft key is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level Selecting the DCLTR soft key removes the taxiway markings and airport feature labels Selecting the DCLTR 1 soft key removes VOR station ID the VOR E symbol and intersection names if within the airport plan view Selecting the amp DCLTR 2 soit key removes the airport runway layout unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure Pressing the DCLTR 3 soft key cycles back lt gt to the original map detail With Auto Zoom enabled the map will automatically zoom to 1 NM and DCLTR 0 upon landing so SafeTaxi can be viewed Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Navigation Map Section am gu Jeuonippy AUN 5 2 1 2 Hot Spot Information 9 N Hot Spots can contain more information about the area that can be displayed when selected A 1 While viewing the Hot Spot area on the Navigation Map page press the d MFD knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the MFD knobs to move the cursor on the Hot Spot border or into the Hot Spot area and then press the ENT key 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 19 4 VIn rl zl F g Xipuedawv Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 6 Annun Sec 2 Sec 1 Sec 3 Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B Foreword System PFD MFD amp Alerts Appendix A Index GARMIN Hot Spot Name Location Info 5 20 INFORMATION HOTSPOT HOT SPOT
163. Scroll Bar Sec 3 M Procedure ra miha etd i Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Horizontal Scroll Bar Features c 5 a lt Figure 5 11 Zooming and Panning Around a Chart While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the RNG Range 979 E ys to zoom in and out 2 After zooming in you may only see part of the chart Press the small MFD knob to enter Pan mode and activate scroll bars on the edges of the chart Turn the large and small MFD knobs to move around the chart Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel the scroll bars and exit panning Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Appendix B Index 5 12 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 1 5 2 Viewing Chart Details in ChartView A NOTE The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will automatically be selected DJOM9JOJ A NOTE Chart details are only available for instrument approach procedure __ charts Chart details are not available for airport diagrams or SID STAR 2 charts 3 1 Press the Detail key to view detailed views of the current chart The Detail key is only available with ChartView B 3IN 298 i am Par mitra DIN EM BA id Bd aet i es ae ur em D Fur ijui E Rate PEA i poe i e viel Pur dee P puts a bia Pur Fx mri apii oJULpPIOAY TI a gt te e 1 n s y 8 unuuy iii i S
164. Sec 3 M Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Features c 5 a lt Figure 5 9 Activate Chart Selection for the Current Airport ChartView shown Press ENT to accept and view the selected chart Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 8 Sec 7 Appendix A Glossary Symbols Appendix B Index 5 10 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN a fom teed oe RU 2 imn m cn in img ie ea lm ame ee mim D Per sinet Baer A ausim pmm vij AE mr mica ad pru iy a fame faa Pe h B nct rel Figure 5 10 Selected Chart for the Current Airport ChartView shown 5 1 5 Using Charts More detail on the displayed chart can be viewed by zooming in with the Range keys and moving the chart around with pan mode The Detail soft key allows access to more details for the currently displayed chart 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 11 HIN d Ula1s S pJOM9JO C 29 298 e2UPepIOAV pJezeH TI a gt pe e 1 2 s y 8 unuuy SJOqW S 9 29S IeSSO D 8 29S y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy 299 Jeuonippy 298 7 29 A TOC GARMIN 5 1 5 1 Chart Zooming and Panning Chart and Panning allows viewing charts closer to examine details Foreword A NOTE Panning mode is indicated by the presence of scroll bars Sec 1 System a Pacers r3 gH ar mrriyanls at LEE A wi G d a t pegkbwra 2 4 5 Sec 2 PFD Vertical
165. T pJOM9JO 298 UJa1s g C 298 RS TI O Figure 3 8 Navigation Map Measure Distance Function 3 Your present position will be marked as the starting reference point To choose a different starting reference point turn the large or small MFD knobs to desired point and press ENT e2UPepIOAV piezeH t 29S G 29 Figure 3 9 Measure Distance Starting Reference Point 4 Turn the large or small MFD knobs to move the cursor to a reference point The distance and bearing is displayed at the top of the display Distance and Bearing Between Start and End Points S9Jn 89J jeuonippv Say S unuuv 9 298 Ending Reference Point position sioquJ S LS Ending Reference Point AJeSSO S 8 29S y xipuaddy bi Ye Starting Reference Point Xepu g xipueddy Figure 3 10 Bearing Distance Measurement 5 Press the small MFD knob to stop measuring 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 9 A La GARMIN 3 1 9 Customizing Navigation Map Pages E The Navigation Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page 5 Menu The Page Menu options include choices for Map Setup and Measure Bearing Distance The Map Setup choice covers selections for Map Weather Traffic and Aviation depending on the installed equipment of a given aircraft 3 1 10 Map Setup The Map Setup selection from the Page Menu allows you to select which data z will be displayed on the map
166. TAS TCAS Symbology Traffic is displayed using four different symbols Foreword TAS Symbol Description mn Other Traffic nu Proximity Advisory PA Sec 1 System Sec 2 PFD NEN Traffic Advisory TA m Traffic Advisory Off Scale Table 4 12 TAS TCAS Traffic Symbol Description Sec 3 MFD The traffic system determines the type of symbol used for each target Refer to the traffic system documentation for information regarding the criteria used to determine target type 5 o g NS E lt A Traffic Advisory TA alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft Closing rate distance and vertical separation meet TA criteria for the specific traffic system A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder atures Additional rts Sec 7 amp Ale Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Appendix B Index 4 34 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN 4 7 1 6 Traffic System Status NOTE Refer to the equipment documentation for information on the self test and operating modes The traffic mode is indicated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page TEST TAS Selt test Initiated n also shown in white in center of page TAS Operating OPERATING STANDBY also shown in white in center of page Table 4 13 TAS Modes TAS Standby
167. TERRAIN HSVT alerting enabled External HTAWS configuration mismatch IAS NO COMP No data from one Contact your Garmin dealer for or more airspeed service sensors lt LRU gt CONFIG Error in the Config service required Contact configuration of a your Garmin dealer for service specific LRU where lt LRU gt denotes a specific LRU such as GDL69 or GWX Ro E D a unuuy sioqui S L 99 JeSSO D 8 299 y xXipueddy Xa PUI g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 6 9 Sec 5 Sec 3 Hazard Avininancr AVOIGance Cover Alert Message MFD tures a WM J TOC E lt LRU gt COOLING lt LRU gt DB ERR lt LRU gt KEYSTK lt LRU gt SERVICE lt LRU gt VOLTAGE 6 10 E MANIFEST C A 5 X g CO w gt S Description lt LRU gt has poor cooling Reducing power usage by dimming display lt LRU gt database error exists where lt LRU gt database denotes the specific unit database lt LRU gt KEY Is stuck The lt LRU gt has detected the KEY key as stuck where LRU and KEY denote a specific LRU and key lt LRU gt needs service Contact repair facility LRU has low voltage Reducing power usage by dimming display where lt LRU gt denotes the specific LRU and power is being reduced LRU software mismatch communication halted Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide
168. TROL soft key To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization press the STAB ON soft key to activate antenna stabilization or press the STAB OFF soft key to deactivate The current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather radar display Sec4 5 o 2 No E r NO gt 4 9 6 7 Weather Attenuated Color Highlight WATCH i GWX Radars Only While in horizontal scan mode this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed intensity due to weakening of the radar energy This weakening is known as attenuation The radar energy weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation large areas of lesser precipitation and distance Issues with the radome will also attenuate the radar energy All these factors have an effect on the return intensity The more energy that dissipates the lesser the displayed intensity of the return Accuracy of the 5 displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect Make maneuvering decisions with this information in mind Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the extent of attenuation in a shaded area 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the CONTROL soft key 4 108 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 2 To activate or deactivate the WATCH feature press the WATCH soft key Fig
169. The GSR 56 account will allow configuration _ to forward data to the Automated Flight Following system 4 1 While viewing the Position Reporting function press the small MFD knob to select the Report Type g 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight AFF and then press the ENT POSITION REPORTING STATUS TIME UNTIL TRANSHIT REPORTING STATUS SETTINGS REPORT TYPE PERIOD 1 every Figure 3 75 Select Automatic Flight Following AFF Reporting Type 243 Tum the small MFD knob to select OFF or the default Every 2 Min value POSITION REPORTING STATUS TIME UNTIL TRANSHIT REPORTING STATUS SETTINGS REPORT TYPE PERIOD Figure 3 76 Select AFF Reporting Period Frequency 3 58 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 2 8 Iridium Phone Operation Optional Optional satellite telephone operation is available through the Iridium S satellite system that is interfaced through the Garmin GSR 56 3 4 CAUTION When interfaced with a GSR 56 Iridium transceiver only one SD card may be present in the GDU 620 and it must be in the lower slot 3 2 8 1 Status The Status section shows the Call Time Phone Status and Call Suppression selected The Call Time value shows the length of the call time for the current call using the Iridium phone Phone Status shows the current operating status of the Iridium phone Status Description 3 The Iridium phone is not using
170. This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely Z If the aircraft altitude is 15 000 feet or lower set the displayed range to 60 NM Closely monitor anything that enters the display Also atter setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously ground returns can be monitored for possible threats The relationship between antenna tilt angle altitude and distance is one degree of tilt equals 100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile d gt zZ 2m T E e rar Vertical Change of Radar Beam feet Figure 4 72 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile Therefore with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground a target return at 10 NM is approximately 4 000 feet below the aircraft at 20 NM 8 000 feet at 50 NM 20 000 feet In other words at this tilt setting a ground return such as a mountain peak being displayed at 10 NM would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4 000 feet If that ground target return moves to 5 NM maximum distance below the _ aircraft will be 2 000 feet This setup will provide a good starting point for practical use of the GWX 5 radar There are many other factors to consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations xipueday 4 9 5 Weather Mapping and Interpretation 4 9 5 1 Weather display
171. Tm 2 32 2 10 Fast Slow MNO CAN IO Pogasunenuemresttaur sb UD Una etur IR Goon ERE UH UP Ur UbxRU IHE rPI ss 2 34 De VAs We FO DIS NAY WINING ERE 2 34 3 Multi Function Display MFD eere 3 1 3 1 Navigation euo ER CREE 3 2 3 1 1 Default Navigation Map Page sseseeenenenne 3 3 Bm Map Ovenay ICONS HO 3 4 Zl Selecting Page Options 3 4 3 1 4 Changing the Navigation Map Range eese 3 5 35159 Decluttering Map Pages 3 5 3 1 6 usn C 3 7 3 1 7 Selecting Items on the Map eseeeennne 3 8 3 1 8 Measuring Distances e 3 9 3 1 9 Customizing Navigation Map Pages 3 10 viii Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN SUED a E E E 3 1 10 1 Map Feature ODTGMS caseros udeetes easi rores a Rr F r pr Re rmi 3 1 10 2 Weather Feature Options Optional 3 1 10 3 Traffic Feature Options Optional sess 3 1 10 4 Aviation Feature Options eeeeeeeeeeen 3 1 11 Split Screen Optional eene 2 2 AUX Mode PAC CS essais eraticteintb cese espai te vs sean sdvesecesonentuntdussenesdusassetdarcsdess 3 2 1 SYS TCM SENOS sinsin a A Aa 3 2 1 1 Display Brightness cccccccsscsecsecsscssscsessesessssssesseseeeeees 3 2 1 2 Airspeed Reference Marks ssseeeeee Di qus PFD Options Wind VOC Ole tesa uou y REED
172. US Style 2 System Roll Modes Autopilot Status Pitch Modes PFD Active Mode e H ras MT Active Mode Armed Mode Siis EESE Armed Mode Figure 5 38 Autopilot Annunciations on Top of PFD MFD Avoidance Nn w Ed gt 19 lt P LL Appendix A Index 5 36 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN ia 5 5 Synthetic Vision Technology Optional SVT The optional Synthetic Vision Technology SVI is a visual enhancement to the G500 600 SVT is displayed as a forward looking display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft SVT information is shown on the primary flight display PFD The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude 2 heading GPS three dimensional position and a database of terrain obstacles and other relevant features 3 DJOM9JOJ ddd C 29S The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD Flight Path Marker Horizon Heading Marks lt a Traffic Display 7 Airport Signs i Runway Display 3 R Terrain Alerting Obstacle Alerting TI t te e a 72 Jeuonippy e Water Zero Pitch Line y xipuaddy AJeSSO S sioquJ S SAV 9 9 29g S unuuy 9 29S X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 37 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 c 5 a lt Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B System Forew
173. Viewing Range The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Winds Aloft will not be shown Where 150 NM is selected Winds Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower DJO0M9JOJ UJ91s g 29 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted ddd C 298 3IN 295 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option gt zZ 9 T E e rar pJezey Y 29 SoJnjeo euontppy G 99S Alesso s S OQUWAS SHo V 8 2 aS 98g unuuv 9 IVS y xipuaddy X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 133 A TOC GARMIN 4 10 14 GFDS TFRs Temporary Flight Restrictions TFRs provide detailed information for local TFR Detail Sec4 5 o 2 No lt Select TFR Symbol To View Details GFDS WEATHER HAP 4 LEGEND Figure 4 115 GFDS Weather TF
174. XRAD Viewing Range NEXRAD Cell Movement and S Lightning Viewing range Weather is an optional feature that requires a GDL 69 69A and an XM WX Satellite Weather subscription or other weather product such as GFDS 1 While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 page of the Map page group press the MENU key to display the Navigation Map Page Menu UJa1s g 29S did Z 22S FTIA Prora he HED bok te rrur fo bi aa adi 92S Figure 3 25 Navigation Map Page Menu SDULPIOAY pJezeH Y 29S 2 With the cursor flashing on the Map Setup option press the ENT key to display the Map Setup Menu G 29 3 Use the large and small MFD knobs to select the Weather Group and press ENT to allow editing of the selected group The groups shown depend on the features available for equipment installed in your aircraft SoJn eo euonippy s y 8 Uhuuv 9 22S sioquJ S LS Figure 3 26 Navigation Map Page Menu Weather Group Selection AJeSSO S 8 299 4 Press the small MFD knob to return to the Navigation Map Page y xipuaddy X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 21 A ie GARMIN NEXRAD Data Viewing Range The NEXRAD Viewing Range option selects whether the NEXRAD weather products is shown on the MFD NEXRAD weather products will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected NEXRAD weather will not be shown Map ranges above the selected value will not show
175. a Card into the lower card slot shown in Figure A 4 The Supplemental Data Card should not be removed except to update the databases stored on the card The upper slot is typically used for updating the navigation database and is then normally left open The Navigation card may be inserted in either slot but should use the same slot each time Navigation Database SD Update Card Navigation Terrain Obstacles Airports Safelaxi Charts FliteChart or ChartView Database SD Card Figure A 4 SD Card Database Location The Garmin databases can be updated by following the instructions detailed in the Navigation Databases section of the Garmin web site fly garmin com Once the updated files have been downloaded from the web site a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards The following equipment is required to perform the update e Windows compatible PC computer Windows 2000 XP Vista or Windows 7 recommended e SanDisk SD Card Reader P Ns SDDR 93 or SDDR 99 or equivalent card reader Updated database obtained from the Garmin web site Existing Supplemental Database SD Card P N 010 00769 xx It may be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service facility in order to use certain database features A 6 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Updating Garmin Databases 1 D
176. age indicates any of five different possible criteria for chart _ available current out of date or disabled See the previous table for the various FliteCharts Power up page displays and the definition of each Appendix A Index 5 4 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 1 3 Determining Chart Database Type Coverage and Currency Chart Database Type Select the DBASE soft key for scrolling through the database information Scroll through the database with the MFD knob or ENT key 1 Turn the large MFD knob to select AUX 2 Press the DB ACTV key to view the databases 3 Press the small MFD knob and then turn the small or large MFD knobs to highlight Chart Type The field will show Not Available ChartView or FliteCharts CHART CYCLE CHART TYPE CHART EXPIRES CHART DISABLES Figure 5 3 ChartView Database Information CHART REGION CHART CYCLE CHART TYPE Jeuonippy G 96 CHART EFFECTIVE j CHART EXPIRES CHART DISABLES Figure 5 4 FliteChart Database Information Chart Coverage The Chart databases cover the area that was selecting during the download process FliteCharts will note the region covered by the installed chart database ChartView does not 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 5 Additional ANNUN Features TOC Chart Currency A GARMIN The date currency of the installed chart databases are shown both during 3 power up and on
177. airport with a AIREP 552 Press ENT to view text information Press ENT again to return to the previous page THF ORHST TON FIER F AIBEZPS TIED alla Sec 4 5 te No lt Pres the EMT dep da neturn in the beoe pose Figure 4 63 XM Weather AIREP Text Detail 4 84 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 4 8 22 XM Cyclone The current location of the cyclone is shown along with its projected path with the date and time DJOM3JO 1 While viewing Weather Setup 2 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Cyclone Data Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted Ula1s g 298 ddd C 298 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 3IN 295 pJezey Y 29 gt z T E e rar SoJnjeo euontppy G 29 Projected Path With Date And Time sev 9 unuuv 9 IPS Current Position Of Cyclone sioqui S 29 ADWESORY Figure 4 64 XM Weather Cyclone y xipuaddy Alesso 5 8 299 XaPU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 85 A a GARMIN 4 8 23 XM Freezing Level Freezing Level data shows the color coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the Freezi
178. al l LT 10 Lond 10 NOSE he 120 Traffic j Flight Path Marker ZPL with Horizon Heading Marks Aircraft Symbol E 7 Las d Synthetic Terrain SVT Soft Keys Figure 5 43 SVT on Primary Flight Display NOTE SVT features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude lt deviation information using the CDI VSI and VDI presentations 5 5 3 1 Flight Path Marker FPM The Flight Path Marker is also known as a Velocity Vector It is displayed 2 on the PFD at ground speeds above 30 knots The FPM depicts approximate projected path of the aircratt 5 5 3 2 Zero Pitch Line The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and provides a reference line by which to judge aircraft attitude with respect to the horizon It is not necessarily aligned with the terrain horizon particularly when the terrain is sloped or mountainous 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 41 A TOC GARMIN 5 5 3 3 Horizon Heading The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows compass headings in 30 degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line Horizon heading tick marks and digits appearing on the zero pitch line are not visible when they are _ behind either the airspeed or altitude display Horizon Heading is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG soft key i Horizon Heading Foreword Sec 1 PFD Sec 2 MFD Sec 3 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance
179. all other cases except for the traffic distance annunciation Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds If after another 6 seconds data is not received traffic is removed from the display The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases The displayed data is not current 6 to 12 seconds since last message The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting 12 to 60 seconds since last message Traffic may exist within the selected display range but it is not displayed Traffic data has failed Traffic has not been detected The traffic service is unavailable or out of range Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page Shown centered on the bottom of Traffic Map Page Table 4 19 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations 4 46 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 7 3 ADS B Traffic Optional ADS B In allows a properly equipped aircraft to receive TIS B and oma 7 aircraft equipped with ADS B out capability OPR STBY Motion AIt Mode Mode Absolute ante di Relative Normal Off Above E Duration Unrestricted ON 30 Sec Back 1 Min 5 Min Back Back aULPIOAY pJezey Y 29 Figure 4 31 ADS B Traffic Page Functional Diagram When in Standby mode pressing the MENU key will show the Page menu where the traffic LRU can be placed into TEST mode 4 7
180. an FPL charts of the nearest airport NRST or your most recently selected airports RECENT o LL 3 Figure 5 7 Chart Category Selection 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the SELECT soft a key me 2 Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to show FPL NRST or RECENT s 3 Turn the large MFD knob to select the desired identifier and then press ENT 2 5 1 4 3 Selecting a Chart Manually c 5 a lt Annun m ppenaix D A chart for a different airport may be chosen by selecting the identifier for the desired airport Airport Identifier Selection Cr Pe h iH H y amp Alerts ann amp E O ap M r 5 warum tradi tx ciuem r5 Figure 5 8 Airport Identifier Selection 5 8 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the SELECT soft key to change the airport 2 Usethe small MFD knob to change the character pJOMaJO4 3 Use the large MFD knob to move the cursor to highlight a character 4 Press ENT to accept the selected airport 35 5 1 4 4 Chart Auto Selection The charts page will automatically select a chart to display when the page is opened 3 K WISA 5 dd 2 NOTE The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will automatically be selected 29S dsj While on the ground the nearest airport dia
181. an Attitude Indicator that has a Sky Pointer the pointer below the roll scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the aircraft to keep the Roll Pointer pointing towards the sky Appendix A Index 2 10 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Roll Scale Zero Pointer Roll Pointer Roll Scale DJOM9JOJ 29 cn lt cn cr D 3 F Figure 2 16 Attitude Indicator with a Sky Pointer configuration in a left turn 2 3 1 Extreme Attitude Extreme attitude is defined as a roll greater than 65 left or right 30 pitch up or 20 pitch down Red chevrons are displayed at greater than 50 pitch up and 30 pitch down The PFD will declutter when the aircraft enters an extreme attitude Only the primary functions will be displayed in these situations The following information is removed from the PFD and corresponding soft keys are disabled when the aircraft is in an unusual attitude PFD Knob Mode Annunciations 298 e2UPepIOAV piezeH Y 29S Ground Speed True Airspeed and Airspeed Units G 298 Selected Altitude Barometer Settings and Selected Vertical Speed SoJn eo euontppy e Vertical Course Deviation Indicator e Traffic and Terrain Annunciations S y 8 unuuv 9 298 Flight Director Command Bars e Radar Altimeter digital readout e Marker beacon annunciation S OQWAS L 2S Fast Slow indicator DME field Alesso o 8 29S y xipueddy
182. and may be much higher than the radar top The actual top does not indicate the top of the hazardous area Avoidance 8 Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection Tt can have a film of water on its surface making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet Because of this film of water and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets thunderstorms with large amounts of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain Some hail shafts are extremely narrow 100 yards or less and make poor radar targets In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry no liquid coating target returns are less intense Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados U shaped cloud edges 3 to 7 miles across can also indicate hail These target returns appear quite suddenly along any edge of the cell outline They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds making vigilant monitoring essential Ji Ia e AD DE 4 100 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 9 6 Radar Operation in Weather Mode WARNING Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so When transmitting while the aircraft is on the ground no personnel or objects should be within 11 feet of the antenna 4 CAUTION In Standby mode the antenna is parked at the center line I
183. and the Volume setting The Active Channel window shows the Channel Name and Number Artist Song Title and Category 1 Turn the large MFD knob to Aux Mode 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page Active Channel Window Tl t te e a gt n Jeuonippy G 295 Available Channel Window Channel Scroll Bar Selected Channel WOLUEE Category Window M Crbegri 1 1111 MAN Volume Bar Graph X RADIO wi di E CHAL CAT GR 0 PRESETS ALERTS Figure 5 22 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Page Name J Soft Keys 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 25 4 T Cavar mem if ai 5 3 3 1 Channel Categories The Category window displays the currently selected category of audio Categories of channels such as Jazz Rock or News can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other contents Foreword g 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group press the CATGRY soft key to activate Category selection 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the desired category When the MFD knob ao is turned to select a category the soft keys will not be shown Ehime June m Hn E TM P ZS TITLE E MI dv Ho Laien Wee OF Pha D imu Pa Adie H It wt IL EISE Y ES Har line Red TB Force Tur MEE d ILE um Mer du Tre Freu HIE 3 ALL TEES unice Heme Sec 6 ie ioe E Sethe et a arl eA a Annu
184. antstinds 5 4 gt 5 5 3 2 Zero Pitch Line secsecessessssessssessssessseesssesssessseesseseasecssveeasenee 5 41 3 5 553 3 Horizon Heading sensinisnininnin Tite ES 5 42 om iE AO ee E O IA us 5 95 59 IMI DEDICUON saecetataracacenratsrocacacosuensucuteiecexeceseaetereiocetie 5 43 z 3 JC ME 5 44 2s of O E eee eters eee teeter 5 44 55 25 Unusual AMMUGES ccc pH PIRE REPOS DEPERE PUES DUE PURE FERE DUE 5 45 2 Annunciations and Alerts eere 6 1 Op E E A A AT E 6 1 SL T A E E E UE 6 14 Jub meMe 1 1 Map Page SVIMMO C EES ml SafeTaxi M Symbols REC RRR 7 228 Traffic Symbols 7 2 e Terrain Obstacle ONS Cm 7 4 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide XV Sec 4 Sec 5 Sec 6 oo LJ 2 o eo Taf Lo BEN e MAG ON c 7 5 LO Map T00 Bar Symbol S aerie n T EIE SER IM xS ID EOD ELO EEE 7 6 T Miscellaneous SUITIDOIS sesccsukcrantei nates tina rkk risa a e 7 7 gor me 8 1 M A 1 E c SD CDS VC tease potestad aeta an RUDI dM A 1 Jeppesen Databases enne A 3 Updating the Jeppesen Database sese A 3 ue Comi Date D dS Boomers cmi ep pd ament ier an ecu a der A 5 Updating Garmin Databases A 7 TE RETO B 1 gt 2 Electronic Document Features Versions of this guide are saved in the Adobe Portable Document Format TOC GARMIN pdf and have features
185. ape in front of the aircraft symbol on the MFD represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD pPJOM JOJ 29 Wass ddd C 298 Field of View Borders Dr Og wv D ONR amp mu 5S 2B x D sainjee4 jeuonippy G 299 Figure 3 23 Navigation Map Field of View on the MFD Sue v 9 unuuv 9 28 y xipueddy Alesso 5 sjoquJ S 9 9S 288 Xepul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 19 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B A ce GARMIN Selected Altitude Range Arc The range to altitude arc may be selected for display on the MFD navigation map to predict where the ownship will be when it reaches the altitude selected on the altitude alerter on the PFD The distance from the ownship to the arc is based on ground speed baro altitude selected altitude and vertical speed The 2 arcis shown when the aircraft is moving toward the selected altitude at a vertical speed of at least 150 feet per minute Foreword System PFD Selected Altitude Range Arc CD U c O gt lt L Features Figure 3 24 Selected Altitude Range Arc amp Alerts Symbols Appendix A Index 3 20 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN iss 3 1 10 2 Weather Feature Options Optional The Weather group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you s to customize the NE
186. arannana EA 4 86 2 80 MP oo E A E EAE EEE 4 87 4825 XM TMUN censier onioni ioi o E foia 4 88 E RAG s E T 4 89 4 9 1 Garmin GWX 68 Radar Description 4 89 4 9 1 1 Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar 4 90 4 9 1 2 Antenna Beam Illumination eeeeeeee 4 91 4 9 1 3 Radar Signal Attenuation eene 4 92 4 9 2 Radar signal RRTBCHUID esses ese tibem eere Rem dits 4 93 25 2 PredptaUON casnateetecetacecseacecacteutsceceseaecncscorscnibeeesceee ateeeiorextt 4 93 4922 Ground ROUUGS xs ecsecesscasseusseccanessaesssestuataestandeausteebeeeseucdeass 4 94 4923 PONG OV ICCC ee na 4 94 4 9 3 Operating DIStaN CBLsecuitamtoa tae trt onte tamtn oe p ta roni ondes 4 95 4 9 4 Basic Antenna Tilt Setup ee iecsceekseasten tussis tete iens Eois 4 96 4 9 5 Weather Mapping and Interpretation s 4 97 4 9 5 1 Weather display Interpretation 4 97 4 9 5 2 Thunderstorms oie e puesasunpa epiac pe seaet n neo De re Sutra us ome Sentus 4 98 A05 WOW OG cu cus tcicorto E E tiere paco Pte tiis Odd 4 100 25 88 E 4 100 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 4 9 6 Radar Operation in Weather Mode 4 9 6 1 Displaying Weather on the Weather Radar Page 4 9 6 2 Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell sessse 4 9 6 3 Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle 4904
187. ate Power down the GDU 620 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Garmin Databases WARNING The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data The following GDU 620 databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin Terrain The terrain database contains terrain mapping data It is updated periodically and has no expiration date Obstacle The obstacles database contains data for obstacles such as towers that pose a potential hazard to aircraft Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database The rotorcraft database includes all reported obstacles regardless of height It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database This database is updated on a 56 day cycle Obstacles will still be shown after the database has expired Several obstacle database options are available Obstacle databases created for GIN software version 5 10 or later include all power lines or only HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed Hazardous Obstacle Transmission HOT Lines are those power lines that are co located with other FAA identified obstacles The installed obstacle database type can be verified on the System
188. ate decisions Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is NOTE Terrain SVT is standard when the Synthetic Vision Technology SVT option is installed The TAWS option will take precedence over Terrain NOTE Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction TFR information Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control NOTE Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the lt aircraft is on the ground Moving the aircraft more than 100 feet away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition NOTE All visual depictions contained within this document including screen images of the GDU 620 bezel and displays are subject to change and may not reflect the most current GDU 620 system Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference JIUP received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE This product its packaging and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth def
189. ation Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation It is also more intense As the radar signal passes through moisture a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna However much of the energy is absorbed If precipitation is very heavy or covers a large area the Signal may not reach completely through the area of precipitation The weather S 2 radar system cannot distinguish between an attenuated signal and area of no precipitation If the signal has been fully attenuated the radar will display a radar shadow This appears as an end to the precipitation when in fact the 5 heavy rain may extend much further A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first preventing it from being displayed on the radar Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell The WATCH feature of the GWX Weather Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas Areas in question will appear as shadowed or gray area on the radar display Proper use of the gt antenna tilt control can also help detect radar shadows Avoidance Annun ary Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the x radome Even the smallest amount of wear and tear pitting and pinholes on the
190. ation PRECIP Data Viewing Range 4 122 4107 PREGIP Legend e eseueEr tUm ni 4 123 4 10 8 GFDS Infrared Satellite IR SAT Data Viewing Range 4 124 26 4 10 9 X Data Link Lightning DL LING Data Viewing Range 4 125 4 10 10 SIGMETs and AIRMETS SIG AIR eee 4 126 ZA mm 25a 6 p cg oe eee 4 128 2 MOTD IEDR teeeves es 4 130 4 10 13 Winds Aloft sse 4 132 4 10 14 GFDS TFRs isset 4 134 3 4 11 FIS B Weather Optional enn 4 136 4 11 1 ANEXRADOSDBOBOIN Sueca stb irr or Feri sep iP ERES 4 136 4 11 2 NEXRAD Limitations RR E 4 136 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide xiii A TOC GARMIN Sec 1 System Foreword Aa NERADI ea a N 4 137 E EE Ds N E RR 4 137 4 11 5 NEXRAD Weather Setup seeennne 4 138 4 11 5 1 Weather Page Map Orientation 4 138 4 11 5 2 NEXRAD Data Viewing Range 4 138 NR RSS MESA PEESO qi RN 4 139 4 11 5 4 NEXRAD SOUREB stecsteiersocedcrssaceaderseseievssaiesduscea senrsesensursere 4 140 4 11 5 5 SIGMETs and AIRMETs SIG AIR eese 4 142 A NAR ME Udo 4 145 Re JAN CM E 4 147 AN Mec UUIBICISDA IGI e dE se RUEFOU SUI IRURE ERE TE URDU 4 149 uu NE MINI c 4 150 ZE 4146 FIS B Product Times 4 151 4 12 biis facien T 4 152 D Additional Features Optional
191. ayed terrain is advisory in nature only Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database However all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate Never use this u information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles 3104 a DJOM gt ie S Ul9 Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies Terrain information should be used as an aid _ to situational awareness Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid terrain d 29S Terrain uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources The displayed information should never be understood as being all inclusive qil aN WARNING The data contained in the TERRAIN databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data gt zZ e T E e rar SoJn e9J euonippy 4 3 3 System Status The Terrain system continually monitors several system critical items such as database validity hardware status and GPS status Should the system detect a failure a failure message will be displayed Suelv 8 unuuy SJoqu s L J Kipecn MESSO y xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 0 C 0S cC I G 29 9 28S A TOC GARMIN 4 4 Terrain Aware
192. based For more information on specific service packages visit 5 http Avww garmin com xm 75534 Activating Sirius XM Satellite Radio Services The service is activated by providing Sirius XM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs depending on the equipment Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID or both must be provided to Sirius XM Satellite Radio to activate the entertainment subscription The Sirius XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions are included with the unit also available at www garmin com P N 190 00355 04 Sirius XM Satellite Radio and XM WX Satellite Weather subscriptions are z sold separately It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 694A Either or both services can be activated _ Sirius XM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation L signal that when received by the GDL 69A allows it to play entertainment Glo programming These IDs are located e On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver On the XM Information Page on the MFD Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located 5 22 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC NOTE The LOCK soft key on the XM Information Page Auxiliary Page Group is used to save GDL 69A activation data when the Sirius XM z Satellite Radio services are initially set up It is not use
193. bers TRIDTUN PHONE UU UOUE ut MER F Zu Sx ADVISORY Press for Press for Press for numbers 1 numbers 5 numbers 9 and 2 3 and4 6 7 and8 0 and symbols and Figure 3 82 Selecting Numeric Groups for Phone Book Number Entry 3 Press the key for the desired number Repeat as necessary and then press ENT when the number is complete 3 Press Keys For Number Entry Figure 3 83 Selecting Individual Numbers for Phone Book Number Entry Selecting a Phone Book Catalog Entry 1 Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon PHONEBOOK Phone Book icon NAME When Highlighted PHONE NUMBER turn small MFD knob to view list Figure 3 84 Selecting the Phone Book Catalog 2 Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book sanon and highlight the desired entry PHOHEBOOK HE PHONE NUMBER Selected Phone Book Catalog Entry Figure 3 85 Selected Phone Book Catalog Entry 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 63 A TOC GARMIN 3 Press the ENT key Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor Deleting a Phone Book Catalog Entry 1 aS 2 ze 3 e rm ANNUI Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog and h
194. ble DENT FACILITY ETT KH UR ADU IHI UR n PRODUCT WwSYPOIZNT INF GRATION MPG RON PRET APT DIR Figure 3 104 Waypoint Weather Information Textual METARs and TAFs 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint 2 Use the small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available information 3 Press the small MFD knob to return to the main Flight Plan page 3 76 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN is 3 3 3 Charts Page Optional When the Chart function is available charts will be shown on the third page of the Flight Plan page group 3 See Section 5 1 for more information E s T E Oa wu D uT rs i no D saunjeo4 PEUONIPpY G 29S s y 8 unuuv 9 298 y xipuaddy leSsO D sioquJ S g 29S 29S Xepu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 77 GARMIN plomalo4 WWa1SAS 299 ddd C 29 dN 99 eDUepIOAV piezeH y 298 This page intentionally left blank SoJhnieaJ euonippy G 29 SOV 9 uhnuuv 9 295 sioquJ S 29 lesso D 8 299 y xipueddy xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 78 ES GARMIN TOC 4 HAZARD AVOIDANCE Ihe G500 600 hazard avoidance features are designed to provide advisory 3 information of potential hazards to
195. by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content per TSO CI151c 4 10 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 4 3 Using TAWS During G500 600 power up the terrain obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer to the pilot At the same time TAWS self test begins One of the following aural messages is generated e TAWS System Test OK e TAWS System Failure TAWS information can be displayed on the MFD in the TAWS page of the MAP page group Terrain and obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet Above Ground Level AGL are contained in the database 4 4 4 Displaying TAWS Data z TAWS uses yellow and red to depict terrain and obstacles alerts relative j to aircraft altitude Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft altitude changes The colors and symbols shown below are used to represent terrain obstacles and potential impact points OM9JO J p d UJ91s g 298 C 298 298 gt zZ T E e rar Threat Location Projected Flight Path 100 ft Threshold SoIN eo jeuonippv G 235 Unlighted Obstacle SHV 8 unuuv 9 IPS Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Figure 4 10 Terrain Altitude Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity y xipuaddy Klesso D sioquJ S 9 9S S X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 1 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance A GAR
196. ce e Roll Deviation Fault e Contact your Garmin dealer for service Ju e Yaw Rate Deviation e Contact your Garmin dealer for Fault service Six e AHRS A429 Attitude Contact your Garmin dealer for 3 lt Time out Fault service e AHRS A429 Attitude Contact your Garmin dealer for Invalid Fault service age e AHRS Pitch Out of Contact your Garmin dealer for Range Fault service e AHRS Attitude Invalid e Contact your Garmin dealer for Fault service e AHRS A429 Heading Contact your Garmin dealer for 5 x Time out Fault service 2 e AHRS A429 Heading Contact your Garmin dealer for Invalid Fault service S e Power Supply Fault e Contact your Garmin dealer for service e AC Reference Lost Contact your Garmin dealer for service x e Application SCI e Contact your Garmin dealer for integrity fault service 38 e Configuration e Contact your Garmin dealer for integrity fault service 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A TOC GARMIN Alert Message Description Action 5 e Calibration integrity e Contact your Garmin dealer for fault service e Unit fault e Contact your Garmin dealer for service GAD 43E e GAD 43e e Contact your Garmin dealer for CONFIG configuration error service Communication halted GATE MODE e Automated testing S IS on GDC CONFIG e GDC contig error e Contact your Garmin dealer for service
197. ch as 150 NM is selected METAR data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 150 NM and lower 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight METAR Data Viewing Range 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 131 A TOC GARMIN 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 10 13 Winds Aloft Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected altitudes Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the surface up to 42 000 feet MSL Pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft keys steps down or up in 3 000 foot increments Selected Altitude Product Age Sec4 5 o 2 No lt Present Position Winds Aloft Symbol Winds Aloft Altitude Soft Keys Figure 4 113 GFDS Weather Winds Aloft WINDS ALOFT Dates T ime D KNOTS 5 ENOTS OR LESS 18 KNOTS OR LESS gt 20 EMITS OR LESS Figure 4 114 GFDS Weather Winds Aloft Legend 4 132 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Winds Aloft Data
198. chanism must be tested prior to each flight in the following manner UJa1s g 99S ddd C 298 o 1 Allow all avionics to complete power up and begin normal operation 7 2 Engage the autopilot while on the ground 3 Press the AP TEST soft key and verify that the autopilot disconnects normally 3 d 4 CAUTION Do not use the autopilot if the AP TEST does not disengage the autopilot normally TI 0 te e 1 ua Jeuonippy G 99S Autopilot Disconnect When the GDU 620 attitude monitors have detected an AHRS malfunction or the inability to actively monitor the AHRS a Check Attitude annunciation will be displayed on the PFD and the autopilot will automatically disconnect s y 8 unuuy 9 298 A NOTE Only appears with the installation of an optional GAD 43 Adapter AJeSSO S sioquJ S g 28S S y xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy Figure 5 30 Check Attitude Autopilot Automatically Disconnected 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 31 A TOC GARMIN Fly the aircraft manually and crosscheck the GDU 620 attitude indication gt with the standby attitude indicator and other sources of attitude information z airspeed heading altitude etc 5 4 2 Heading 5 The GDU 620 heading bug may be used in conjunction with the Heading mode of supported autopilots When the autopilot is in heading mode and the heading bug is adjusted in the normal manner a
199. cho Top Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive 30 NEXRAD and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive P Cloud Top Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive 08 XM Lightning a Cell Movement 7 SIGMETs AIRMETS 008 METAR o w S City Forecast 09 Hazard Avoidance surface Analysis 008 Freezing Levels Winds Aloft County Warnings PIREPS AIREPS Y oo Turbu lence Cyclone Warnings Table 4 23 XM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing NOTE Product age for individual reports of XM AIRMETs SIGMETs City Forecasts County Warnings Cell Movement and TFRs are not provided by XM Weather Service Product age indication for XM Icing Potential and Turbulence is not included on the weather map The valid time for these products is displayed on the weather map in place of the generation time The valid time indication for XM Freezing Level Winds Aloft and Canada Winds Aloft is not displayed Instead the generation time for these is displayed 4 56 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN Description Cloudy High Low Temp Table 4 24 Weather Symbols DJO0M9JOJ UJ91s g 99S ddd C 298 HIA 298 gt zZ o a T EI e a gt SoJnjeo euontppv Ayesso s S OQUUAS SHa V 99 g 09S L S unuuy 9 298 G 29 y xipuaddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 5 GARMIN 4 8 4 XM Weathe
200. cluding the rise in temperature due to air compression and friction at the current airspeed 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 35 A TOC GARMIN Difference from International Standard Atmosphere ISA This is the difference between SAT and standard ISA temperature at the current altitude This provides an indication of how much warmer colder the temperature is from a standard atmosphere 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired Temp Reference value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temp Reference type and press ENT TEHP REFERENCE Figure 3 44 Outside Air Temperature Selection 3 2 1 6 Synchronization Dual Installations Only Dual GDU 620 units when connected in the aircraft may be set up to communicate and share information by Crosshlling or synchronizing information between the two units Crossfill synchronization for CDI and Baro Corrections are selected in the System Setup page of the Aux page group Database Synchronization is managed in the DB Sync function on the System Status page of the Aux page group 1 While viewing the first page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob and turn the large MFD knob to highlight CDI BARO or Databases in the Synchronization box in both units SYNCHRONIZATION CDI BARO DATABASES Fig
201. conflict with o datobast of the smn glo preset en onether LAL DATABASE CYCLEWER REGION IS See other LAUs for enc stokes SYSTEM STATUS EWIE DB SYNC EET ALERTS Figure 3 60 Database Conflicts 3 48 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 2 Select YES to continue and push the database to all other LRUS pe you sure vou wish to resolve conflicts by attempting ta push the listed databases to all other LAUs Ensure all LAUs are online before proceeding Databeses my be overwritten i i Figure 3 61 Confirm Database Sync 3 Once syncd the desired database will be SYNC to the other LRUs and Initiating will be displayed on the Sync Conflicts window DATAGASC SYME DATABASE CYCLE VER ME STATUS TNC CONFLICTS The Fallawing active dotoboses conflict with o database of the son cycle prest an oncther LRL DATABASE CYCLE VER REGION Initiating SYSTEM STATUS EAT DB SYNC NET Figure 3 62 Database Conflicts Resolved Initiating 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 49 A TOC GARMIN 3 2 5 ADS B FIS B Status optional When the optional GDL88 is installed the ADS B FIS B Status page will 5 show the status of satellite communications FIS B weather products and the traffic applications OPS LAST UPL Iie FIS B WEATHER FIS B LEGEND Paalting Dota TRAFFIC APPLICATION STATUS AIRBORNE AIRE SURFACE SURF rere
202. ction NOTE GPSS commands are not sent to the autopilot when a VLOC source is displayed on the HSI 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 33 4 VIn rl 7l g Xipuedawv c ES 5 lt Annun A nnar diy R Appendix D A TOC GARMIN 5 4 4 2 Autopilot Operation with the GDU 620 Emulating GPSS In order to provide GPSS functionality for autopilots that do not have built in GPSS support the GDU 620 can convert the GPSS commands into a heading signal When GPSS mode is turned on the autopilot heading mode will follow the GPSS commands instead of the heading bug Reter to the Airplane Flight o 3 Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilot heading mode Depending on the installation GPSS mode may be toggled on off with an external switch or by pressing and holding the HDG key on the PFD If the installation uses the HDG key on the PFD the PFD knob window will display the GPSS HDG mode options HOLD FOR GPSS MFD E GPSS OFF GPSS ON Figure 5 34 GPSS mode control with the HDG key When GPSS mode is on the heading bug on the HSI changes to a hollow outline and a crossed out heading bug appears in the PFD Knob Mode Indicator indicating that the autopilot is not coupled to the heading bug The bug is still 4 controllable and may still be used by the pilot for reference GPSS is annunciated in the lower left portion of the PFD The GPSS mode a
203. current limits without adjusting the map scale and to examine information at the pointer location When you select the panning function by pressing the small MFD knob a target pointer flashes on the map display A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude longitude position of the pointer the ETE from your present position to the pointer elevation at the pointer and bearing and distance to the pointer from your present position Information is related to the tip of the pointer P T w Fes Fs Map Pointer Present Position m ma E l s Figure 3 6 Navigation Map Pointer Location Information 1 While viewing a Map press the small MFD knob A flashing pointer will appear in the tip of the ownship symbol The measured information is referenced to the tip of the arrow Figure 3 7 Navigation Map Initial Pointer Location 2 Turn the large MFD knob to move the cursor horizontally Turn the small MFD knob to move the cursor vertically 3 Press the small MFD knob again to cancel panning The display will return to the previous map view 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 7 UJa1s g pJOM9JO ddd C 298 T lt I Og wv D m S s um VS no D SaJnieoJ euonippy Say unuuy y xipuaddy AJeSSO S sioquJ S 9 29 Xopu g xipueddy 298 998 8 295 G 298 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun A TOC GARMIN 3 1
204. d Data Bus HSDB Ethernet connection The GDL 694 is also interfaced to an audio panel for distribution of the audio signal A subscription to the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is required to enable the GDL 69 69A capability Subscription information is available at http www garmin com xny Figure 1 11 GDL 69 69A XM Satellite Radio Data Link Receiver 1 1 2 6 GAD 43 43e Optional Ihe GAD 43 is an adapter that converts AHRS digital pitch roll heading and yaw rate data into analog signals used by autopilot systems The GAD 43 is installed remotely between the AHRS and an existing autopilot The analog signals trom the GAD 43 mimic those of spinning mass gyros that provide data to the autopilot and allow the gyro to be replaced by the AHRS and GAD 43 combination The GAD 43e performs the same functions as the GAD 43 but adds support for additional interfaces to various aircraft systems The GAD 43e supports interfaces to various autopilots for altitude preselect and vertical speed control analog NAV radios DME analog radar altimeters marker beacons and ADF receivers 1 10 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H Cover m O D O o A GARMIN ddd C 29 Figure 1 12 GAD 43 43e AHRS Adapter 1 1 2 7 GTX 330 330D Optional S5 NOW TN Y WANN T Figure 1 13 GTX 330 330D Mode S Transponder s 3 The GTX 330 330D is a solid state transponder that provides Modes A C B and S functions
205. d during normal Sirius XM Satellite Radio operation but there should be no adverse effects gt if inadvertently selected during flight Refer to the GDL 69 69A Sirius XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190 00355 04 Rev G or later for further information Cn Cn Zg m O 3 WN MD C NO If XM WX Satellite weather services have not been activated the weather product names will be displayed in gray see below on the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page Map Page Group The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription e2UPepIOAV Caw pJezeH c 29g Y 29S Jeuonippy G 99S TI t te e a 72 Alesso s sioqu S SHa V 8 9 28g 29S unuuy 9 29S y xipuaddy X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 23 A 10c GARMIN 5 3 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Information The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the Sirius 5 XM Satellite radios service class and products when the GDL 69 69A is installed and the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is activated The Data and Audio radios have separate Identification Numbers The Service Class determines the features that are available Products that are not part of the subscription are displayed in gray Products that are part of the active subscription but are waiting to
206. d over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for roll and not pitch An ATTITUDE MISCOMP annunciation is displayed over the pitch ladder if a miscompare condition exists for both pitch and roll ir IV N id 29C O Klesso s gt O O y XIpu xIpu ddy xapu 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 31 Cn MD Cover A GARMIN Pitch and Roll Miscompare C Sana Foreword P5280 MIS S48 Altitude Dir Miscompare Airspeed Miscompare System U D WY Pitch Miscompare Roll Miscompare PE Figure 2 44 Miscompare Annunciations di 2 9 Radar Altimeter Su When an optional Radar Altimeter is installed the altitude received from the PE 2 radar altitude will be displayed on the PFD er NOTE See the Radar Altimeter documentation for details on the radar altimeter performance and limitations Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary SO 3 Uo Cb Q S e D ER Co E D C O C en Radar Altimeter Value Figure 2 45 Radar Altimeter Display 150 foot RA Altitude Appendix A When the radar altitude is 0 the brown band will be level with the altitude tape pointer As the radar altitude increases above 0 the brown band will move down the tape in an amount equal to the current radar altitude Appendix B Index 2 32 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Barometric
207. d shadowed areas behind targets Figure 4 75 The Blind Alley Horizontal Scan 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 09 A TOC GARMIN 4 9 5 3 Tornadoes There is no conclusive radar target return characteristics which will identify a tornado however tornadoes may be present if the following characteristics are observed A narrow finger like portion as shown on the previous page extends and y inashort time curls into a hook and closes on itself A hook which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 especially if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant northeast quadrant in y amp the southern hemisphere of a major thunderstorm V shaped notches Doughnut shapes amp These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes nor are tornado returns limited to these characteristics Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a normal thunderstorm display 4 9 5 4 X Hail _ Hail results from updralts carrying water high enough to freeze Therefore E the higher the top of a thunderstorm the greater the probability that it contains lt hail Vertically scanning the target return can give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by radar It is not the actual top or true top of the storm The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes in clear air
208. d with the View Arc or View 360 selection highlighted press ENT Sec 8 Glossary W SNA Appendix A 2 Appendix B Index 4 6 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H TERRAIN PROAIMETY air EH ALERTS Figure 4 6 Terrain Page with 120 Arc 4 3 1 4 Terrain Proximity Page Aviation Data gt z T E e rar pJezey 7 29 The Page Menu selections allow you to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain page 1 While viewing the Terrain page of the MAP page group press MENU for Map s selections to hide or show aviation data overlay on the Terrain page hts momo Praca fhe APO kwh fio rebum ta Br pope Presa ihe HO kah to rehen in bow Bir Figure 4 7 Show Hide Aviation Data on the Terrain Page 2 Press ENT to save the highlighted value 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 Kee Sec 1 PFD System Foreword Sec 2 Sec 3 MFD TERRAIN PROXIMITY VIEH a YW S lt Bu N 5 cd VER Yn O D Oir lt Rud C se 2 55 V c a L o Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary mom H 1 DCLTR Appendix A Figure 4 9 Navigation Map Page with Terrain Data Displayed Appendix B Index 4 8 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 3 2 Terrain Proximity Limitations Terrain Proximity displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft The displ
209. dar or NEXRAD NEXt generation RADar is a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved the detection of meteorological events such as thunderstorms tornadoes and hurricanes An extensive network _ of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental y United States Alaska and Hawaii The unobstructed range of each NEXRAD is 124 nautical miles The GDL 88 receives the FIS B information and sends it to the GDU 620 Ze o NOTE The GDL 88 will send all FIS B weather and NOTAM TFR information that it receives There may be more information available than is received by the GDL 88 This can lead to the GDL88 and subsequently the GDU620 displaying the status of the FIS B data as received and current even zz though some of the data for the region is missing 4 11 1 NEXRAD Abnormalities There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images Some but not all causes of abnormal displayed information include Ground Clutter e Strobes and spurious radar data e Sun strobes when the radar antenna points directly at the sun Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can cause alterations in radar scans og Interference from buildings or mountains which may cause shadows e Scheduled maintenance may put a radar off line 4 11 2 NEXRAD Limitations 2 Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays Some but not all are listed for the users awareness The Reg
210. de System Setup Page Menu 2 Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the desired selection and then CL c press ENT 2 9224 1 Display Brightness E lt Display brightness mode may be set to manual or automatic The automatic mode will set the display brightness based on the ambient light The manual _ mode allows the setting of display brightness between 0 and 100 3 E 1 Turn the large MFD knob to reach the AUX page group Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor 2 The Level will be highlighted Turn the small MFD knob to select the Display AS Brightness Level and then press ENT DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS LEVEL MODE E Figure 3 39 Aux Mode Display Brightness Level Selection 3 If the Level was changed Manual will be selected Press the cursor to save the settings If you press ENT the Mode setting will be highlighted 3 32 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 With the Mode value highlighted turn the small MFD knob to select Auto or Manual and then press ENT DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS S LEVEL MODE Sg Figure 3 40 Aux Mode Display Brightness Mode Selection 3 2 1 2 Airspeed Reference Marks The Best Glide or REF Vr Vx or V1 and Vy or V2 airspeed reference marks for the PFD are adjusted with this function A marker will appear on the PFD Airspeed tape at the selected speed when the value is set to On Default _ reference airspeeds ar
211. de alerting 2 14 Altitude Bug 1 16 2 1 2 13 Altitude capture 5 32 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide Cover Altitude Display Mode 4 32 4 33 Altitude minimums 3 69 5 15 Altitude select 1 16 Altitude trend vector 2 13 Angle of incidence 4 94 Annunciations 1 12 2 14 2 15 2 30 4 10 4 16 4 17 4 24 4 29 4 35 4 36 4 44 4 46 5 6 6 1 Answering a phone call 3 66 Antenna 4 136 Antenna stabilization 4 108 Antenna tilt 4 91 4 92 4 96 4 104 4 108 4 112 Approaches 2 24 2 25 4 20 5 3 5 4 5 9 5 13 5 43 8 1 Apt Dir 3 75 AP Test 2 3 APTSIGNS 2 5 Arc 4 6 4 8 4 13 4 27 Arrivals 5 3 5 4 Attitude 1 1 1 5 1 6 1 12 2 9 2 11 5 31 6 7 8 1 Attitude and Heading Reference System AHRS 1 5 1 6 1 12 6 2 Attitude Indicator 2 9 2 10 Aural message 4 11 4 15 4 16 4 18 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 30 Automatic flight following 3 58 Autopilot 1 1 2 3 5 31 Autopilot disconnect 5 31 Auto slewing 2 25 Auto zoom 3 11 3 12 Aux mode 3 31 AUX System Status Page 5 21 Aviation map data 3 25 Backcourse 2 24 2 25 Backlighting 1 22 Baro corrected altitude 4 4 Barometric minimum 2 15 Barometric pressure 1 18 1 22 2 15 3 40 Basemap symbols 7 5 TOC B 1 92JUBDIOAV TI D CD ct cc D un 235 C 298 G 299 9 588 Cover Beacon 1 7 2 Bearing information 2 27 2 28 Bearing line 2 28 4 104 4 107 4 108 Bearing Pointers 2 23
212. de for traffic to be displayed 1 While viewing the Traffic Page of the MAP page group select the OPERATE soft key to select Operating Mode 2 To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page select the STANDBY soft key Operate Standby soft keys may not be displayed An alert will be generated when Standby is selected and the aircraft is in the air 4 32 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 7 1 3 Range Ring Pressing the RNG keys will zoom in and out in preset steps depending on the installed equipment 4 7 1 4 Altitude Display Changing the altitude display mode 1 Press the ALT MODE soft key to change the altitude filter 2 Select the desired altitude filter by pressing the BELOW NORMAL ABOVE or UNRSTD unrestricted soft keys The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode field UJ91s g 99S ddd C 298 Altitude Mode Displayed Traffic Range 9900 feet to 2700 feet 3IN 295 2700 feet to 2700 feet 2700 feet to 9900 feet All Traffic Shown 9900 to 9900 feet Table 4 11 Displayed Traffic Range gt z O e T E e a gt piezep Y 29 S9Jn 89J jeuonippv G 235 NOTE Traffic Advisories TAs are always displayed regardless of altitude mode y xipuaddy Alesso s S OGWIAS sue v 3 9 29g 988 unuuv 9 29S X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 33 Sec 4 Sec 5 C6 Sec Annun A E GARMIN 4 7 1 5
213. ds if the current acceleration is maintained The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer 9pu g xipuaddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 5 ddd C 92S G 29 9 29 A TOC GARMIN The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical pink magenta line extending up or down on the airspeed scale shown to the right of the color coded speed range strip The end of the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed in six seconds if the current acceleration is maintained If the trend vector crosses into the overspeed range the text of the digital airspeed readout changes to yellow The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure Foreword Sec 1 System Ground Speed Caution Range yellow Airspeed Trend Indicator pink magenta line Glide Speed Reference Marker Vr Reference Marker Vx Reference Marker Mm D A Landing Gear Extension Speed Vy Reference Marker Normal Operating Range Green Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Flaps Operating Range White True Airspeed Airspeed Units Sec 5 Additional Features Figure 2 7 Airspeed Tape Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Overspeed Range Barber Pole Overspeed Indication for Current Airspeed Sec 7 Symbols Caution Operating Range Sec 8 Glossary Figure 2 8 Overspeed Indication Appendix A Appendix B Index 2 6 Garmin G500
214. e GDU 620 PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti reflective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils waxes and abrasive cleaners CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI REFLECTIVE COATING It is very important to clean the lens using a clean lint free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti reflective coatings CAUTION FIS B information is to be used for pilot planning decisions and pilot near term decisions focused on avoiding areas of inclement weather that are beyond visual range or where poor visibility precludes visual acquisition of inclement weather FIS B weather and NAS status information may be used as follows To promote pilot awareness of own ship location with respect to reported weather including hazardous meteorological conditions NAS status indicators and enhance pilot planning decisions and pilot near term decision making To cue the pilot to communicate with the Air Traffic Control controller Flight Service Station specialist operator dispatch or airline operations control center for general and mission critical meteorological information NAS status conditions or both FIS B information including weather information NOTAMs and TFR areas are intended for the sole purpose of assisting in long and near term planning decision making The system lacks sufficient resolution and updating capability necessary for aerial maneuvering associated with immedi
215. e Marker E V1 Reference Marker Vr Reference Marker Figure 2 12 Alternate Reference Speeds E S lt E 2 8 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN B 2 3 Attitude Indicator Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line The Attitude Indicator displays pitch roll and slip skid information Roll Pointer Roll Scale 7 3 Aircraft Symbol Horizon Line n YY 20 20 w 5 Land Representation G O 6 Pitch Scale E 7 Slip Skid Indicator NA EE Sky Representation 5 C Roll Scale Zero Figure 2 13 Attitude Indicator 10 The horizon line is part of the pitch scale Above and below the horizon line major pitch marks and numeric labels are shown for every 10 up to 80 Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5 increments up to 25 below and 45 above the horizon line Between 20 below to 20 above the horizon line minor pitch marks occur every 2 5 Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale Major tick marks are 30 and 60 and minor tick marks are 10 20 and 45 are shown to the left and right of the zero The Slip Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer The indicator moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration Slip skid is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the p
216. e Time Date Time Time Format and Time Offset MFD Display Units Distance Speed and Altitude Vertical Speed e System Display Units Navigation Angle Reference Pressure Units and _ Temperature Units S ER Data Link FIS XM GFDS DISPLAY GRIGHTHESS DATE TIME LEVEL DATE RODE TIHE TIRE FORHAT AIRSPEEDS PFD i GLIDE TIHE OFFSET HFO DISPLAY UNITS DIS SPD ALT VS PFO OPTIONS SYSTEM DISPLAY UNITS WIND VECTOR NAV ANGLE PRESS TEHP REFERENCE TEMP STAHCHAVHNIZAT ICH DATA LINE EDI WX TFR SOURCE BAAD DATABASES SYSTEM SETUP DFLT UNIT RA TEST DFLT SPO Figure 3 37 Aux Mode System Setup Page 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 31 Sec 4 Avoidance MFD A a GARMIN The default values set by the installer during installation are restored by using o the Page Menu options or soft keys The Restore Unit Defaults menu selection and the DFLT UNIT soft key restores the default MFD Display and System Display Units settings The Restore Airspeed Defaults menu selection or DFLT SPD soft key restores the default PFD Airspeeds settings E 4 The RA TEST sott key activates the Radar Altimeter test mode See the Radio Altimeter section in Section 2 for details a A NOTE Not all Radar Altimeters have the TEST function 1 While viewing the Aux mode System Setup page press the MENU key Pane HEB Press tha MFO mab to rebara 25 boo cox Figure 3 38 Aux Mo
217. e present if the system is configured for a second GPS or VOR LOC DME The DME NAV soft keys select the DME submenu For some installations the DME NAV soit keys simply toggle the DME display on off as the submenu options will not exist The availability of the DME controls vary based on the installation The DME NAV soit keys select NAV 1 or 2 as the DME tuning source If this soft key is pressed again when already selected the DME display is removed from the PFD Not all installations will have both NAVI and NAV2 soft keys DME Information DME Hold Annunciation Foreword Sec 1 System N vA o n Sec 3 MFD Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Selected DME Set Hold for Selected DME Figure 2 5 DME Soft Keys DME HOLD DME HOLD activates deactivates the DME tuning hold function DME HOLD may be selected for either DME NAV 1 or DME NAV 2 The Hold function is automatically canceled when switching between NAV1 and NAV2 tuning sources Not all installations will have the DME HOLD soft key SYN VIS The SYN VIS soit key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed It enables Synthetic Vision and displays the associated soft keys Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Appendix B Index 2 4 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H ES GARMIN BEEN SYN TERR The SYN TERR soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Techno
218. e set during installation When power is cycled the values you set will be reset to the default values 3 NOTE When power is cycled the Airspeed Reference values are reset During preflight the Airspeed Reference values should be checked and set appropriately for the current aircraft configuration and performance AIRSPEEDS PFD Figure 3 41 Airspeed References shown on PFD when activated 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 33 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 OAD E A Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B A Ee GARMIN 3 2 1 3 PFD Options Wind Vector When selected wind vector information is displayed on the PFD to the left of the HSI Four styles are available Foreword 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired Wind Vector value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT System PFD PFD OPTIONS WIND VECTOR SYNCHRONIZATI Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Style 4 Features amp Alerts Figure 3 42 Wind Vector Style 3 When a Wind Vector style is selected a Wind Vector box with the chosen style will be displayed to the lett of the HSI on the PFD When OFF is selected the Wind Vector box will not be displayed Appendix A Index 3 34 Garmin G500 600 Pilot
219. ec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Appendix B Index 3 14 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Topo Data The Topo Data option selects whether the colored topographical features are displayed Traffic Land Data Terrain and Obstacles will still be displayed even with Topo Data turned off Topo Data Off Topo Data On Figure 3 17 Navigation Map Topo Data Topo Scale The Topo Scale option selects whether the elevation scale for topographical features on the Navigation Map is displayed The scale will be located on the right side of the display Minimum Maximum ELEV FT Range of Topography Displayed on the Map Sky Indication Range of Topograph De Mara ap Current Aircraft Altitude Current Ground Level Indication Figure 3 18 Navigation Map Topo Scale 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 15 pJOM9JO 298 UJa1s g ddd C 298 a T OD Q N CD Ww no D Alesso o sioqui S sue v 9 saJn1eaJ 8 29 L 29S unuuy euonippy y xipueddy X PU g xipueddy 7 29S G 29S 9 29 A TOC GARMIN Terrain Data The Terrain Data option selects whether Terrain Data is shown on the z Navigation Map The Terrain Data Icon Ba will be shown when Terrain has been selected Terrain Data Off Terrain Data On Terrain Data Terrain Data Icon THIET 03 FF I T R
220. ected Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for gas five seconds and an aural tone may be generated if configured e After reaching the Selected Altitude if the pilot flies outside the deviation band beyond 200 feet of the Selected Altitude the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background flashes for five seconds and an aural tone is generated Within 1000 ft Within 200 ft Deviation of 200 ft atures Fe nnun 400 K 4000 Figure 2 22 Altitude T Visual Annunciations E NOTE The aural tone when approaching the selected altitude may be configured at installation for either 200 feet or 1000 feet The tone when deviating from the selected altitude always occurs at 200 feet 2 14 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 2 4 3 Changing Barometric Setting The Barometric Setting affects the altitude values shown on the PFD Barometric pressure units may be displayed as either inches in or hectopascals hpa See System Display Units in Section 3 for more detail 1 Press the BARO key to activate Baro mode 2 Turn the PFD knob to increase or decrease the altimeter setting OR PFD Knob Selected Baro Setting shown Baro Setting in Altimeter window Figure 2 23 Barometric Setting 3 Press the PFD knob while in Baro mode to toggle between Standard Pressure x 29 92 in and the currently selected barometric setting
221. ects or reproductive harm This notice is being provided in accordance with California s Proposition 65 If you have any questions or would like eo additional information please refer to our web site at www garmin com prop65 SVT NOTE Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for o ground maneuvering SafeTaxi and Chartview functions have not been qualified to be used as an airport moving map display AMMD SafeTaxi and Chartview are intended to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations should only be used by the flight crew to T orient themselves on the airport surface 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide V 28S LT unul Foreword A TOC GARMIN Record of Revisions Part Number Revision Date Description o R 7 8 08 Update information E C 4 15 09 Revision reflects functionality added with SW version 3 0 Added SVT v TAWS B Terrain Proximity Wind Vectors M Minimums Bug GAD 43 and Weather Radar 8 USNO upsesfo W Versions 00 nd 00 o NONON updates forsWVerion 11 y AOPA Airport Directory 5 S AOPA MEMBERSHIP PUBLICATIONS INC AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY AOPA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AOPA INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS DATA EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND 3 FITNESS
222. ed Annunciation PFD amp MFD 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the Terrain SVT Page 2 Press the INHIBIT soft key to inhibit or enable Terrain SVT choice dependent on current state OR Press the MENU key Use the large or small MFD knob to highlight Inhibit Terrain or Enable Terrain choice dependent on current state and press the ENT key Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A RO ee Appendix B Index 4 28 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 6 4 Synthetic Vision Alerts and Annunciations Terrain SVT alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level or both When an alert is issued visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued DJ0M9JOJ When an alert is issued annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD Terrain SVT page only The TAWS Terrain Alert Annunciation is shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD If the Terrain SVT page is not displayed at the time a pop up alert appears on the MFD To acknowledge the pop up alert ISAS 299 ddd C 298 Press the CLR key returns to the currently viewed page OR Press the ENT key accesses the Terrain SVT Page HIA 298 pJezey 7 29 gt z T E e rar SoJnjeo euontppy G 29 Ge n SUV 8 unuuv 9 298 u LEE PS sioquJ g 29 LI Klesso D
223. ed Track Mode Active SVT Is Turned Off When Heading Fails S OQWAS L 98 Figure 1 7 Track Mode shown as Active when Heading Info has failed AJeSSO 5 8 299 Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information Invalid or unavailable airspeed data in addition to complete GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information y xipuaddy A NOTE Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the aircraft stationary and with all AHRS inputs valid 3 D GPS position magnetometer and air data During initial power up on the ground no GPS position and or magnetic anomalies are common If the aircraft is taxied prior to AHRS alignment alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3 D GPS position is available X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 7 Sec 5 Sec 4 Additional Sec 6 A a GARMIN NOTE During in flight alignment of the AHRS minimize aircraft maneuvering The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles less than 20 degrees of roll or 5 degrees of pitch AHRS alignment may not be possible during more aggressive maneuvers 1 1 1 4 GMU 44 The GMU 44 magnetometer senses the earths magnetic field Data is sent to the GRS 77 AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with the GRS 77 using a RS 485 digital
224. ed on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time Weather products are refreshed at g specific intervals defined in the Refresh Rate column O O WwW O LL Sec stel Sec 2 PFD If a weather product is not received within the 30 60 90 or 120 minute Expiration Time intervals the data is considered expired and is removed from the display This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by XM WX Satellite Radio services If more than half _ of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow 5 v 2 No lt Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Appendix B Index 4 5 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN is 4 8 2 Customizing the XM WX Satellite Weather Map Each Wx Data Link Map page may be customized individually The Wx Data Link Map pages are customized by selecting options from the Page Menu The Page Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying the Weather Legends The Weather Setup choice covers selections for adjusting the viewing ranges of the weather products OM 104 Ula1s S 298 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weath
225. elect AUTO or MANUAL and then press ENT 1 22 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 2 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY PFD Functions on the PFD are accessed by using the bezel keys on the side of the PFD and the soft keys below the PFD Horizon Slip Skid Roll Scale Roll Line Indicator Zero Pointer pPJOM 104 2S N lt NN er D 3 GAR Nav Status Bar Altitude Tape Air Speed Tape PFD Knob Mode Indicator Current Wind Vectors Barometric Pressure Setting o Heading Bug Select Vertical Course Select Speed Tape Altitude Bug Select S a Horizontal S E Vertical Speed Bug Select Situation s Barometric Setting Select Indicator Air Temperature E PED Knob SD Card Slots Clock Soft Keys Soft Key Labels Figure 2 1 PFD Description Ground Pointer Mode a gu FPL Desired Track 35 eg Wot Distance from Your Current Nav Present Position to Source Current FPL Leg Wpt Current Track S OQWAS L 2S WPT DIS DTK TRK Nav Status Style 1 Top of Display m Nav Status Style 2 Left of HSI leSsO D 8 299 Figure 2 2 PFD Nav Status Bar Description A NOTE When navigating to a waypoint very far away the DTK CRS and TRK values displayed on the GDU 620 may differ from those displayed on the navigator however the CDI is correct and is the primary means of navigation This is because the GDU 620 applies magnetic variation corrections for the current aircraft locat
226. elected INT NDBs will be shown at map ranges of 15 NM and lower e rm VOR Viewing Range _ The VOR viewing range option selects whether VOR information is shown f on the Navigation Map VOR information will be shown at and below the T T map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown Wier 150 NM is selected VOR information will be shown at map ranges of 150 NM and lower a9 Class B TMA Airspace Viewing Range The Class B TMA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class B TMA airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map Class B TMA airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected Class B TMA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower Class C TCA Airspace Viewing Range The Class C TCA airspace viewing range option selects whether Class C TCA airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map Class C TCA airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected Class C TCA airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower A A Annandiv Appendix A 3 26 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Class D Airspace Viewing Range The Class D airspace viewing range option s
227. elects whether Class D airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map Class D airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected Class D airspace n information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower 3 Restricted Airspace Viewing Range The Restricted airspace viewing range option selects whether the map range is shown on the Navigation Map Restricted airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the information will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected Restricted airspace information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower MOA Military Viewing Range The MOA Military viewing range option selects whether MOA Military S a information is shown on the Navigation Map MOA airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the _ information will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected MOA airspace 2 s information will be shown at map ranges of 100 NM and lower 38 Other ADIZ Airspace Viewing Range The Other ADIZ airspace viewing range option selects whether Other ADIZ airspace information is shown on the Navigation Map Other ADIZ airspace information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is _ selected the information will not be shown Where 100 NM is selected
228. emain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in see and avoid Some of the more common examples of these errors follow Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Sec 7 Symbols e When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly the tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes Sec 8 Glossary e When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft course at a shallow angle either overtaking or head on and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0 25 NM TIS may display the intruder on the opposite side of the client than it actually is Appendix A Index These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few radar scans once the course has stabilized Appendix B 4 4 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 7 2 4 TIS Alerts When the number of Traffic Advisories TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next the following occur DJO0M9JOJ A single Traffic voice alert is generated A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD flashing for 5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area UJ91s g To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft the Traffic voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs
229. er Product Expiration Time Minutes Table 4 27 FIS B Weather Data Timing 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 151 Sec 4 5 o g N S lt A TOC GARMIN 4 12 Stormscope NOTE Refer to the WX 500 Pilot s Guide for a detailed description of the WX 500 StormScope The WX 500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft StormScope measures relative bearing and distance of thunderstorm related electrical activity and reports the information to the display Interfaces are currently only available for the WX 500 StormScope System For lightning display interpretation study the examples in the WX 500 Pilots Guide that are designed to help you relate the cell or strike patterns shown on the display to the size and location of thunderstorms that may be near your aircraft STORMSCOPE HODE VIEH CLEAR Figure 4 124 Stormscope 4 152 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Symbol Time Since Strike Seconds Less than 60 Less than 120 0H Less than 180 Table 4 28 Stormscope Symbols Mode j The Mode selection allows you to select the display of storm cells or strikes AAN W JS S C 298 IN Jac A NOTE Cell mode uses a clustering program to identify clusters of electrical 3 activity that indicate cells
230. er Setup option Press ENT ddd C 298 Q3IN 295 Press the HD ket is return 1a bose nx Figure 4 35 Weather Page Menu Options 2 Turn the Large or Small MFD knob to select Weather Setup 1 2 or Weather Setup 2 2 and press ENT gt z T EI e rar pJezey 7 29 WEATHER SETUP sounjes jeuonipp G 235 ase Figure 4 36 Weather Setup Group Selection 3 With the Data Link Setup Menu displayed turn the Large MFD knob to highlight the desired item and then turn the small MFD knob to select the desired weather feature value Where a value such as 100 NM is selected weather data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 100 NM and lower Helv 8 uhuuv 9 IPS sioquJ S L 298 Alesso 5 8 299 4 Press ENT to save a selection 5 Turn the large MFD knob to the next desired option or press the small MFD knob to cancel and return to the XM WX Satellite Weather Data Link Map Page y xipueddy Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 53 A bu GARMIN WX Page Menu Weather Setup Menuttem Adjustment 0 E Off 10 NM to 500 NM Table 4 22 Weather Page Menu Setup Options Foreword Sec 4 5 te No om lt 4 54 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN in 4 8 3 XM WX Weather Symbols and Product Age The weather product symbols the expiration time and the broadcast rate are shown in the following
231. er to ADAS documentation for E data capture appropriate action ADAS engine trend E monitor is recording a2 trend data ETM EXCEED Engine Trend Monitor e Refer to ADAS documentation for exceedence advisory appropriate action ADAS engine trend monitor is reporting an exceedence or advisory condition ETM FAULT Engine Trend Monitor e Refer to ADAS documentation for woes needs service appropriate action 2 ADAS engine trend monitor is reporting a system fault Features FAN 1 2 FAIL e Cooling fan 1 2 has Contact your Garmin dealer for failed service Unit may operate at extreme temperatures zo Ce vy v wae XL c5 Extended operation at high temperatures is not recommended as damage to the GDU may occur PFD MFD coloration may be incorrect Sec Curl n Syn Ibols Sec 8 3l alanccary G lo Sod V J Appendix A Backlight may dim to reduce power and heat E e GAD 43 e Contact your Garmin dealer for communication lost service 6 6 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H Appendix B Index A GARMIN Alert Message Description Action e Gyro Emulation Type e Contact your Garmin dealer for Mismatch Fault service e Yaw Rate Scale e Contact your Garmin dealer for Factor Mismatch service Zw Fault 3 gt e GDU AHRS Monitor Contact your Garmin dealer for Fault service ae e Pitch Deviation Fault e Contact your Garmin dealer for servi
232. ere weather not for penetrating severe weather The decision to fly into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity spacing between the targets aircraft capabilities and pilot experience Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation not clouds or turbulence The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly between them Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence a YU S r Features Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection It also has the ability to detect and provide distance to objects on the ground such as cities mountains coastlines rivers lakes and oceans Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Index 4 90 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 9 1 2 Antenna Beam Illumination It is important to understand the concept of the antenna beam illumination The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight The farther the beam travels the wider it gets The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam plomalo4 28S UJ91s g ddd C 298 HIA 298 Figure 4 67 Radar Beam from 12 inch Antenna The vertical dimensions of the radar beam are shown in the figure above and the same holds true for the horizontal dimensions In other words the beam will be as wide as it is tall Note that it is possible not to see a
233. ertical Deviation Indicator ILS Source 5 The vertical deviation is similar to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance LNAV V L VNAV LPV LP V When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation source the Vertical Deviation Indicator appears as a magenta diamond If the approach type downgrades to LNAV past the final approach fix FAF or the approach only supports LNAV service NO GP is annunciated amp Alerts 3 Vertical Deviation Source El Vertical Deviation Indicator E E 3 Figure 2 34 Vertical Deviation Indicator GPS Source 2 24 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 2 7 4 Auto Slewing The G500 600 system is designed to interface with GPS navigator units and also manage up to four different CDI course pointers GPS1 NAVI GPS2 NAV2 independently The G500 600 will automatically slew the NAV course pointer to the correct final approach course when a ILS LOC LOC BC LDA o or SDF approach is active in the GPS navigator and the appropriate frequency is in the active window in the navigator The G500 600 will Auto Slew the HSI course pointer for an ILS LOC LOC BC LDA or SDF approach when the steps TE ddd C 92S below are completed in the following order 1 The desired approach is selected and activated in the navigator this can be veritied by the approach waypoints appearing on
234. es are displayed Topo features traffic terrain and obstacles will still be displayed even with Land Data turned off DJOM9JOJ Track Vector Length When turned on the Track Vector Length option will show a dashed line and arrow extending from the aircraft icon illustrating the current Track and the distance the aircraft will travel in the selected time UJa1s g 2 T oec Ow Track Vector Aircraft Present Position 1 I Figure 3 14 Navigation Map Track Vector S Wind Vector 8 The Wind Vector option when turned on will show a box in the top right corner of the MFD indicating the wind direction and speed Wind Direction Wind Speed Qo gt Figure 3 15 Navigation Map Wind Vector Display Nav Range Ring When turned on the Nav Range Ring option will show a ring with a compass 3 rose oriented to magnetic north around your present position on the Map page When selected ON the Enhanced Range Ring function provides a second ring at 1 2 the distance of the primary ring to allow the pilot to acccurately judge gt distance to objects depicted on the map 2 S gt 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 13 29S UNUUY Jeuonippy piezeH 9 29S L 998 8 295 g xipueddy 7 29 G 29 A 10C GARMIN n Range Ring Radius z E Enhanced Range Ring KS Range Ring with Compass Rose Yo Figure 3 16 Navigation Map Range Ring 2c ro qp WOO cde nidis en lt S
235. ess the Down Rng Arrow key to decrease the zoom level down to a minimum of 1x 3 Pressing the FULL soft key toggles between a half and full page view ze 3 2 6 3 Panning While viewing the External Video function press the small MFD knob to activate panning 2 Turn the small MFD knob clockwise to pan up the map will move down 3 Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise to pan down the map will move o8 Up A E 4 Turn the large MFD knob clockwise to pan to the right the map will move left S 5 Turn the large MFD knob counterclockwise to pan to the left the map will 55 move right 6 Press the small MFD knob to exit panning 223 2 6 4 Setup The display of each video source is set up individually 1 While viewing the External Video page press the soft key for the desired Video source Video 1 or Video 2 L 2 Press the Setup soft key 5 3 The Current value for Brightness will be selected Use the following directions i foreach value CURRENT BRIGHTNESS O CONTRAST SATURAT ION EXTERNAL VIDEO n VIDEO 1 MUERE F 8 Figure 3 65 External Video Setup 4 After selecting the desired settings press the small MFD knob or the Setup soft key to exit editing 3 52 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Brightness Adjustment 1 While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source press the g Setup soft key 2 The Current value for Br
236. ess the MENU key Turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight Show Aviation Data or Hide Aviation Data and then press ENT a m S lt Pres tho HED keb te mirn fo bose mE Features Figure 4 13 Show Hide Aviation Data Manually Testing the TAWS System 1 Select the TAWS page 2 Press the MENU key and then turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight Test TAWS amp Alerts Symbols Glossary Praa the FEO kab to mira te bese pono Figure 4 14 TAWS Page Menu Appendix A Index 4 14 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H Cover A GARMIN 3 Press the ENT key to contirm the selection One of the following aural messages is generated e TAWS System Test OK e TAWS System Failure TAWS TEST is annunciated in yellow on the TAWS page and in white on the PFD DULPIOAY pJezey Y 29 Figure 4 15 TAWS Test Display and PFD Annunciation 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 15 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A D GARMIN 4 4 5 TAWS Alerts Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS software algorithms When an alert is issued visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued TAWS alert types are shown in the TAWS Alerts Summary Table 4 4 with corresponding annunciations and aural messages Foreword W
237. est radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds rather it indicates the highest altitude at which precipitation is detected Information is derived from NEXRAD data ex qil Cc C oM gt z T E e rar gt m WGN D C OD feat ALERTS 2 Figure 4 43 XM Weather Echo Tops The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops gt information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in grayish purple 2m 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 65 A TOC GARMIN Echo Top Data Viewing Range The Echo Top Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Echo Top weather products will be shown on the selected MED Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Echo _ Tops will not be shown Where a value such as 250 NM is selected Echo Top x data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 250 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Echo Top Data Viewing Range value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed
238. eys from 1 to 200 NM as indicated by the map range rings or arcs 5 Displaying TAWS Information z a 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS Page 2 Press the RNG keys to display a larger or smaller area Map Orientation Altitude North Indication Information Range Rings Yellow Terrain Caution Terrain Between 100 ft Map Ranae and 1000 ft Below the diii ANTONA Ownship Symbol 3 Red Terrain Warning at Present Position E Terrain Above or Within 100 ft Below the Aircraft Altitude Black Terrain No Danger l Terrain More than 1000 E ft Below the Aircraft iced Altitude g Page Name 360 120 Range Ring Arc Selection Selection Figure 4 11 360 View on the TAWS Page Changing the TAWS Page View Between 360 and Arc 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS page 2 Press VIEW and then the 360 or ARC soft key to select the desired view OR 1 While viewing the TAWS page press the MENU key 2 Turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight View Arc or View 360 and then press ENT T 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 13 LO Sec Additional LO Sec Sec 2 Annun Appendix B A GARMIN ard d Presa Ehe HET kesh ta mura de cese poe Figure 4 12 Select TAWS Display View 360 or Arc Showing Hiding Aviation Information on the TAWS Page 1 In MAP page group turn the small MFD knob to reach the TAWS page 2 Pr
239. f there is no active flight plan New Identifiers may also be selected as shown in section 3 5 3 3 IDENT FACILITY CITY Access Public Identifier Private and Facility Name Symbol City Figure 3 100 Flight Plan Ident Facility City Detail 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the RWY FREQ APT DIR or WX soit keys to view information about the waypoint Nn e UJ 2 The current destination Ident Facility and City is shown but may be changed to find information about other choices Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor These fields may not be selected if the RWY APT DIR or WX pages are selected If viewing those pages press the soft key for that page again to return to the Waypoint Information page 38 3 Use the large MFD knob to highlight the field you wish to change and use the small MFD knob to change the value D 4 Press the ENT key to save the selected value or press the small MFD knob to u cancel editing 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 73 A TOC GARMIN Runway Information Selection Information is provided for each runway showing the following detail z runway number runway length surface type and the frequency for Pilot Controlled Lighting PCL Runway Number Arrow Indicates More Runways Runway Length amp Width Runway Surface Lighting Information Figure 3 101 Waypoint Run
240. fic Control ATCRBS ATC Radar Beacon System ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service AUX auxiliary AWOS Automated Weather Observing System BARO barometric setting BC backcourse Bearing The compass direction from the present position to a destination waypoint BRG bearing C center runway SC degrees Celsius CDI Course Deviation Indicator CHNL channel CLD cloud CLR clear CONFIG configuration 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 8 1 DJOMoJO Ula1s g 29 ddd C 298 ad 36 y 22S eDUepIOAV piezeH SoJn e9J jeuonippv G 235 sue v 8 unuuv 9 29 28q sioquJ S y xipueddy TESTS 8 99S Xopu g xipueddy Sec 6 Sec 5 Sec 4 Additional Hazard Sec 3 Sec 2 Sec 1 Avoidance Annun Sec 7 Symbols Appendix B System Foreword PFD Features amp Alerts Sec 8 Appendix A Glossary Index Cover Course TOC Crosstrack Error CRS CRSR CTA CTRL CUM D ALT DB DBASE DCLTR DECLTR deg DEP Desired Track DTK DEST DFLT DIS Distance DME DP DPRT DSBL DIK EDR ELEV EMI ENR En Route Safe Altitude ENT ERR ESA ETA ETE 8 2 A GARMIN The line between two points to be followed by the aircraft The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either direction left or right course cursor Control Area control The total of all legs in a flight plan density altitude database declutter degree de
241. for maneuvering in near or around areas of hazardous weather Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions WARNING Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age WARNING For safety reasons GDU 620 operational procedures must be learned on the ground WARNING To reduce the risk of unsafe operation carefully review and understand all aspects of the G500 600 Pilot s Guide Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use During flight operations carefully _ compare indications from the GDU 620 to all available navigation sources including the information from other NAVAIDs visual sightings charts etc For safety purposes always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation Y WARNING Exceeding 200 deg second in pitch or roll may invalidate AHRS attitude provided to the GDU 620 Exceeding 450 KIAS may invalidate ADC _ information provided to the GDU 620 o WARNING Because of anomalies in the earth s magnetic field operating the G500 600 within the following areas could result in loss of reliable at
242. full scale deflection for the GNS 480 navigator at the second dot The GNS 400W 500W series navigators will indicate full scale deflection at the edge of the display Foreword 2 7 1 Changing CDI Sources The CDI can display two sources of navigation GPS or NAV VOR and LOC Color indicates the current navigation source magenta for GPS or green for System VOR and LOC The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS derived distance when coupled to GPS When coupled to a VOR or localizer LOC the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale two dots while coupled to GPS the crosstrack error XTK is displayed below the white aircraft symbol C E T X eel 5 VLOC dm E EE Navigator 1 Navigator 1 iia E E VLOC By Navigator 2 ou Navigator 2 fey lt L x Figure 2 31 CDI Navigation Sources 2 22 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 1 Press the CDI soft key to toggle between GPS and VOR LOC source type 2 Press 1 2 soft key to toggle between the 1 and 2 navigators of the GPS or VOR LOC sources DJOM9JOJ 3 Verity the navigation source by the indication on the HSI and in the upper left corner of the PFD Ul91s g NOTE The selected navigator is the active navigator for all PFD and MFD operations except for the supplemental bearing pointers 2 7 2 Changing CDI Course The Se
243. functioning gt equipment may still receive incomplete FIS B data when signal reception is gt limited by the distance from ground stations combined with a low altitude 28 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 137 A TOC GARMIN 4 11 5 NEXRAD Weather Setup 1 While viewing the FIS B weather page press the Menu key 2 With the Weather Setup selection highlighted press ENT _4 11 5 1 Weather Page Map Orientation T The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages 1 While viewing the FIS B Weather Map 1 2 or 3 of the Wx page group press the MENU key With Weather Setup highlighted press ENT 2 With the Map Orientation option active turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value Sec 2 PFD MFD Hee Orientation Sec 3 HeEXEDAD Dubn Viewing Range Leaend oa Figure 4 117 Weather Page Map Orientation Sec 4 S N O r 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 11 5 2 NEXRAD Data Viewing Range The NEXRAD Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range Where at and below the selected value NEXRAD weather products will be shown on the selected MFD FIS B Weather Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected _ 2 NEXRAD weather da
244. g EE Range Track Vector Off Time XM Ltng Off Range Class B pe Length TMA SE gs Wind Vector On Off e Off Range Class C land n A Viewing TCA 3 nh Enhanced On off HOTMSCOPE strike Cell ClassD OffRane fo Nav Range Strike Cell D Ring Mode psu Topo Scale On Off MOA Off Range P Military p pne Data Ld Other Lond ADIZ siad adi TFR land Y Viewing Hu Range Powerline Off Range Airways Off Modes Viewing Range Lat Lon Off Range Smart On Off Viewing Airspace Range Field of Ed Show AllAtiude View Airspaces Selected Alt bd EU On Off Ee Arc Labels shown if the Aviation database is current shown if Synthetic Vision is available Table 3 2 Navigation Map Page Menu Selections N Q70C O YDS I X9pu g xipuadd 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 11 A TOC GARMIN 3 1 10 1 Map Feature Options Choose the options to determine the values for display on each Navigation Map The options you save will be retained until changed The options may be selecting by using the following procedure Foreword While viewing the Navigation Map 1 or 2 of the Map page group press the MENU key With Map Setup highlighted press ENT With the Map Group active turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value Sec 1 System 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed va
245. gram will be displayed f an approach is loaded in the selected GPS navigator the chart for that 5 approach will be displayed In some cases the pilot may be prompted to select the correct chart from a list of possible matches DIOAV M V5 e If an approach is not loaded the airport diagram for the destination airport will be displayed D os poe ct E v If no destination airport exists the nearest airport diagram will be displayed Juv 9 sue v 9 UNL A NOTE Automatic chart selection only occurs when the charts page is opened For example if a new approach is loaded while the charts page is open a different MFD page must be selected and the charts page re opened A for the new approach chart to be automatically displayed 9 When the pilot has manually selected a chart to display a different chart will _ not be automatically selected until one of the following events occurs 2 e The aircraft takes off or lands A new or different approach is loaded AREN PN POP USddy x 1 While viewing the Charts page of the FPL page group press the SELECT soft key to activate chart selection 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the field to the right of the airport 3 identifier s qpueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 9 A TOC GARMIN 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired chart Sec 1 PED System Foreword Sec 2
246. gt Along squall lines multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line individual cells may be in different stages of development Areas between closely spaced intense targets may contain developing clouds not having enough moisture to produce a return However these areas could have strong updrafts or downdratts Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence appearing as hooks fingers or scalloped edges These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow red or magenta areas and should be treated as highly dangerous areas Avoid these areas as if they were red or magenta areas 4 08 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Squall Line Steep Gradient Hook or Finger Scalloped Edge Figure 4 73 Cell Irregularities Thunderstorm development is rapid A course may become blocked within a short time When displaying shorter ranges periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out That can help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather He li 4 The Blind Alley 551 9 2 Figure 4 74 The Blind Alley Overhead View In areas of multiple heavy cells use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to examine the areas Remember to avoi
247. gure 4 47 XM Weather AIRMETs Text 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 Sec 4 5 o 2 No lt A TOC GARMIN 4 8 14 XM PIREPS Pilot Weather Reports PIREPs provide timely weather information for a 5 particular route of flight When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast Air Traffic Control ATC facilities are required to solicit PIREPs A PIREP may contain non forecast adverse weather conditions such as low in flight visibility icing conditions wind shear and turbulence PIREPs are issued as either Routine UA or Urgent UUA Figure 4 48 XM Weather PIREPs 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPs value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted o 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 72 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 8 15 XM METARs A NOTE Atmospheric pressure reported for METARS is given in hectopascals hPa except in the United States where it is reported in inches of mercury in Hg Temperatures are reported in Celsius o NOTE METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation 2 f database service area METAR METeorological Aerodr
248. he selected display range is indicated by a half TA E 2g symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving to the nearest 45 Traffic information for which TIS is unable to lt determine the bearing non bearing traffic is displayed in the bottom center of the Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of other map pages on which traffic can be displayed t The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft the altitude separation appears E 2 above the traffic symbol if below the altitude separation appears below Altitude trend is displayed as an up down arrow for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction to the right of the target symbol Traffic symbols for aircratt without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb descent information 4 40 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 7 2 3 TIS Limitations NOTE This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive Garmin recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical 9 Information Manual Section 1 3 5 TIS is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not rel
249. hen an alert is issued annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD TAWS map page only The TAWS Alert Annunciation is shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD If the TAWS page is not displayed at the time a pop up alert appears on the MFD on the page being viewed MFD a m S lt i TAWS Alert Pop Up E Figure 4 16 TAWS Alert Pop Up To acknowledge the pop up alert Press the CLR key returns to the currently viewed page OR a Press the ENT key accesses the TAWS Page T the pilot takes no action the pop up will be removed when the alert is no longer active 4 16 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN DJOMoJ04 UJ91s g ddd 5 EO eer c o 2900 LEGEND i Figure 4 17 TAWS Alert Annunciations Pull Up T 4 4 5 1 TAWS B Alerting Colors and Symbology i Color and symbols are also associated with TAWS alerts The three TAWS alert levels and their associated text coloring as well as any associated symbology are shown in the following table i Alert Level Annunciator Text Threat Area Example Visual Annunciation RA Indication Symbol d Warning White text on red PULL UP background a Caution 7 F Hmm Table 4 4 TAWS Alert Colors and Symbology gt 3 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 17 29 288 298 unuuy euonippy 9 29S 298 8 295 g
250. highlight the Turbulence Viewing Range value zt 2 Tum the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Press the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up keys to increase or decrease the reporting altitude of icing in 3 000 foot increments The selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys 9 OSs o G S ons nto gt lt Sec 5 Additional Features Sec 6 Sec 7 Annun amp Alerts Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A Appendix B Index 4 88 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN 10C 4 9 Weather Radar DJ0M9JOJ The G500 600 can display weather radar from a Garmin GWX system or from selected 3rd party radars Only one weather radar system may be interfaced to the system For detailed information on the operation of 3rd party radars refer to their specific documentation 4 9 1 Garmin GWX 68 Radar Description The Garmin GWX 68 and GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radars combine excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a high definition target display UJ91s g 29 ddd C 298 To focus radar scanning on specific areas Sector Scanning offers pilot adjustable horizontal scan angles of 20 40 60 or 90 up to 120 with the GWX 70
251. hile taxiing and during level flight U hab X NOTE Fastest AHRS alignment is achieved with the aircraft stationary and with all AHRS inputs valid 3 D GPS position magnetometer and air data During initial power up on the ground no GPS position and or magnetic anomalies are common If the aircraft is taxied prior to AHRS alignment alignment may be delayed until after a valid 3 D GPS position is available NOTE During in flight alignment of the AHRS minimize aircraft maneuvering The AHRS will align with shallow banking and pitch angles less than 20 degrees of roll or 5 degrees of pitch AHRS alignment may not be possible during more aggressive maneuvers When the MFD powers up the splash screen displays the following information e Software version and part number e Basemap database version 1 12 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN Terrain database version Obstacle database expiration date Aviation database expiration date Airport Directory database expiration date Chart database status Databases are displayed in white if they are determined to be current Databases are displayed in yellow if they have expired are not yet effective or if the current date time is not yet available from the GPS GARMIN G600 Cl Version 7 p TET ES E Massman 1 and a estacle BG Expires H JAN 2T Lu l errain e oF elias i55 Expires B JAN ZUTS Ae Aol Directury Expires B
252. hone Book Catalog Entry 4 Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character of the name and then turn the large MFD knob to select the next character When the name is complete press the ENT key IRIDIUM PHONE STATUS CALL TIME PHONE STATUS CALL SUPPRESSION PHONEBOOK Phone Book Entry Name PHONE NUMBER Catalog Figure 3 79 Phone Book Name Entry 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 61 A ia GARMIN Creating Phone Numbers with the Rotary Knobs s 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the Phone Number field Turn the small MFD knob to select the first character of the number and then turn the large MFD knob to select the next character When the number is complete press the ENT key IRIDIUM PHONE STATUS DALL TIHE PHONE STATUS CALL SUPPRESSION Paena Ra Phone Book Entry Number OME aa OL LIHE aL PHONE eee Press JO Use Keys DTAL AARM iDYISONT 1 For Number Entry Figure 3 80 Phone Book Number Entry a 2 Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor 3 62 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Creating Phone Numbers with Soft Keys 1 Numbers may also be entered using the soft keys at the bottom of the display Press the Keys key at the bottom of the display iM fake j a Press 7O Use Keys olal eee ERT I For Number Entry Figure 3 81 Phone Book Number Entry Using Hot Keys 2 Press the key for the group of desired num
253. hows the current turn rate The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds based on the present turn rate A standard rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark corresponding to a predicted heading of 18 from the current heading At rates greater than four deg sec an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the E prediction is no longer valid DJOM9JOJ 299 vcn lt WN ess D 3 AW 298 Turn Rate indication SII MIDI Arrowhead shown for a Heading Bug Turn Rate gt 4 deg sec J Standard Lubber Line s T Turn Rate Current Track Indicator Figure 2 29 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector E un 2 Course Deviation Indicator a The Course Deviation Indicator CDI moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the course If the course deviation data is not valid the CDI is not displayed 360 HSI 3 R GPS Level H of Service G m Navigation S oo Source Scale B E Crosstrack Error CDI 3 S Figure 2 30 Course Deviation Indicator 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 21 Sec 4 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun U D WY Cv CD Un O o N o L Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A TOC GARMIN NOTE The ILS Localizer and Glideslope deviation indicators will indicate
254. ht DL LTNG Data Viewing Range 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 125 Sec 4 5 N au a br S r A ia GARMIN 4 10 10 SIGMETs and AIRMETs SIG AIR SIGMETs SIGnificant METeorological Information and AIRMETs AIRmen5 METeorological Information are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather considered of importance to aircraft A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective weather A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position Cursor Location Product Age IFR Line Cursor On AIRMET SIGMET Line SIGMET Line Icing GFDS WEATHER HAP 1 K AUX FPL B LEGEND ADVISORY Figure 4 107 GFDS Weather Page AIRMETs SIGMETs When enabled SIGMET AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous weather to all aircraft SIGMET AIRMET data covers icing turbulence dust gt and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service The update rate is every 12 minutes in the U S Elsewhere updates are made as they are issued Viewing Textual SIGMETs AIRMETs Textual SIGMET AIRMETs can be viewed by selecting an SIGMET AIRMET line o
255. ht the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 124 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 10 9 Data Link Lightning DL LTNG Data Viewing Range Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud to ground lightning strikes A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two kilometer region The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed Only cloud to ground strikes are reported in the US and extreme southern Canada cloud to cloud strikes are not reported gt zZ e T E e rar pJezey Y 29 VISP Figure 4 106 GFDS Data Link Lightning and Legend The Lightning Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Lightning weather products will be shown on the selected MFD GFDS Weather Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Lightning will not be shown 3 Where a value such as 250 NM is selected GFDS data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 250 NM and lower 1 While viewing a GFDS Weather Map page of the WX page group press the 2 MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlig
256. ice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited Garmin FliteCharts and SafeTaxi are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries SVTTM G500 and G600 are trademarks of Garmin Ltd or its subsidiaries These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin NavData is a registered trademark of Jeppesen Inc SkyWatch is a registered trademark of L 3 Avionics Systems Sirius and XM are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc Iridium is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications Inc Canadian radar data provided by Environment Canada United States radar data provided by NOAA European radar data collected and provided by Meteo France March 2015 Printed in the U S A A GARMIN TOC AVIATION LIMITED WARRANTY All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase for new Remote Mount and Panel Mount products one year from the date of purchase for new portable products and any purchased newly overhauled products six months for newly overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center and 90 days for factory repaired or newly overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair Within the applicable period Garmin will at its sole option repair or replace any components that 2 fail in normal u
257. ieve the pilot of responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in VMC No recommended avoidance maneuvers are provided for nor authorized as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory ddd While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance it has some system limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use Many of these limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance In other words the information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC TIS will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed gt z oO 2 T E e rar TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar which is a secondary surveillance radar similar to the ATCRBS TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering TIS is dependent on two way line ol sight communication between the aircraft and the Mode S radar Whenever the structure of the client aircraft comes between the transponder antenna usually located on the underside of the aircraft and the ground based radar antenna the signal may be temporarily interrupted Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM Section 1 3 5 SoJn e9J euonippv sue v 8 unuuv 9
258. ighlight the desired entry Press ENT to select the catalog entry Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the DELETE key Press ENT to delete the catalog entry Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor Editing a Phone Book Catalog Entry 1 Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor and then turn the large MFD knob to select the Phone Book Catalog icon Turn the small MFD knob to display the contents of the Phone Book Catalog and highlight the desired entry Press ENT to select the catalog entry Use the large MFD and small MFD knobs to make changes to the name or number Press ENT to save the changes Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor og z 3 2 8 3 Phone Volume Use the Phone Volume controls to adjust the loudness of the phone calls _ you hear Volume controls will only be available when the Idle Connected or z 2 Changing Volume states are displayed Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Rotary Knobs 1 While viewing the Iridium Phone page press the small MFD knob and then D ja 3 64 turn the large MFD knob to select the Volume control The volume bar graph will blink when selected Turn the small MFD knob to set the desired volume level Press the ENT key Press the small MFD knob again to cancel the selection cursor Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Soft Keys 1 While viewing the
259. ight YES and press the ENT key to continue radar activation oss OR ins 6 If the aircraft is airborne select the WEATHER soft key A warm up period is initiated countdown is displayed on the screen GWX radars only After the warm up is complete the radar begins transmitting 7 Press the RNG keys to select the desired range 4 102 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H SCALE TILT ren BEARING ER GAIN WEATHER RADGA H CERE ee VERTICAL TH 2 Figure 4 78 Vertical Scan Display 4 9 6 2 Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell Not available with all radars gt zZ oO a T E e a gt When vertically scanning with stabilization ON the actual physical area gt that the radar is sweeping may not match the GDU vertical scan display This occurs whenever the aircraft pitch is not at 0 degrees To compensate for this the GDU vertical display will erase the portion of the vertical display that is no longer being scanned It will appear that the vertical sweep wraps around when reaching the end of the GDU vertical display The radar is simply erasing the portion of the vertical display that is not currently being scanned NOTE Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant adjustment of the Bearing Line 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 103 pJezey 7 22 Sec 4 5 N 1 au a br S
260. ightness will be selected Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Brightness value D BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST SATURATION Figure 3 66 External Video Brightness Adjustment 3 After selecting the desired setting turn the large MFD knob to highlight the next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing Nn e UJ Contrast Adjustment 1 While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source press the Setup soft key 2 The Current value for Brightness will be selected Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Contrast value Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Contrast S value BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST SATURATION Figure 3 67 External Video Contrast Adjustment 3 After selecting the desired setting turn the large MFD knob to highlight the next value or press the small MFD knob to exit editing a 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 53 A TOC GARMIN Saturation Adjustment 1 While viewing the External Video page and the desired Video source press the Setup soit key Foreword 2 The Current value for Brightness will be selected Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Saturation value Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Saturation value Sec 1 System BRIGHTNESS Sec 2 PFD CONTRAST SATURATION Figure 3 68 External Video Saturation Adjustment AD a A 3 After selecting the desired setting press the small MFD knob to exit editing
261. ilable for intervals of current 12 24 36 and 48 hours The interval is selected by pressing the FCST TIME soft key on the Wx Data Link Map page Appendix A Index 4 78 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN is 4 8 18 XM County Warnings County data provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the National Weather Service NWS This can include amp information on fires tornadoes severe thunderstorms flood conditions and other natural disasters gt zZ e T E e rar pJezey Y 29 LEGES i M AERTS Figure 4 58 XM Weather County Warnings County Data Viewing Range The County Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range lt o where at and below that value County weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map pages 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected County Data will not be shown Where a value such as 100 NM is selected County data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 100 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the County Data Viewing Range value x 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted z 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next
262. interface Foreword 5 32 gt a A Sec 2 PFD os TA Sec 3 MFD dn Figure 1 8 GMU 44 Magnetometer 1 1 1 5 GTP 59 The GTP 59 temperature probe provides Outside Air Temperature OAT data to the GDC 74A 74B Hazard Features Avoidance Annun amp Alerts Figure 1 9 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Sec 7 Symbols 1 1 1 6 Garmin Navigator Interface The G500 600 system requires connection to at least one external Garmin WAAS GPS navigator such as the 400W 500W series GIN 600 700 series or Sec 8 Glossary A G Z WGN aK OO Appendix Appendix B Index 1 8 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN BEEN 1 1 2 Optional Line Replaceable Units LRU A variety of LRUs are available to expand and enhance the G500 600 system 1 1 2 1 GDL 88 Optional The GDL 88 is a remotely mounted ADS B transceiver There are four models of the GDL 88 Models with a single bottom mounted UAT antenna meet TSO C154c Class AlS and are available with or without an internal GPS SBAS fs receiver Models with one top mounted and one bottom mounted antenna meet TSO C154c Class A1H and are also available with or without an internal GPS SBAS receiver 1 1 2 2 Weather Radar The Garmin GWX system or selected 3rd party radar provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD DJOM9JOJ vg We Ow Q3IN 295 y 295 92UPpIOAV piezeH saunjeo4 JEVONIPpY
263. ion but some navigators apply magnetic variation correction for the waypoint location addy g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 1 p 299 G 29 9 29 TOC GARMIN 2 1 PFD Soft Keys ES E o w pa Oo LL GPS Source 1 ae i SYN TERR DS VORIILS Source 2 HRZN HDG APTSIGNS j f DME NAV 1 DME NAV 2 ve DME HOLD Un em BRG BRG 1 ME 5 NAV 1 z GPS 1 ADF oS BRG 2 z NAV 2 GP5 2 s E E ADF o CLK TMR E HIDE Et CLOCK TIMER START STOP E RESET W 2 BACK Figure 2 3 PFD Soft Key Diagram The soft keys are located along the bottom of the displays below the soft key labels The soft key labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being displayed The soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key function n Appe Appendix B Index 2 2 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Selected Soft Key Unselected Soft Key Soft Key Labels Soft Keys DJOM9JOJ 29 cn lt NN er D 3 Soft Key Not Available Unselected Soft Key For Selection BACK Soft Key Labels Figure 2 4 PFD Soft Key Layout When a soft key is selected its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned off at which time it reverts to white text on black background When a soft key function is disabled the soft key label is subdued dimmed ee ee ee ee NOTE If a
264. ion will not be shown For the value such as 500 NM selected TFR information will be shown at map ranges of that value 500 NM and lower 1 While viewing a FIS B Weather Map page of the WX page group turn the large MED knob to highlight the TFR Data Viewing Range option 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the FIS B Weather Map page 4 150 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Viewing Textual TFRs pages the cursor to highlight a TFR outline yellow circle Press ENT Textual TFRs can be viewed by selecting a TFR outline on the Weather WX lt 1 While viewing a Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move 2 A summary of the TFR will be shown and the first TFR will be highlighted In the case of multiple TFRs turn the small or large MFD knobs to highlight the desired TFR 3 Press the VIEW TEXT soft key to view the full TFR text 4 Press ENT to return to the Weather page Figure 4 123 FIS B Weather Textual TFRs and Legend 4 11 6 FIS B Product Times The weather product expiration time is shown in the following table It does not gt zZ eh T E e rar pJezey Y 29 represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the Data Link Receiver Weath
265. ional NEXRAD pixels are 1 5 minutes 1 5 nautical miles 2 78 km wide by 1 minute 1 nautical miles 1 852 km tall The CONUS NEXRAD pixels are 7 5 minutes 7 5 nautical miles 13 89 km wide by 5 minutes 5 nautical miles 9 26 km wide Above 60 lt degrees of latitude the Regional NEXRAD pixels are 3 minutes nautical miles CONUS NEXRAD is not available above 60 degrees of latitude 2 The intensity level reflected by the pixel will be the highest level sampled within the area covered by each pixel x oN nH amp E 2 NOTE Where it is noted that NOTAM data is available it is possible only E a subset of the data is available and that more NOTAM reports may arrive in future updates Updates occur approximately every ten minutes 4 136 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 11 3 NEXRAD Intensity Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities reflectivity measured in dBZ decibels of Z Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power a returned to the radar receiver Reflectivity designated by the letter Z covers a wide range of signals Irom very weak to very strong So a more convenient number for calculations and comparison a decibel or logarithmic scale dBZ e is used The dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal returned to the radar increases 4 11 4 NEXRAD When enabled NEXRAD weather information is shown Co
266. is configured for ChartView When in air the pilot cannot select the field to change the chart source and a small message is displayed underneath the Chart Type line that reads Chart Type can only be changed when on ground The ability to select a chart type is absent from normal mode if configured for FliteCharts 5 1 4 1 Selecting FliteCharts or ChartView When configured during installation and when both chart types are available you can select which chart type will be used Only one chart type can be used at a time 29 ule1s g AC C 295 dd 9 IN 298 p 29S BDULDIOAY pJezeH TI a gt te e lt 1 n Jeuonippy G 99S mire ie bee pose Figure 5 5 Chart NOTAM SHo V m unuuv O 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Chart Type sections 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select ChartView or FliteCharts 3 Press the ENT key to save the selected value E 4 Changing chart type requires a restart of the unit With OK selected press the ENT key to restart the unit and change to the selected chart type COLOR SCHEME ALTO Au E Genit TYPE S Ep ere E Pres a HED kb te return to bose sont y xipuaddy X9pu g xipueddy Figure 5 6 Changing Chart Type 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 A TOC GARMIN 5 1 4 2 Selecting a New Chart by FPL NRST or RECENT s You may select other charts to display based on your flight pl
267. it will be lost for a period of time 1 With the G500 600 turned off insert the database card 2 Turn the G500 600 on The Database SYNC will occur automatically in the background During the Database SYNC amp process normal operation of the G500 600 is not affected 3 On the System Status page press the DB SYNC soft key to view the transfer process BS MATADE SVC DATABASE MER ZA uL mA aras SYSTEM STATUS AP ALIX a DB SYNC EET ADVISORY Figure 3 56 One Database Transfer In Process and One Pending 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 45 GARMIN DATATE SYNC DATABASE CYCLES VER wL TATUS 1452 DDU 2 COMPLETE Sar eT onl Airport Directory 1406 BU 2 COMPLETE SYSTEM sidus Figure 3 57 Database Transfer Complete MATARAE SHC DATABASE CYCLESVER ME STATUS BaseHop 4 p HOT AUTH SYNC CONFLICTS The Fallawirg active dotoboses conflict with o dotobesn of the L5 cyclo prest en enother LRU DATABASE CYCLEAVER REGICH Obstocle 1486 US amp Europe Helicopter RESOLVE CONFLICTS SYSTEM STATUS Figure 3 58 Database Transfer Not Authorized and DB Sync Conflict 3 46 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 Once all of the database transfers have completed if the G500 600 determines that at least one of the newly transferred databases is effective and the aircraft is on the ground and stopped prior to a flight a pop up and confirmation will
268. its aural and visual 5 annunciations The system test can also be manually initiated An aural alert is S issued at test completion TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 knots Sec 4 5 te Ns I lt E PFD MFD Alert AES Alert Type Annunciation TAWS Available TAWS Available 5 E TAWS System Test in Progress TAWS TEST None Aural Message TAWS System Test Pass TAWS System Test OK TAWSNA A TAMS Not Available TAWS Alerting is Disabled None TAWS System Test Fail TANS FATE TAWS System Failure Table 4 7 TAWS B System Test Status Annunciations 4 24 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 5 External TAWS If a GNS 500WT series or GTN series with TAWS unit is interfaced as GPS 3 1 text alerts generated by the external TAWS unit will be displayed on the PFD Refer to the GNS 500WT series or GTN series Pilots Guides and or Addendums for more information regarding these TAWS alerts Text alerts received from the i GNS GTN TAWS unit will be displayed to the left and aligned with the top of E R the Altitude Tape on the PFD A new annunciation will flash for approximately five seconds TAWS annunciations can only be received from the 1 GPS unit zR f the Garmin GPS TAWS is not available and Terrain SVT is enabled the G500 600 Terrain SVT will generate PFD text alerts and aural callouts An advisory message wil
269. knob to the Terrain page 3 Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys Map Orientation Altitude 3 North Indication Information s Range Rings Ownship Symbol 8 at Present Position Terrain and S Obstacle Altitude Page Name TERRAIN PROXIMITV ege ds VIEW Press View to See the R 2 360 and ARC Selections a Figure 4 2 Terrain Page with Aviation Data Displayed and 360 View 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 5 Sec 4 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun A GARMIN Foreword Sec 1 System Terrain Overlay Sec 2 PFD Terrain Scale Sec 3 MFD Terrain Data Icon g es N S lt MAP Overlay Soft Keys Bone 4 3 Terrain on Navigation Map Page Features IL 3 1 2 Terrain Proximity Page Display on a Navigation Map Page Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group On Navigation Map page 1 or 2 press the MAP soft key to show the TERRAIN soft key RO a amp Alerts UO Press the TERRAIN soft key to overlay terrain on the Navigation Map Sec 7 Symbols NOTE Terrain Proximity and NEXRAD are mutually exclusive on the map page 4 3 1 3 Terrain Proximity Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings Select the 120 Arc or 360 rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the 60 Arc soft keys or from the Page Menu Press the VIEW soft key to show the 360 and ARC soft keys Press the 360 or Arc soft key OR Press MENU an
270. l coordinate with the other LRUs in the cockpit to determine which unit has the newest databases Once the determination has occurred the connected LRUs will begin to transfer 2 the databases This process may take several minutes Charts are meant to be transferred while in flight before the new chart database is effective as this could take an hour or more The status of the database transfers to a unit can be viewed in the System Status function on the DB SYNC page The G500 600 will 2 display the source of the received databases If a database transfer is pending completed or not authorized the status will also be indicated 3 44 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC When the transfer is complete if there are new and current databases to be used and if the aircraft is stopped and has yet to take off the pilot will be prompted with the option to restart the unit that has the new databases transferred to it During the restart process the unit may prompt you to update transfer from the card to the units memory to the newer databases so they can be used Only the aviation database will require a prompt all the others will switch during a restart without a prompt 2 A NOTE This feature is available in SW Versions 7 00 and later A NOTE Restarting the G500 600 must only be performed when the aircraft i is on the ground as navigation and communication from the restarted un
271. l indicate when reversion to Terrain SVT alerting has occurred C 3IN For External TAWS HSDB terrain impact points on the MFD are generated from the data crossfilled from the GTN TER N A TER INHB TERRAIN Figure 4 22 TAWS Annunciations from a GNS GTN TAWS Terrain PFD MFD Visual MFD Pop up Aural Configurations Annunciations Alert Alerting GTN w External When configured for External None None TAWS Unit TAWS HSDB the GDU will not Installed HSDB generate any alerts all alerts are crosstilled from the GTN G500 600 PFD annunciations are Terrain Proximity generated from the External w External TAWS Unit E TAWS Unit No MFD Annunciations e Installed bOOW series gt gt z oO a T E e a gt pJezey Y 29 Jos al EUOILIDPY SoJnieoJ Sue v 8 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 25 A ii GARMIN Terrain PFD MEFD Visual MFD Pop up Aural e BG nie eons Annunciations Alert Alerting G500 600 w PFD annunciations are None G500 600 Terrain SVT and generated from the External aural External TAWS TAWS Unit alerts are x Unit Installed No MFD Annunciations are suppressed 500W series generated from the G500 600 Terrain impact shading on the PFD SVT is generated through the internal Terrain SVT alerting G500 600 w Annunciations generated from Generated Not a TAWS B the G500 600 from the suppressed zz G500 600
272. lay 4 60 ACEITE UTER e eH REX Ryan ITTIIIE a 1 u ri m Lr5HTMEHE hEXSD DELL Hs Pras the THI ke fo retora to the bae Bi AL ATS ELE Figure 4 39 NEXRAD Weather Legen Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops 3 x information is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in grayish purple 4 8 5 1 Reflectivity E Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver Colors on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere Simply put certain types of weather reflect radar better than others The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level For instance wet hail returns a strong radar reflection while dry hail does not Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels dB relative to reflectivity Z NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver designated by the letter Z The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases 4 8 5 2 N
273. lays are used extensively in the GDU 620 to provide situational awareness in flight The following information can be displayed on the _ Navigation Map Pages e Airports NAVAIDs airspace e Nav range ring airways land data highways cities lakes rivers borders etc with names Flight plan legs e Track vector Map Pointer information distance Topography scale and bearing to pointer location of Topography data pointer name and other pertinent XM NEXRAD Weather CD U C eo 2 O aA information e XM Lightning a Map range p rang e XM Storm Cells g e Wind direction and speed e Traffic Map orientation Y e Stormscope Icons for enabled map features 3 Top of Climb e Aircraft icon representing present position e Terrain data includes terrain E obstacles and power lines Symbols used on the MFD are detailed in Section 7 Symbols E A NOTE Page Group and Page are shown at the bottom of the MFD l Mi O8O0 lt E Page Group Page 2 Turn Large MFD knob Turn Small MFD knob Figure 3 2 Page Group and Page Locator 3 2 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Weather Source Map Orientation WX Data Window Terrain Data Obstacle Icon Traffic Icons Indi with Relative O eae Groupen Altitude and Trend Indicator Elevation Window Aircraft Symbol Present Position Topo Data Scale Enhanced Range Ring Current Altitude Map Overlay Icon
274. lected Course is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 10 seconds after being adjusted lt New Course Setting ie ke 3 CRS A V 4 it 3 Figure 2 32 Course Setting k 1 Press the CRS key to activate Course mode T 2 Turn the PFD knob to change the Course values 3 OR 3 Press the PFD knob to set a Course that will center the CDI to the VOR station or waypoint if in GPS OBS mode y XIpu ddy Alesso 5 S OQWAS L 2S X PU g XIpu ddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 23 2S unuuy euonippv DJezeH 299 9 29 8 295 ddd C 92S p 28 G 298 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun N vA o n e Sec 3 Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A TOC GARMIN 2 7 3 Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI The Vertical Deviation Glideslope Indicator VDI appears to the left of the VSI whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field A green diamond acts as the VDI Indicator like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope signal NO GS is annunciated The glideslope on an ILS approach is only shown if the current heading is within 90 of the selected inbound course This prevents the glideslope from being displayed during localizer backcourse approaches reword rO L CD N gt WY Vertical Deviation Source Vertical Deviation Indicator z E Figure 2 33 V
275. lection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 128 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Viewing Textual AIREPs PIREPs Textual AIREPs PIREPs can be viewed by selecting an AIREP PIREP on the Map or Weather WX pages z 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight an airport with an AIREP PIREP Press ENT 2 The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown Press the WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint INFORMATION PIREPS AIREPS piezep Y 29 gt zZ os T E e rar Press the ENT kep to retern to the bese poge Figure 4 110 GFDS Weather AIREPs PIREPs Detail and Legend 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 129 Sec 4 TO N 1 au A TOC GARMIN 4 10 12 METARs gt A NOTE Atmospheric pressure reported for METARSs is given in hectopascals hPa except in the United States where it is reported in inches of mercury in Hg Temperatures are reported in Celsius A NOTE METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation a YU S s database service area METAR METeorological Aerodrome Report known as an Aviation Routine Weather Report is the standard format for current weather observations METARs are generally updated h
276. light plan A runway that is not in a loaded flight plan is shown as dark gray with no other colors TI 0 te e 1 ua Jeuonippy S y 8 unuuv 9 298 sioquJ S L 29 Figure 5 47 Depiction of Runway Not in Loaded Flight plan A runway that is associated with an approach in the loaded flight plan is outlined with a white rectangle with the actual runway in that rectangle iag k3 5 Alesso o 8 29S leet XI Duy y xipuaddy y RINT Xopu g xipueddy a 1 I d Figure 5 48 Depiction of Runway with Loaded Approach 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 43 GARMIN 5 5 3 6 Traffic Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate respective location as determined by the related traffic systems TIS TAS and ADS B traffic are all displayed Tratfic is displayed in three dimensions appearing larger as they are getting closer and smaller when they are further away T Asna E z vo 4200 E ry r3 bli i S 7 d d F o yy i l a a1 j ee ie EE r BIN Iraffic on PFD Figure 5 49 Traffic Depiction on the PFD 5 5 3 7 Obstacles Obstacles are represented on the synthetic display by two dimensional tower or windmill symbols found on the MFD maps and charts Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative height above terrain and distance from the aircraft Obstacle Alert mar Obstacle Qf Figure
277. light the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted a 8 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 12 Sec 4 5 o g N S lt A ix GARMIN 4 10 11 AIREP PIREP Pilot Weather Reports PIREPs provide timely weather information for a particular route of flight When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast Air Traffic Control ATC facilities are required to solicit PIREPs A PIREP may contain non forecast adverse weather conditions such as low in flight visibility icing conditions wind shear and turbulence PIREPs are issued as either Routine UA or Urgent UUA ELEV 4a0erETE __ W BE 37 ME Product Age press ENT for PIREPIAIREP info o Cursor Location Selected PIREP PIREP Detail GFOS WEATHER HAP 1 Wx LEGEND ADVISORY Figure 4 109 GFDS Weather Page AIREPs PIREPs 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPS Viewing Range value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel se
278. logy is lt installed and enables synthetic terrain depiction S HRZN HDG The HRZN HDG soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed Pressing this key enables horizon heading marks and digits APTSIGNS The APTSIGNS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology is installed and enables airport sign posts CLK TMR The Clock Timer function displays a clock or timer window in the lower left corner of the PFD WISA IVS A E 286 adl Select Hide Clock Timer DULpIOAY pJeZeH y 298 n e 4 EUOILIPpY S9J Hide Timer Select Start Reset Clock Timer Timer Figure 2 6 Clock and Timer Functions sue v 9 unuuv BACK The BACK soft key returns to the previous soft key menu 2 Airspeed Indicator The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 units while minor tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of five units Speed indication starts at 20 knots regardless of the displayed units C6 N sioqui g t KJeSSO D 33S re ueddy NOTE Airspeed units KTS MPH KPH are configured to match the approved units for the installation D vx The Airspeed Indicator provides Indicated Airspeed True Airspeed and _ Ground Speed The Airspeed Trend Indicator shows what the airspeed will be in six secon
279. lot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 Turn the small MFD knob to select the Barometric Setting units and then press ENT The Temperature value will now be highlighted NAV ANGLE MAGNETIC PRESS INCHES IN TEMP 3 3 2 2 Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Information Optional EK The Aux mode XM Information page displays information about the Sirius XM Satellite radios service and products when the GDL 69 69A is installed and the Sirius XM Satellite Radio service is activated g T4 Figure 3 52 Temperature System Display Units 4 Turn the small MFD knob to select the Temperature units and then press ENT DATA RADIO ALIIO RADIO WEATHER PRODUCTS XH INFORRATION LOCK q xipuet Figure 3 53 XM Information 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 341 A TOC GARMIN 3 2 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio XM Entertainment Radio Optional Audio entertainment is available through the Sirius XM Satellite Radio Service when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A The GDU 620 serves as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A Sirius XM Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly search for new stations Based on signal _ from satellites coverage far exceeds land based transmissions When enabled the Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux Mode The infor
280. lue The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Map Orientation The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Navigation Map D eo qp WOO oO o nidis en c Sec 5 Additional Features enr eras ALT Figure 3 13 Navigation Map Orientation Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts North Up At Ihe North Up At option allows you to select the map range where at and above the selected value the Map Orientation will automatically change to North Up For example with the 500 NM value selected and the map range of the MFD is 500 NM or more the map orientation will automatically become North Up Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Auto Zoom With a valid flight plan the Auto Zoom feature will automatically change the Navigation Map range depending on the distance to the next waypoint in the flight plan If enabled it will also automatically zoom to the SafeTaxi zoom range when the aircraft is on the ground Auto Zoom can be overridden at any time by manually zooming with the RNG keys or enabling OBS mode Auto Zoom is re enabled once one of the following conditions is met Appendix A Appendix B Index 3 12 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Land Data The Land Data option selects whether detailed land features such as rivers roads citi
281. mation on the Sirius XM Satellite Radio display is composed of my four areas the Active Channel Available Channels Category of the highlighted E Channel and the Volume setting The Active Channel window shows the Channel Name and Number Artist Song Title and Category gt S 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group E 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the XM Radio page Figure 3 54 XM Entertainment Radio A description of Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is provided in Section 5 Additional Features 342 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN 3 2 4 System Status The System Status Page displays the statuses serial numbers and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks failed LRUs by red Xs Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin authorized dealer informed Database SYNC allows a database to be synchronized with more than two LRUs G500 600 and GTNs at once ACTIVE DATSRSSeS D Fa STL DHT DIRECTORY zii Mani Der AAS HIER Sul 2r THL OAT DIRECTORY OAT DIRECTORY DTRECTORY de IRE HaT RFCETUTMC A DeTANASTS Ae LST LOM EXP ERED oe M ER D I p E LF LL BeAr SERSIGH CHART CYCLE 1420 Jenpeum Lhort ie EHEH Te DEL 14 DBSTA GE Rear gSTAGE DYCLE SIAL MAA Ds STEM 5T atus B aT Figure 3 55 LRU and Database Informatio
282. most accurate baro corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path However because actual mmosphert conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the 5 International Standard Atmosphere ISA model where pressure temperature and lapse rates have fixed values it is common for the baro corrected altitude x as read from the altimeter to differ from the GPS MSL altitude This variation results in the aircrafts true altitude differing from the baro corrected altitude 4 4 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 3 Terrain Proximity Garmin Terrain is a non TSO C151c terrain awareness system provided as a 3 standard feature of GDU 620 to increase situational awareness and help reduce controlled flight into terrain CFIT Terrain may be displayed on the Map page group Navigation Map and Terrain pages Terrain requires the following to operate properly a The system must have a valid 3 D GPS position solution The system must have a valid terrain obstacle v 4 3 1 Displaying Terrain Proximity The Terrain Proximity page is in the Map page group Terrain is also selectable on the Navigation Map pages 4 3 1 1 Terrain Proximity Page Display on the Terrain Page 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the MAP page group 7 22 gt zZ 2 T EI e rar pJezey 2 Turn the small MFD
283. mposite data from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown This data is y composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps The display of the information is color coded to indicate the weather level severity Refer to the legend for a description of the color code Ihe NEXRAD option has selections of Regional CONUS or Combined NEXRAD CONUS NEXRAD includes a composite of available NEXRAD radar imagery across the 48 states Regional NEXRAD is a composite of available z NEXRAD radar imagery in a local area showing a more detailed image than CONUS NEXRAD FIS B weather data reception requires line of site communication between the receiver and the ADS B ground station Incomplete Regional and or CONUS NEXRAD imagery displayed on the MAP and FIS B Weather Pages of the affected products is an indicator of poor FIS B reception Affected Areas a Any area in the continental United States CONUS or Alaska where the distance from ADS B ground stations or the combined effect of distance and low altitude is sufficiently great may cause poor reception A good source of _ information for ground station coverage can be found at 2 IPUOILIOK euoHnpr unuuv http www taa gov Reception will improve in some affected areas as the FAA completes the NextGen ADS B ground station infrastructure However due to line of sight broadcast characteristics operators with properly installed and
284. n 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 43 A lt a 8 GARMIN 1 Turn the large MFD knob to the AUX page group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to the System Status page 3 Press the LRU soft key to highlight the first item in the LRU Info window 4 Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the items in the LRU Info window in case more items are available than are displayed If more items are available than can be displayed in the window a scroll bar will show on the right side of the window v 5 Press the DB ACTV soft key to display the active databases 6 Press the DB SYNC soft key to display the status of Database SYNC operations The synchronization happens automatically regardless of whether the soft key Is used 3 2 4 1 Database Sync Operation Database SYNC allows the G500 600 to synchronize databases from a g single unit The pilot only needs to update a single database card and the new databases are automatically SYNC d through the units connected in the cockpit and configured for Database Syncing qd D 5 The following databases can be synchronized between using Database SYNC e Navigation Obstacle e SafeTaxi lert Ahnun Airport Directory Chartview when support is added by Jeppesen 3 E e FliteCharts e Basemap When Database SYNC is enabled in the LRUs and a database card is inserted that is created for Database SYNC the G500 600 wil
285. n ue w Ed gt 19 lt P LL amp Alerts Hot Spot Outline Aircraft position Symbols DCLTR Soft Key Removes Taxiway Markings Figure 5 18 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page A NOTE Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground maneuvering SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the requirements of AC 20 159 and are not qualified to be used as an airport moving map display AMMD SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations Appendix A Index 5 18 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN is 5 2 1 Using SafeTaxi Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum configured range The following is a list of amp pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen e Navigation Map Page e NDB Information Page V Weather Datalink Page VOR Information Page 3 Airport Information Page User Waypoint Information Page Intersection Information Page j During ground operations the aircrafts position is displayed in reference to taxiways runways and airport features When panning over the airport features such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown 5 2 1 1 Decluttering The DCLTR soft key declutter label advances to DCLTR 1 DCLTR 2 and
286. n amp Alerts mee PL opp CA 5 E Xn RIO Figure 5 23 XM Category List Figure 5 24 XM Category Soft Keys Sec 7 Symbols Press ENT to display the list of channels for the highlighted category in the Channels window 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing OR 1 Press CATGRY and then the CAT or CAT soft keys to increment up or down one category at a time Sec 8 Glossary Appendix A No x Press ALL to show the channels for all categories Use the large and small MFD knobs to select desired channel Index UO Appendix B Press ENT to save the selection or press the small MFD knob to cancel selection 5 26 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 3 3 2 Selecting a Sirius XM Satellite Radio Channel The Channel feature is used to navigate through the channels in the selected category z Active Channel Number Artist Name Category Active Channel Name Song Title New Selected Channel mul t fa e fa n jeuontppy 1 While viewing the XM Radio page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob and then turn the small MFD knob to select the desired channel 2 Press ENT to make the highlighted channel the Active Channel NOTE A delay of several seconds may occur when selecting a channel _ The listed title may end before the radio begins playing the current Active Channel material
287. n the Map or Weather WX pages 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight a SIGMET AIRMET line Press ENT 2 The Waypoint Information page for that line will now be shown Press the WX soft key to view weather information 4 126 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC IMFDRMATION Bc ami ATRMET AIPMET TURENE KS AN I Press the ENT bey to retern to the brie poge gt zZ T E e rar pJezey Y 29 Figure 4 108 GFDS Weather AIRMETs SIGMETs Detail and Legend When enabled the following AIRMETS are available for display e Icing e Turbulence e IFR conditions e Mountain obscuration e Surface winds SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range The SIGMET AIRMET Viewing Range option allows you to select the map x range where at and below that value SIGMET AIRMET products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected SIGMET AIRMET will not be shown Where a value such as 250 NM is a selected SIGMET AIRMET data will be shown at map ranges of the selected 2 value 250 NM and lower 1 While viewing a WX Data Link Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Weather Setup option and press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight SIG AIR Viewing Range 3 Turn the small MFD knob to high
288. n the page and the small MFD knob selects individual characters or values for the highlighted cursor location Sec 3 MFD Sec 4 Lla starr Hazard Avoidance Large Outer MFD Knob Selects the MFD page group When the cursor is ON the large MFD knob moves the cursor to highlight available fields 1 4 1 4 MFD Bezel Keys Additional Features Range RNG Pressing the Range arrow keys changes the range on the Map pages The Up arrow zooms out The Down arrow zooms in The keys also aid in scrolling up and down text pages Ann m Annun Sec 6 Alart amp Alerts Cyn hoc Symbols Menu Displays a context sensitive list of options This list allows the user to access additional features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages Clacar Glossary Enter ENT Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry amp Clear CLR Erases information cancels entries or removes page menus Pressing and holding the CLR key displays the Navigation Map 1 page opendix A Nin veli Appendix B Index 1 18 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 1 4 2 Using the Soft Key Controls The soft keys are located along the bottoms of the displays The soft key labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being displayed The bezel keys below the soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key MFD functions indicated by the soft key labels vary depending on the page
289. nal o External Video is an optional function that displays video provided by an z externally mounted video source on the aircraft 1 While viewing the Map function turn the small MFD knob to the third Navigation Map page Cy ictnan System Current Video Source n Display of External Video Source 2 Map Display S E SPLIT SCREEN 3 HAP W oo E aia TOPO TERRAIN MEI Figure 3 35 External Video 5 2 The External Video page will show the external video on the top half of the is MFD and a Navigation Map will be shown on the lower half _ 3 To select the other external video source press the MENU key x 2 PAGE EMU E DPT IONS Mae satur E Mensure Berrina Distonee g Selected Video Source S Pres the HFD knob te return to bose pogi E Figure 3 36 Aux Mode System Setup Page Menu lt 4 Turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Video selection and then press ENT 3 30 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN ims 3 2 Aux Mode Pages The Aux mode provides pages for System Setup XM Information if installed 5 and system Status 3 2 1 System Settings 500 600 system settings are managed from the Aux Mode System Setup Page The following settings can be changed _ Display Brightness Mode and Level e Airspeeds Glide REE V V V1 and V V2 PFD Options Wind Vector Nav Status Styles and Temp Reference Dual Unit Synchronization CDI Baro and some Databases Dat
290. nce Features gt SSal Appendix A Index Cumh SYMDOIS TOC A GARMIN DoS PMI CCN AO NER ET E o TT 2 9 2 3 1 Extreme ATUDE PCR M 2 11 E MP lnc NNNM NORTE 2 13 2 4 1 Setting the Altitude Bug and Alerter ssss 2 13 2 4 2 Altitude Alerting eerror rrer PUE QU SETS ys ER 2 14 2 4 3 Changing Barometric Setting sse 2 15 2 4 4 Minimum Descent Altitude Decision Height Alerting 2 15 2 5 Vertical Speed V S Indicato E IT OTT 2 18 2 6 Horizontal Situational Indicator ssseeeeee 2 19 2 6 1 Setting the Heading Bug 2 20 2 6 2 Tira Qe ERICH DO Gusencoccsrtesitieiem crane tunisie eue to dte Grice 2 21 2 7 Course Deviation Indicator sseeeeennnns 2 21 2 7 1 Changing CDI Sources 2 22 2 12 Saee ECC E 2 23 2 7 3 Vertical Deviation Indicator VDI seen 2 24 2 7 4 PUIG CUI ases cse tre cts tuts icr ur as tS UID Greets 2 25 2 8 Supplemental Flight Dal disssesecekes esten ister nier wate tee uuu 2 27 2 8 1 Bearing POINTE cT a n iaa 2 27 2 8 2 Temperature Sd cs eroe EAREN 2 29 2 8 3 Wind WOCUONS scece cesiuedstentuedeeudenatssenteudsucacesseveddmedsuedceasseetiueses 2 29 2 8 4 DME NAIC AT ODE eee REN eee rp iet tence ei ren 2 30 2 8 5 Marker Beacon Annunciations eeeeeeeeeee 2 30 2 8 6 Miscompare ANMUNCIQUONS sssscssen ceca d dus actae te tek ent ee ora bes 2 31 29 EIS MM SN
291. nd on the AUX System Status page SafeTaxi information appears in white and yellow text The EFFECTIVE date appears in white when data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date The EXPIRES date appears in white when data is current and in yellow when expired SafeTaxi REGION NOT AVAILABLE appears in white if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card Expired SateTaxi data is never disabled D 2 foe ct e 5 2 Laly 9 Uunuuv 9 sioqui g AJeSSO D 9 9S y xipuaddy X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 21 A 10C GARMIN 5 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment amp NOTE Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM WX Satellite Weather products The optional Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilots and passengers enjoyment The GDL 69A can receive Sirius XM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any altitude throughout the Continental U S Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver Sirius XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances e Without having to constantly search for new stations Based on signals from satellites c S a lt coverage far exceeds land based transmissions Sirius XM Satellite Radio services are subscription
292. nd the autopilot will turn a to and maintain the selected heading Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the autopilot heading mode MFD Selected Heading Box Figure 5 31 Adjusting the Heading Bug 5 4 3 Altitude Capture Optional Upgrade The GDU 620 altitude bug may be used to automatically capture a selected altitude with certain autopilots Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual and autopilot system documentation for instructions on how to use the altitude lt preselect feature if available c 5 a lt Annun Adjust the altitude bug in the normal manner when using the altitude capture 6 interface Some autopilot installations support arming and disarming of the selected altitude using the ALT key on the PFD The PFD knob window will indicate when this function is available The selected altitude may be alternately armed or disarmed by pressing and holding the ALT key on the PFD bezel HOLD HOLD Glossary TO DISARM 5 32 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 4 4 Autopilot Navigation The HSI may be used in conjunction with the appropriate navigation modes of supported autopilots The GDU 620 provides the autopilot with the selected course and lateral vertical deviations The GDU 620 acts as a switching source between the installed navigation sources e g GPS VLOC 1 2 The navigation
293. ndby Mode Once the aircraft is airborne TIS switches from Standby to Operating lt Mode and the GDU 620 begins to display traffic information 4 38 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page 1 Turn the large MFD knob to select the Map Page Group 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the Traffic Map Page 3 Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode Select the OPERATE soft key to begin displaying traffic OR 1 Press the MENU key 2 Select Operate Mode shown if TIS is in Standby Mode and then press the ENT key Operating Mode pJezey Y 29 gt z 2 T E e a gt Traffic Advisory Aircraft is 1200 feet above climbing and moving in the direction of the line Proximity Advisory Aircraft is 3000 feet above descending and moving in the direction of the line TRAFFIC HAF SET OPERATE Figure 4 30 Traffic Map Page TIS 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 39 Sec 4 A TOC GARMIN 4 7 2 2 TIS Symbology z TIS Symbol Description 7 EL Non heme Traffic Proximity Advisory PA A lt scat Advisory TA 3 E Traffic Advisory Off Scale 5 te No E r Table 4 16 TIS Traffic Symbols A Traffic Advisory TA alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft Closing rate distance and vertical separation meet TA criteria A Traffic Advisory that is beyond t
294. ne on the Map or Weather WX pages 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight a SIGMET AIRMET line Press ENT 72 The Waypoint Information page for that line will now be shown Press the WX soft key to view weather information INFORHATION SIGHET AIRHET 9 toc mS pg N S oco gt lt Press the EMT kep to return to the bose poge ADVISORY Figure 4 123 FIS B AIRMETs SIGMETs Detail and Legend When enabled the following AIRMETS are available for display e Icing e Turbulence e FR conditions e Mountain obscuration e Surface winds 4 144 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 11 5 6 AIREP PIREP Pilot Weather Reports PIREPs provide timely weather information for a particular route of flight When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast Air Traffic Control ATC facilities are required to solicit PIREPs A PIREP may contain non forecast adverse weather conditions such as low in flight visibility icing conditions wind shear and turbulence PIREPs are issued as either Routine UA or Urgent UUA 1 While viewing a FIS B Weather Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the PIREPS Viewing Range value 3 Turn the small MFD knob t
295. ness and Warning System E TAWS B Optional TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System is an optional feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain z CFID TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft TAWS satisfies TSO C151c Class B requirements for certification Class B TAWS is required for all Part 91 turbine aircraft operations with six or more i passenger seats and for Part 135 turbine aircraft operations with six to nine passenger seats FAR Parts 91 223 135 154 44 1 TAWS B Requirements TAWS requires the following to operate properly e A valid terrain obstacle Sec4 Hazard Avoidance e A valid 3 D GPS position solution E94 4 TAWS B Limitations WARNING The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies Garmin accurately processes and cross validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data E 4 TAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft Refer to AFM for procedures for TAWS alerts TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database The data undergoes verification
296. ng Level is found When no data is displayed for a given altitude the data for that altitude has not been received or is out of date and has been removed from the display New data appears at the next update Sec4 5 te No E r BOVIS evels _ Freezing Level Viewing Range The Freezing Level Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Freezing Level weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Freezing Level Data will not be shown Where a value such as 100 NM is selected Freezing Level data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 100 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 2 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Frz Lvl Viewing Range value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 86 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 8 24 XM Icing The Icing product shows a graphic view of the current icing environment z in four categories light moderate severe and extreme not specific to aircralt type The Icing product is not a forecast but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis S
297. ng transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems TAS and TIS Aircraft without P altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data Be or climb descent indication a A NOTE TIS and TAS are mutually exclusive The type of traffic systems that is installed is determined by the traffic page display in the upper left corner of the MFD If Traffic Information Service TIS is configured TIS will be displayed in the upper left corner of the MFD x oN un amp oO O i T5 Traffic Information Service TIS is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link TIS receives traffic information from ground stations and is updated every five seconds The GDU 620 displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7 5 NM pac E radius from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using three different symbols 417 2 1 Traffic Map Page 2 E The Traffic Map Page is configured to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircrafts current position and altitude without clutter from the _ basemap Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is z no valid heading The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page When the aircraft is on the ground TIS automatically enters Sta
298. nimums window the source and selected value are shown See section 2 4 4 on Minimum Descent Altitude MDA or Decision Height DH in the PFD section and section 3 5 1 3 ERs for more detail In the Active Leg Info box in the lower part of the display the Bes Course with beginning and ending waypoints Active Leg En Route Safe Altitude ESA and Route ESA are shown METAR information is in the METAR section of the Hazard Avoidance section DTK Distance and ETA Digital Chart from the Previous Leg Available For Waypoint ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAr DTK JEN ae X Graphic IMETARS Current Leg Flight Plan Legs Baro MINIMUMS e source BE ALTITUDE ACTIVE LEG INFO Active Leg Window ACTIVE LEG ESA 1 ROUTE ESA 7 ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN Lu ADVISORY Figure 3 90 Flight Page 1 Active Flight Plan 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 67 A TOC GARMIN 3 3 1 1 Active Flight Plan Detail The active flight plan is shown on the first page of the Flight Plan page group Further information may be available for each waypoint as shown by the INFO 2 or WX soft keys The WX soft key will only appear if a data link receiver is installed and there is a Weather subscription 1 Press the MFD knob and then use the large and small MFD knobs to highlight waypoints in the flight plan 2 Press the INFO soft key if available to view information about the highlighted waypoint 3 Press the WX soft key
299. nk Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The Weather Setup option will be highlighted Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Data Viewing Range Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value lt 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 4 122 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 10 7 PRECIP Legend The PRECIP Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated version of the PRECIP legend in the top right region of the MFD The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key W JSAS JIS ddd Z 2996 Figure 4 104 GFDS PRECIP Legend 3IN IVS 1 While viewing a GFDS Weather Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The Weather Setup option will be highlighted Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight PRECIP Legend 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Off or On Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar pv 31894 jeuonip G 38S Sol 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the WX page or turn the large M
300. nnunciation depends on the location of the NAV STATUS information as shown in the following figure amp Alerts tibt NAV Status Style 1 NAV Status Style 2 Figure 5 35 GPSS Mode Annunciations 5 4 5 Flight Director Display 2 If autopilot flight director commands are interlaced to the G500 600 they will be presented as a single cue flight director on the PFD Control of the flight director is accomplished via the autopilot flight director controller there are no pilot controls or adjustments for the flight director on the G500 600 Glossary Index 5 34 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC The G500 600 system limits the distance the flight director pitch commands may deviate from the aircraft attitude icon In the event that the pitch command provided by the autopilot flight director is greater than the distance allowed by the G500 600 the command bars will be displayed at the maximum distance allowed by the G500 600 As the aircraft pitch changes to satisfy the command bars the bars will continue to be displayed at the maximum distance from the aircraft attitude icon until the aircraft pitch deviation is within the command display limit ddd C 29S di 298 2UPepIOAV piezeH SVT Off SVT On Figure 5 36 Flight Director Bars Showing Aircraft Pitch 5 4 6 Vertical Speed Control The GDU 620 vertical speed bug may be used to control vertical speed with
301. nt on current state and press the ENT key WY o2 4 4 5 6 Five Hundred Aural Alert E The purpose of the aural alert message Five hundred isto provide an advisory alert that the aircraft is 500 feet above terrain When the aircraft descends within 500 feet of terrain the aural message Five hundred is generated There are no 2 display annunciations or pop up alerts that accompany the aural message 7 NOTE The five hundred aural callout provided by TAWS B is not in relation a to the optional radar altimeter if installed E Appendix B Index 4 22 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 4 5 7 Negative Climb Rate After Take Off Alert NCR The Negative Climb Rate NCR After Take Off alert also referred to as Altitude Loss After Take Off provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude closing upon terrain after takeoff The aural message Dont Sink is given for NCR alerts accompanied by an annunciation and a pop up terrain from an airport 2 alert on the display NCR alerting is only active when departing and when the following conditions are met Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 The NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO C151c are shown below 1000
302. o highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted lOAY D 4 N aA 2 a Pe 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option a te a 1 imit Lat Product Age rac CUA far next Itam l afg Press ENT for PIRER AIREP bfo Cursor Location Info Selected PIREP PIREP Detail FIS 8 WEATHER HAP 1 fi Li l LEGEND ADVISORY Figure 4 124 FIS B AIREPs PIREPs 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 145 A TOC GARMIN Viewing Textual AIREPs PIREPs 2 Textual AIREPs PIREPs can be viewed by selecting an AIREP PIREP on the 5 Map or Weather WX pages 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight a AIREP PIREP Press ENT 2 Press ENT or the the small MFD knob to return to the Weather page Sec4 S N o lt Presa the ENT key to return to the bose pose Figure 4 125 FIS B AIREPs PIREPs Detail and Legend 4 146 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 11 5 7 METARs A NOTE Atmospheric pressure reported for METARS is given in hectopascals hPa except in the United States where it is reported in inches of mercury in Hg Temperatures are reported in Celsius A NOTE METAR information is only di
303. ob to highlight Enable Ground Clutter Suppression GCS and then press ENT 2 To deactivate Ground Clutter Suppression repeat the sequence 4 9 Ground Mapping and Interpretation A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain This can be a useful tool for verifying aircraft position A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode Different colors are also used to represent the intensity levels The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the following table Use of the GAIN and TILT controls will help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily As previously discussed the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity displayed Ground Map Mode Color 3rd Party Radars GWX Radars Intensity re EE Table 4 26 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels Figure 4 90 GWX Radar Weather Mode Scale 3rd Party Radar Weather Mode Scale 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 111 A TOC GARMIN 1 Press the MODE soft key 5 2 Press the GROUND soft key to place the radar in Ground Map mode A pop up regarding caution in operating radar on the ground will appear Turn the large MFD knob to highlight YES and then press ENT
304. obstacles can be drawn without overlapping they will be depicted individually Obstacle databases created for software version 7 00 or later may include HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed Hazardous Obstacle Transmission HOT Lines are those power lines that that have been identified as a potential hazard to aircraft The installed obstacle database type 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 17 A TOC GARMIN can be verified on the System Status page Power line data is available for the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico Foreword Obstacles Between 100 and 1000 feet of Aircraft Sec 1 System Obstacles Within 100 feet or Above Aircraft PFD N V ap N Figure 3 21 Navigation Map Obstacle Data _ amp Lat Lon Viewing Range ae E The Lat Lon Viewing Range option selects whether Lat Lon line is shown on lt the MFD Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts Lat Lon Reference Information Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Figure 3 22 Navigation Map Lat Lon Information Appendix A Appendix B Index 3 18 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Field of View The Field of View represented by the synthetic terrain data used for the Synthetic Vision Technology SVT option when enabled can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page lateral image Two dashed lines forming a V sh
305. ode the chart must be redrawn zoomed in or out or another chart selected before the switch from Day to Night is seen i D Je l l y xipueddy xepul 4 VIn rl zl F g Xipuedawv 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 17 Sec 4 Hazard Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 MFD c 5 a lt Sec 7 Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B i GARMIN 5 2 SafeTaxi SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming in on airports at close range The airport display on the map reveals runways with numbers taxiways with identifying letters numbers airport Hot Spots and airport landmarks including ramps buildings control towers and other prominent features Resolution is greater at lower map ranges When the aircraft location is within the screen boundary including within SafeTaxi ranges an aircraft symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced position awareness Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways and or complex ramp areas Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion Selected Hot Wf Spot Press ENT for Details Foreword System Avoidance Taxiway Identificatio
306. ointer One bar displacement as shown below is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional Slip Skid Indicator 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 9 JOM2J0 e UJa1s g 99S JIUEPIOAY HIN ddd piezeH as C298 Y 29S S9Jn 89J jeuonippv y xipueddy ieSso D S OQWAS SUe v 9 9 aS 29S unhuuv 9 299 G 29 Xopu g xipueddy Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun U wo WY Sec 3 Sec 7 Sec 8 Appendix B A TOC GARMIN Roll Pointer Roll Scale Zero Foreword Slip Skid Indicator System Figure 2 14 Slip Skid Indication The standby mechanical Attitude Indicator in your aircratt is either a Ground Pointer or a Roll Pointer configuration The GDU 620 Attitude Indicator has been configured in either a Ground Pointer or a Roll Pointer configuration to match the configuration of your aircrafts standby Attitude Indicator Ground Sky Pointer mode is configured during installation and can not be changed by the pilot In an aircraft with an Attitude Indicator that has a Ground Pointer the pointer above the Roll Scale shifts with the roll or bank angle of the aircraft to keep the Roll Scale Zero Pointer pointing towards the ground Features Roll Pointer Roll Scale Zero Pointer Roll Scale amp Alerts Symbols Figure 2 15 Attitude Indicator with a Ground Pointer configuration in a left turn ossary In an aircraft with
307. ome Report known as an Aviation Routine Weather Report is the standard format for current weather observations METARs are updated hourly and are considered current METARs typically contain information about the temperature dew point wind precipitation cloud cover cloud heights visibility and barometric pressure They can also contain information on precipitation amounts lightning and other critical data METARS are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar Figure 4 49 XM Weather Graphic METARs METAR Viewing Range The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where lt at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected METARs will _ not be shown Where a value such as 150 NM is selected METAR data will be 2 shown at map ranges of the selected value 150 NM and lower 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 73 A TOC GARMIN 1 While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the METAR Data Viewing Range value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted amp 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the previously viewed page or turn the large MFD knob to the nex
308. or VSI 1 21 2 18 Video 3 51 VNAV 2 24 2 28 VNV 8 7 Voice alert 4 43 Volume 1 10 3 42 5 25 5 28 VOR 1 16 2 3 2 20 2 22 2 27 3 1 3 6 3 11 3 25 3 26 3 37 4 12 5 19 7 1 VORTAC 7 1 Vspeeds 2 8 3 33 W WAAS 1 8 2 24 Warm front 4 77 4 78 Warnings ii WATCH 4 92 4 109 Waypoint information 3 70 3 72 3 76 5 19 Waypoint selection 3 71 Waypoint weather 3 76 Weather 3 21 3 76 4 52 4 112 4 136 Weather legend 4 53 4 58 4 60 Weather mapping 4 97 Weather product 3 22 4 52 4 55 4 58 4 63 4 122 4 138 5 23 Weather radar 1 2 4 1 4 89 Weather symbols 4 55 Wind 1 21 2 29 3 2 3 11 3 13 3 31 3 34 4 56 4 57 4 70 4 73 A 75 4 127 4 130 4 132 4 144 4 147 4 149 4 151 7 7 Winds aloft 4 56 4 75 4 132 4 149 4 15 Winds aloft altitude 4 133 4 149 Wind speed 3 13 Wind vector 1 21 2 29 3 11 3 13 3 31 3 34 7 7 WX 500 1 9 4 152 B wa ckc UAI SN NINDMADIO DJ0M9JO J 9JUBDIOAV T D CD m c D ca 235 C 298 G 299 9 29S A a 8 GARMIN WX soft key 3 68 X XM 3 41 3 42 4 52 5 22 XM channel categories 5 26 XM entertainment radio 5 22 XM radio activation 5 22 XM radio channel presets 5 29 XM radio channels 5 27 XM radio volume 5 28 XM Satellite Radio 1 10 5 22 XM troubleshooting 5 30 XM weather 3 68 4 52 XM weather radio 1 10 XIK 2 22 Z Zero pitch line 5 41 Foreword Sec 1 System Sec 2 P
309. ord PFD MFD Nn w Ed gt 19 lt P LL amp Alerts Symbols Appendix A Index TOC A GARMIN SVT offers a three dimensional view of terrain and obstacles Terrain and or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft in flight are shaded yellow or red 5 38 NOTE SVT will become disabled if the databases necessary to display SVT are unavailable generating a GDU DB ERR or SVT DISABLED alert or AHRS or GPS data is unavailable rme VIP f Aen l 3100 ee ay lt 2980 FA 900 apan Figure 5 39 Synthetic Vision Imagery PFD Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 5 1 SVT Operation SVT is activated from the PFD using the soft keys located along the bottom edge of the display Pressing the soft keys turn the related function on or off J DION SVT functions are displayed on three levels of soft keys The PFD soft key leads into the PFD function soft keys including synthetic vision Pressing the SYN VIS soft key enables synthetic vision and displays the SYN TERR HRZN HDG and APTSIGNS soft keys The BACK soft key returns to the previous level of soft keys T HRZN and APTSIGNS soft keys are dependent upon the state of the SYN TERR soft key When Synthetic Terrain is deactivated the SYN TERR soft key appears illuminated while the remaining SVT soft keys are unavailable for lt dd 2
310. oup and then turn the small MFD knob to the Traffic Map Page 2 Select the STANDBY or OPERATE soft key to switch between modes The mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page OR 1 Press the MENU key 2 Select Operate mode or Standby mode whether airborne or on the ground 3 Press the ENT key ddd LWaysis pJOMalo4 99S C 298 HIA 298 NOTE An alert will be generated when Standby is selected and the aircraft is in the air The annunciations indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed gt zZ 9 T EI e a gt pJezey Y 29 SoJnjeo euontppy G 99S y xipuaddy Alesso s S OQUWAS s y 8 9 23g 29 unuuv 9 299 X9pu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 45 A sius IM GARMIN A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory Annunciation indicates distance in NM altitude separation in hundreds of feet and altitude trend arrow climbing descending System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory Annunciation indicates distance in NM altitude separation in hundreds of feet and altitude trend arrow climbing descending The system distance units are set to Metric or Imperial and are shown as such in
311. ource Selection 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Altitude Minimums value Turn the _ large and small MFD knobs to change the Altitude Minimums value and then amp press ENT to activate the selected value SOURCE 4RAD ALTITUDE mul t te e L a n Jeuonippy Figure 5 15 Minimums Altitude Selection Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA The Minimum altitude will be available in the 5 Altitude Alerter pu In dual installations the minimums alerting altitude value may be set trom either GDU 620 and will be synchronized on both units NOTE If you highlight the Minimums Altitude field on the FPL page and f press the CLR key it will turn the minimums functionality off n 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 15 A TOC GARMIN 5 1 5 4 Viewing Chart NOTAMs fan active NOTAM Notice to Airmen exists for the selected chart the NOTAM soit key will be available Press the NOTAM sott key to view the NOTAM or select View NOTAMs from the Chart Options Menu Dh ORPAT ION Press the ENT key to return to the bose poge Tu nm 2 TE Lc nS oO L lt Figure 5 16 Chart NOTAM 5 16 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 5 1 5 5 Day Night View The Chart pages can be displayed on a white or black background tor day or night viewing The
312. ourly but some site are more frequent Special updates are done as conditions warrant METARs typically contain information about the temperature dew point wind precipitation cloud cover cloud heights visibility and barometric pressure They can also contain information on precipitation amounts lightning and other critical data METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them Cursor Location IFR METAR VFR METAR Selected METAR LIFR GFOS WEATHER HEP 1 LEGEND 4 130 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Viewing Textual METARs Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather WX pages 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag Press ENT 2 The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown Press the WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint IDENT FACILITY CITY WAYPOINT INFORMATION INFO MAP RWY FREQ APT DIR DT RDVISORI Figure 4 112 GFDS Weather METARs Detail and Legend METAR Viewing Range The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where gt zZ 9 T E e rar pJezey Y 29 at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected 2 MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected METARs will not be shown Where a value su
313. ovides details about a particular waypoint You can show a waypoint by selecting it by Ident Facility Name or by City The Map window shows the selected waypoint in the center of the map The Range keys zoom in and out on the map The Info window at the bottom of the display shows the Bearing and Distance from your present position to the selected waypoint as well as its region and Lat Lon coordinates Facility Identifier Facility Type E Facility Name z Facility Location Bearing amp Distance Map Region s to Wpt from F Present Position Lat Lon Map Orientation Map Window o E a Wpot Weather 2 Info Map Soft Key ALERTS s Soft Key RwylFreq Soft Key Airport Directory Soft Key Figure 3 96 Flight Plan Waypoint Info Map Page E NOTE Waypoint information is shown on the second page of the Flight Plan page group 3 0 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 3 2 1 Selecting a Waypoint 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information Info Map page of the FPL page group press the MFD knob and use the large and small MFD knobs to move the cursor to select the identifier for the waypoint IOJ 3 ploma 28S UJa1s g ddd C 298 e2UPepIOAV piezeH SoJn eo euonippy Figure 3 97 Waypoint Selection 2 Press the ENT key to select the waypoint OR 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information Info Map page of the FPL page group press the small MFD knob suly 8 unuuv sio
314. own by the GDU 620 It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit WARNING The altitude calculated by GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters such as the output from the GDC 74A 74B Air Data Computer or other altimeters in aircraft GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation Always use pressure altitude displayed by the GDU 620 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft WARNING Do not use outdated database information Databases used in the G500 600 systems must be updated regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own risk WARNING Do not use basemap land and water data information for primary navigation Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to enhance situational awareness Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC WARNING Traffic information shown on the GDU 620 Multi Function Display is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting traffic WARNING Do not use data link weather information
315. ownload the data to the data cards from the appropriate web site 2 Insert the Database SD card in an empty card slot of the GDU 620 The SD card containing the ChartView FliteCharts SafeTaxi or any other database except for the Jeppesen Aviation Database must be inserted into the lower slotonthe _ GDU 620 2 3 Apply power to the G500 600 System View the MFD power up splash screen Check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the splash screen When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases an in progress message may be seen If this message is present wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding Some databases can take up to 15 minutes to update 4 Acknowledge the Power up Page agreement by pressing the ENT key or the right most soft key If a database is highlighted in yellow it is either expired or the G500 600 can not determine the date SATEN G600 i A MINI PL ERE cb ee lii BAT TI W Hoseaninnd dH A bstacle ARG Expires Eo JAN cil e lerrain 1311 ela ldsi i II E E Ap 4 L Direclur IEEE IR MUN SUE Figure A 5 Database Information on the Splash Screen T 5 Use the large MFD knob to select the AUX page group and then the md MFD knob to reach the System Status Page 6 Press the DBASE soft key to place the cursor in the DATABASE window 7 Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the list and check that all databases are current and there are no errors
316. parture The desired course between the active from and to waypoints destination default distance The great circle distance from the present position to a destination waypoint Distance Measuring Equipment Departure Procedure departure disabled Desired Track Excessive Descent Rate elevation Electromagnetic Interference en route The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or right of the desired course on an active flight plan or direct to enter error En route Safe Altitude Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time En Route Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN oF degrees Fahrenheit FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communication Commission FCST forecast FD flight director FIS B Flight Information Services Broadcast FISDL Flight Information Service Data Link FLTA Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance FPL flight plan FREQ frequency FRZ freezing FSS Flight Service Station ft foot feet G S GS glideslope GDC Garmin Air Data Computer GDL Garmin Satellite Data Link GDU Garmin Display Unit GEO geographic GLS Global Navigation Satellite Landing System GMA Garmin Audio Panel System GMT Greenwich Mean Time GMU Garmin Magnetometer Unit GPS Global Positioning System GPSS GPS Roll Steering Ground Speed The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground position Ground Track see Track GRS Garmin Reference System GS
317. pn um y mum sree mr Tu GES Ha War Dans UPLOAD COMPLETE ERECT 2 After the update is complete press the ENT key to continue normal operation 1 14 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN B 1 4 System Operation NOTE Refer to Section 6 for detailed descriptions of all alerts and annunciations 1 4 1 Pilot Controls The GDU 620 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the time required to access functionality Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and are comprised of a PFD knob MFD dual concentric knobs bezel keys and soft keys 1 4 1 1 PFD Knob Pressing the PFD knob performs the default action for the selected mode Refer to the PFD Bezel Keys section for details Heading Course Altitude Vertical Speed Barometer Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode UCDIOAY DJEZP pJeZeH p 28g SoJn1eo jeuonippy gJ Figure 1 16 Selection Modes Adjusted with the PFD Knob sue v 9 9 29 Uunuuv NOTE After 10 seconds of inactivity in another mode the PFD knob selected mode will revert to Heading mode SJOQWAS 1 Press the desired PFD mode selection key HDG CRS ALT V S or BARO A window will be displayed near the upper left corner of the HSI showing the current value for that mode 2 Turn the PFD knob to select the desired value Q ac 6 YS Ayesso s y xipusday Xapu ae ae g xipuadd y 190 00601 02 Rev H Ga
318. quJ S LS 2 Turn the small MFD knob counterclockwise Figure 3 98 Waypoint Category Selection 3 Turn the small MFD knob to show FPL NRST or RECENT 4 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the desired airport and then press ENT ieSso D 8 299 y xipuaddy X PU g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 71 adi 92S 7 22S G 298 9 29 A TOC GARMIN 3 3 2 2 Waypoint Runway Frequency Information Detail More detailed information about a selected waypoint is available by pressing 2 the RWY FREQ or APT DIR soft keys on the Waypoint Information page The current destination waypoint is the default item shown You may select a different Ident Facility or Location In the Runway window you may view information about the runways In the Frequency window a scroll bar is shown on the right side of the window when more frequencies are available 5 32 IPTE RA EHI Facility Information Window Runway Information Window FREGUEMC LES Airport Frequency Window BERIT EHEORHATEION INFU HA RW PRED AT OIR Figure 3 99 Flight Plan Waypoint Info Detail 3 72 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Ident Facility City Selection The current destination Identifier Facility Type with icon Facility Name and City location are shown in the top window of the Flight Plan mode Waypoint Information page The default is the Nearest airport i
319. r Garmin dealer for CONFIG configuration error service ARINC 708 e ARINC 708 e Contact your Garmin dealer for CONFIG contiguration error service AUD NOT AVAIL Audio system not e Contact your Garmin dealer for x available service de AUD SYS FAIL Audio system failure e Contact your Garmin dealer for service S T CAL LOST e Calibration Data Lost e Contact your Garmin dealer for service CNFG e GDU 1 2 airframe Contact your Garmin dealer for S amp MISMATCH configuration settings service a2 disagree CNFG MODULE GDU configuration Contact your Garmin dealer for module is service inoperative 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 6 3 A TOC GARMIN Alert Message Description Action DATALINK GDL 88 ADS B e Contact your Garmin dealer for Failure Unable to service transmit ADS B messages GDL 88 ADS B fault ADS B fault UAT receiver ADS B fault 1090 receiver GDL 88 needs service GDL 88 ADS B is not transmitting position Check GPS devices GDL 88 control panel Sec 2 Sec 1 MFD PFD System Foreword Sec 3 Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance input fault Check transponder mode GDL 88 ADS B fault Pressure altitude source inoperative Sec 5 Additional Features zo Ce pue vy LIE lt I c5 GDL 88 external traffic system inoperative or connection lost GDL 88 configuration module needs service Sec
320. r Legends The LEGEND soft key displays a pop up legend of the currently used weather products Pressing the LEGEND soft key again the MFD knob the ENT or CLR keys will remove the legend 1 Afull page legend can be selected by selecting the Weather Legend option in the XM Weather Map Menu or pressing the LEGEND soft key on the Weather Map Page The legend displayed will match the selected weather products Turn the large or small MFD knobs to scroll through the legend if necessary 70000 FT CITY FOFLCADT Dato T ime COUNTY WARNINGS d nra 3 BEVEFE THURDERSTDEH TORheDO M FLOOC Mir p ING jaa TURELLENCE LFE HTH Es cte SURFACE WIRDS 4 58 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H Cover A GARMIN FRELZIMG LOVOLS OTI Cees T me WINGS ALOF US Gebers Ties CH Nu TET 12000 D KNOTS 14000 5 KNOTS OF LESS E pnm TANNI 108 KNOTS 08 LESS 50 KNOTS OR LCSS TEINS POTENTIAL Saha T ima TURRREHLE Date Tine Figure 4 37 Weather Legends 2 An abbreviated legend may be displayed on the upper right side of a WX Data Link Map page for the applicable weather products when selected in the Page Menu options for Weather 4 8 5 XM NEXRAD WSR 88D or NEXRAD NEXt generation RADar is a network of 158 high resolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National Weather Service NWS NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and
321. radars Radar Altimeter Video Sources Stormscope 1 2 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN System Feature Approved for Class 1 Aircraft typically piston singles under 6 000 Ibs Approved for Class 2 Aircraft typically piston twins and turbine aircraft under 6 000 Ibs Approved for Class 3 Aircraft typically piston or turbine aircraft between 6 000 Ibs and 12 500 Ibs Software design assurance level M Garmin SVT Synthetic Vision Technology Ta GAD 43 43e replaces old A P gyro attitude with Optional Standard AHRS references GAD 43e adds additional o interfaces with other avionics Ju GWX 68 70 Radar interface radar LRU sold Optional Standard separately S sus Interface support for other ARINC 708 radars A RVSM capable on select aircraft l Internal TAWS B terrain alerting PER Table 1 1 G500 G600 System Comparison 1 1 1 Standard System Line Replaceable Units LRU This guide covers the operation of the GDU 620 display as integrated in the X G500 600 system The G500 600 Avionics Display System is an avionics suite designed to replace the traditional flight instrument cluster The system combines __ primary flight instrumentation navigational information and a moving map all displayed on dual color screens The G500 600 system is composed of sub units or Line Replaceable Units LRUs LRUs have a modular design and can be installed directly behind the instrument panel or in a
322. rature is from a standard atmosphere TEHP REFERENCE Figure 2 39 Outside Air Temperature Selection 2 8 3 Wind Vectors When selected wind vector information is displayed in a window on the PFD to the left of the HSI The Wind Vector style is configured in the Aux Mode System Setup page While on the ground the Wind Vector window will indicate No Wind Data NO WIND DATA Figure 2 40 Wind Vector with No Wind Data Four styles are available as shown below Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Style 4 m 14 Figure 2 41 Wind Vector Style 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 29 A Ex GARMIN 2 8 4 DME Indication When selected DME information is displayed in a window in the lower lett corner of the PFD The distance to the station and the Nav source used are shown Foreword DME Information DME Hold Annunciation System U D WY Selected DME Set Hold for Selected DME Figure 2 42 DME Indication NOTE The capability of providing DME information requires installation of the GAD 43e 2 8 5 Marker Beacon Annunciations Sec 3 MF Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance A visual annunciation of marker beacons will be shown on the display when the aircraft flies over a marker beacon The marker beacon annunciation will appear to the left of the altitude tape below the terrain annunciator on the PFD Sec 5 Additional Features Outer Marker Beacon Indication Sec 6 Annun
323. reas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting With the antenna tilt set to zero in this illustration the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 NM The curvature of the earth can also be a factor especially at range settings of 150 NM or more gt lt o e T A a gt sainjea PUO pp sUelv 8 unuuy S OQUWAS L 298 Figure 4 68 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth y xipueddy Alesso 5 8 29 Xopu g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 91 G 29 9 29S A TOC GARMIN 4 9 1 3 Radar Signal Attenuation The phenomena of weather attenuation needs to be kept in mind whenever operating the weather radar When the radar signal is transmitted it is progressively absorbed and scattered making the signal weaker This weakening _ or attenuation is caused by two primary sources distance and precipitation Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the amount of radar energy at a distance from the antenna is inversely proportional to the square of the distance The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills the amp radar beam will be one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away This would appear to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer Internal circuitry within the GWX system compensates z for much of this distance attenu
324. receive data are white Products that are part of the active subscription and have data are green DATA RADIO SERVICE CLASS TR i tn m n WEATHER PROOUCTS TH nm 2 TE Lc ND o L lt XH IMFU ORHATIUON i 1 In the AUX page group turn the small MFD knob to display XM Information 2 The LOCK soft key is used to lock your Sirius XM Satellite Radio subscription activation This is only used for the initial subscription or to make a change NOTE Refer to the GDL 69 69A Sirius XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190 00355 04 Rev G or later for further information 5 24 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H ES GARMIN EBA 5 3 3 Sirius XM Satellite Radio Entertainment Audio entertainment is available through the Sirius XM Satellite Radio Service when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A The GDU 620 serves as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A Sirius XM Satellite Radio allows you to enjoy a variety of radio programming over long _ distances without having to constantly search for new stations Based on signal 4 from satellites coverage far exceeds land based transmissions When enabled the Sirius XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in Aux page group The information on the Sirius XM Satellite Radio display is composed of four areas the Active Channel Available Channels Category of the highlighted channel
325. rmation on safe distance determination E 4 9 3 1 Maximum Permissible Exposure Level MPEL GWX 68 The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW cm is the semicircular area of at least 11 feet from the 12 inch antenna as indicated in the illustration below All personnel must remain outside of this zone With a scanning or rotating beam the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced sounjed euonippy S sioqui S Alesso 5 4 9 3 2 Maximum Permissible Exposure Level MPEL Other 3 Radars a See the appropriate documentation for MPEL i 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 95 29 C298 unuuv 9 299 298 8 299 g xipueddy G 29 LO Sec Additional LO Sec Sec 2 Annun Appendix B A TOC GARMIN MPEL P j 5 Boundary PA a 7 O LL J WwW do F 11 for 12 antenna gt 4 crc LL Y ES N N 1 Xe Se ET i Y MFD Figure 4 71 MPEL Boundary 4 9 4 Basic Antenna Tilt Setup The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that will work in all situations but this method does provide good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats Ultimately it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that the bottom of the
326. rmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 1 15 Sec 1 System Foreword Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 2 Sec 3 Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B PFD Features MFD amp Alerts Appendix A Index A TOC GARMIN 1 4 1 2 PFD Bezel Keys A NOTE See Section 5 6 for autopilot functions using the PFD Bezel Keys Heading HDG Selects Heading Select mode This is the default mode for the PFD knob Pressing the PFD knob in Heading mode will center the Heading Bug on the current Heading Set the heading bug on the HSI by turning the PFD knob after pressing the HDG key Course CRS Selects Course Select mode Pressing the PFD knob in Course mode will center the CDI for a VOR or GPS OBS course Altimeter ALT Selects Altitude Select mode Pressing the PFD knob in Altitude Select mode will enter the current altitude in the Altitude Select window Set the Altitude Bug by turning the PFD knob after pressing the ALT key Altitude Select Window Altitude Bug Current Altitude Barometric Setting Figure 1 17 Pressing PFD Knob Sets Altitude Select to Current Altitude 1 16 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Vertical Speed V S Selects Vertical Speed V S mode Pressing the PFD knob in V S mode will synchronize the bug to the current vertical speed DJOM9JOJ Vertical Speed Bug nN lt 4 e a gt Current Vertical Speed
327. rricanes 4 136 Cover B 3 ddd Wass plOoMalo4 IN e2UepIOAV TI CD cr D N we 29 7l DJezeH euonippy uuy UN 8 29 Sec 6 Annun Hazard ional Additic Foreword TOC Icing 4 70 4 87 4 126 4 127 4 142 4 144 Identifier 3 70 3 71 3 73 5 8 5 9 5 42 IFR 4 70 4 127 4 144 _ IGRF model 1 5 1 14 System amp Alerts Features Gamhale Symbols OSSa Glc 33d T x ES ap O O T LL ILS 2 22 2 24 2 25 2 26 7 1 Imminent obstacle impact 4 20 4 26 Imminent terrain impact 4 20 4 26 INFO soft key 3 68 Infra Red 4 124 Inhibit alerting 4 28 Intersection 3 6 3 25 3 26 5 19 7 1 Iridium 1 9 3 56 3 59 4 1 4 112 J Jeppesen 5 3 A 1 A 3 Jeppesen database A 3 A 7 cL Land data 3 2 3 11 3 13 3 15 Lateral deviation scale 2 19 2 21 gt Lat Lon 3 6 3 11 3 18 3 70 LDA 2 25 Legend 3 11 3 22 4 5 4 16 4 53 4 54 4 58 4 60 4 63 4 67 4 75 4 123 4 132 4 139 4 149 Level 1 21 3 5 3 6 3 31 3 32 4 17 4 20 4 86 4 98 Lighting 1 22 3 74 Lightning 3 2 3 6 3 21 3 22 4 54 4 56 4 69 4 73 4 116 4 125 4 130 4 147 Limitations 4 9 4 10 4 41 4 61 4 136 Localizer 2 20 2 22 2 25 2 27 Loc BC 2 25 LPV 2 28 LRU 1 1 1 3 1 9 3 43 5 30 6 14 Lubber line 2 19 2 21 M Magnetometer 1 2 1 6 1 8 Making a phone call 3 65 Map 3 2 B 4 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide A GARM
328. rs are selected the vectors extending from the traffic targets display how the traffic target is moving relative to your aircraft These vectors are gt calculated using the traffic targets track and ground speed and your aircraft track and ground speed These two values are combined to depict where the traffic target is moving with respect to your aircraft and indicates where the traffic target will be c relative to your aircraft at the time specified by the length of the vector A NOTE Absolute motion vectors match the color of the intruder white or yellow Relative motion vectors are green except for Traffic Advisories whose Relative Motion vectors are yellow The annunciation on the bottom of the dedicated traffic page indicates which vector type is selected and their length CoB TANTCAS OPER Sec4 S pc co ALT amp BOWVE TS lt ABSOLUTE MOTION 2 MIN ADS B TRAFFIC MAP ABSOLUTE EST HE S NRI Siete hes Figure 4 33 Absolute Motion White Vectors NOTE Relative Motion vectors are unavailable when the aircraft is on the ground The duration will be annunciated as UNAVAIL after RELATIVE MOTION at the bottom of the screen 4 50 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H ADS 8 TRAFFIC AP HAP i i 30 SEL SHIN 2M ACE Figure 4 34 Relative Motion Green Vectors Vector Duration The Vector Duration selection sets the time that the vector will show the gt zZ
329. s A GARMIN 1 While in the Horizontal Scan view press the CONTROL and then the BRG soft keys This displays the Bearing Line OR Press MENU and turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Show Bearing Line menu item and press the ENT key This displays the Bearing Line 2 Press the MFD knob to activate the Bearing Line Adjustment in the Control window Turn the Large MFD knob to highlight the Bearing value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically scanned TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN CAL m Figure 4 79 Bearing Line Adjustment 4 Press the VERTICAL soft key A vertical slice of the selected area will now be displayed lt 5 With the Bearing value still highlighted the small MFD Knob may be used to move the scanned slice a few degrees right or left 6 Press the RNG keys to adjust the range 7 Press the MFD Knob to remove the cursor 8 To select a new area to be vertically scanned select the HORIZON soft key to return to the Horizontal Scan view and repeat the previous steps 4 9 6 3 A Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell the radar beam should be pointed at the wet part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity color level The ideal aiming point is just below the freezing level of the storm The best way to find this point is to
330. s Page Name EAE M Page Location RIT MAP i Figure 3 3 MFD Map Description 3 1 1 Default Navigation Map Page While on any page of the MFD you may easily return to the first Navigation Map page of the Map group by pressing and holding the CLR key to return to the first page Home Page of the Map group 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 3 pJOM9JO 298 UJ91s g ddd C 298 T lt I O uo Q N CD Ww s VS eu e CD y xipueddy ieSso D sioquJ S s y 9 saunjeo4 8 29S 28 unuuy euonppy Xepu g xipueddy 7 29 G 298 9 29 co C D 92 Appendix B Glossary A n GARMIN 3 1 2 Map Overlay Icons Overlay icons are displayed to indicate data that will be depicted on the map pages The icons are shown onlf the icon is not displayed either the menu selection is not ON to display the data or the display range makes the data ineligible for display If the icon has a white X over it then the data is Z selected ON and the zoom scale is correct but the underlying data is not available for some reason All of the icons may not be displayed at the same time In some cases if one feature is selected another icon and featuare may be disabled The pilot should check the dedicated page for the feature that the icon represents to determine why the data is not available for display fail standby etc eword D Stormscope PE erain Traffic Obstacle ADS R TIS
331. s Optional The Traffic group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to customize the display of traffic on the Navigation Map The Traffic function requires the installation of a compatible traffic device oreword NOTE As a decluttering function traffic labels will not be drawn when the map scale is above 15 NM and traffic symbols will not be drawn when the map scale is above 40 NM gu Traffic Selection Display Result of Table 3 5 Navigation Map Traffic Display Options Oo 2 E CO co MO TO T MAVIGATION HAP 1 SETUP Features 3 TRAFFIC HODE Figure 3 29 Navigation Map Page Menu Traffic Group Selection pe 1 While viewing the Navigation Map Setup page and the Traffic Group active tum the large MFD knob to highlight the Traffic options 2 Turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value B E 3 Press ENT to accept the displayed value 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to 5 the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option When the Traffic overlay is active on a Map page a Traffic icon will be displayed on the Map page where it is selected Appendix B Index 3 24 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TE Traffic Overlay Traffic Overlay EACE B8 Co 3 Smart Key Label TRAFFIC TOO BSCS S Figure 3 30 Navigation Map Traffic Overlay 3 1 10 4 Aviation Feature Options 3 The
332. s 1 18 3 5 3 70 5 11 Range ring 3 2 3 11 3 13 4 5 4 13 4 32 4 33 4 48 4 109 RECENT 5 8 Record of Revisions vi Reduced required obstacle clearance 4 20 Reduced required terrain clearance 4 20 Reference speed 2 8 Reflectivity 4 60 4 61 4 93 4 100 4 137 Regional NEXRAD 4 141 Register with GFDS 4 113 Restore defaults 3 32 3 69 Cover Wd l S A C gt O TO 1 e B 5 NINMADIO DIOMa0 J ddd C 295 DDUCDIOAY Soln eo s0 9 AJ e S 235 G 299 9 29S Annun Hazard ional Additic Foreword amp Alerts Features Symbols Cover Restricted airspace 3 27 Roll pointer 2 9 Roll Scale 2 9 2 10 Roll scale pointer 2 1 2 10 Roll Scale Zero 2 9 Route 3 8 3 67 5 19 Runway depiction 5 43 TOC Runway extension 3 25 3 26 Runway information 3 72 3 74 S SafeTaxi 3 12 3 25 5 1 5 18 5 19 5 21 A 1 A 5 A 7 SafeTaxi symbols 7 2 Satellite telephone 3 59 Scale 2 6 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 13 2 19 2 20 2 21 3 2 3 5 3 7 3 11 3 15 4 3 4 34 4 111 5 40 Scroll bars 5 12 lt SDF 2 25 Sector scan 4 89 4 107 Secure Digital SD card 2 1 3 1 A 1 gt Selected Altitude 2 11 2 13 2 14 2 15 3 37 4 132 4 149 Selected altitude range arc 3 20 Selected Course 2 23 3 37 Selected Heading 2 20 3 37 Serial numbers 3 43 5 30 6 14 Service Class 5 23 5 24 SIGMET 4 56 4 70 4 71 4 126 4 127 4 142 4 143 4 151
333. s ENT H T 3 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Present Position Press ENT 4 The Present Position box will be checked and weather information will be d requested around your present position 5 To deselect Present Position reporting turn the large MFD knob to highlight Present Position Press ENT 3 Destination GFDS Data Request 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Destination Press ENT z E 2 The Destination box will be checked and weather information will be s i around your flight plan destination 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 117 A a 8 GARMIN 3 To deselect Destination reporting turn the large MFD knob to highlight Destination Press ENT E Flight Plan GFDS Data Request 1 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Flight Plan Press ENT ie 2 2 The range list will now be highlighted Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired range and press ENT rd GFDS DATA REQUEST CN dc COVERAGE PRESEHT POSITION DESTINATIOH FLIGHT PLAN BAYPOINT DIAMETER RTE WIDTH AUTO REQUEST UPDATE RATE Sec 4 CE N lt Figure 4 98 Flight Plan GFDS Data Request 5 3 The Flight Plan box will be checked and weather information will be requested along your flight plan forward of your present position for the range selected 4 To deselect Flight Plan reporting turn the large MFD knob to highlight Flight 5 Plan Press ENT
334. s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN 3 2 1 4 PFD Options Nav Status When selected Nav Status information is displayed on the PFD either on LI top of the display Style 1 or to the left of the HSI Style 2 1 While viewing the System Setup page of the AUX page group press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the A if desired Nav Status value 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select the style and press ENT PFD OPTIONS WIND VECTOR NAY STATUS TEMP REFERENC r3 3 Y NECHRONIZATI WPT DIS Style 1 Top of Display oe Style 2 Left of HSI Figure 3 43 Nav Status Style S wq 3 Afterthe Nav Status style is selected the chosen style will be displayed on the PFD A NOTE Nav Status option is not available for all installations 3 3 2 1 5 Temperature Reference a The computer calculates the temperature based on temperature probe and 2 pitot static inputs The units C or F and temperature reference are selected on the AUX SYSTEM SETUP page The temperature reference can be selected gt to one of the following choices 3 e Static Air Temperature SAT This is the calculated temperature of the stationary static outside air Conceptually this is the temperature that would be read on a thermometer floating stationary at the current location _ 5 Total Air Temperature TAT This is the calculated temperature of the outside air as it moves past the aircraft in
335. se Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts or labor provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost This warranty does not apply to i cosmetic damage such as scratches nicks and dents ii consumable parts such as batteries unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship iii damage caused by accident abuse misuse water flood fire or other acts of nature or external causes iv damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider of Garmin or v damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin In addition Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against R products or services that are obtained and or used in contravention of the laws of any country THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE INNO EVENTSHALL GARMIN BELIABLE FORANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL INDIRECTOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT SOME STATES
336. selected MFD FIS B Weather Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Winds Aloft will not be shown For the value such as 150 NM selected Winds Aloft data will be shown at map ranges of that value such as 150 NM and lower 7 22 gt zZ 2 T E e a gt piezey 1 While viewing a FIS B Weather Map page of the WX page group press the _ MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the Winds Aloft Data Viewing ad value 3 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 2 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to i the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 149 A TOC GARMIN 4 11 5 9 FIS B TFRs Temporary Flight Restrictions TFRs provide detailed information for local short term restrictions Select TFR Outline To View Details TFR Detail Sec4 5 o 2 No lt FIS WEATHER HAP 1 LEGEND ADVISORY Figure 4 129 FIS B Weather TFRs The Temporary Flight Restriction TFR viewing range option selects whether TFR information is shown on the FIS B Weather Map TFR information will be shown at and below the selected map range When Off is selected the informat
337. selected overseas locations The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 NM The NEXRAD network provides important information about severe weather for air traffic safety 7 92S gt z a T E e a gt pJezey NEXRAD datais not real time The lapsed time between collection processing and dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis Due to the inherent delays and the relative age of the data it should be used for long range planning purposes only Never use NEXRAD data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather Instead use it in an early warning capacity of pre departure and en route evaluation 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 59 Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Annun Sec 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 TO N ET Sec 7 Symbols Sec 8 Glossary Appendix B PFD System Foreword MFD a m S lt Features amp Alerts Appendix A Index Cover A GARMIN Figure 4 38 XM Weather NEXRAD Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps The display of the information is color coded to indicate the weather severity level All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link Page For the NEXRAD legend select the LEGEND soft key when NEXRAD is selected for disp
338. sing up all or most of the radar energy In this case no return signal is received from this area causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists 2 4 9 2 3 Angle of Incidence The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence Incident angle A is illustrated below This directly affects the gt detectable range the area of illumination and the intensity of the displayed target returns A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy 4 94 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H plomalo4 UJ91s g ddd Figure 4 70 Angle of Incidence 3IN 299 A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display will show a higher intensity Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle the resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain gt lt e e T 2 e rar 4 9 3 Operating Distance The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near an operating airborne weather radar The minimum sale distance is based upon the FCC exposure limit at 9 3 to 9 5 GHz for general population uncontrolled environments which is 1 mW cm See Advisory Circular 20 68B for more info
339. small MFD knob to select values and the large MFD knob to move to the next position Highlight REGISTER and press ENT to complete the process The GDU will contact the GFDS servers using the GSR 56 transceiver If the access v code and system ID are correct it will download and display the airframe info 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 113 GARMIN BARA IM FLIGHT Dei BERVILE REGISTRARS ICM I DUEB Ee DE s fie TED STATI HOT REGISTEREE MEW RESTATRAT S acCESS CODE CLIDI LWTI REGISTER CURPENT REGSIHTSATION GRE Du P TEL HHS Deru H DRANT ROGEGTRT ON EX IL HAER AERFEAME SERIAL HUMEER ATR RZHE SEERTAL HUHSER 11 dug a Par aa an IRIDIUM GER AL E li Pres ike MED mm 3 relat ta hme mg Press the HE rob te return fo bose pe Figure 4 93 GFDS Registration Page Default and Completed 4 10 1 2 Deactivate Unit Registration With GFDS Registration of the GDU unit with GFDS can be deactivated so that the unit can no longer make requests to GFDS This does not cancel the subscription gt 1 While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Register With GFDS Press ENT 3 lt 3 With the Access Code field highlighted press CLR to remove the access code 4 Any weather requests will now fail and the system will no longer be linked to the GFDS account 54 10 2 Using
340. soft key is pressed and held for longer than 1 second it is 2 8 ignored m AP Test s The AP TEST soft key is available if the GAD 43 is used to provide attitude 5 2 information to an autopilot The AP TEST soft key disengages the autopilot as part of the GAD 43 test CDI The CDI soit key toggles between the selection of GPS or VOR LOC as the active navigation source In a single GDU 620 system the GDU CDI soft key will change the source in the connected navigator and making a source change in the navigator will be reflected in the GDU 620 In a dual GDU 620 system the CDI keys in the navigator will be disabled 1 2 The 1 2 soft key toggles between the available receivers for selected navigation source i e GP51 and GPS2 or VOR LOC1 and VOR LOC2 This soft key 2 will only be present if the system is configured for a second GPS or VOR LOG sua v 9 unuuv 9 298 S OQWAS 29 KeSSOJD 8 29S D O O D Xopul g xipueddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 3 A TOC GARMIN PFD Pressing the PFD soft key displays the SYN VIS DME BRG and BACK soft keys The DME and SYN VIS soft keys will only be present if the system is configured for these features BRG1 The BRGI soft key cycles through the available bearing 1 indicator modes NAVI GPS1 ADF or None BRG2 The BRG2 soft key cycles through the available bearing 2 indicator modes NAV2 GPS2 ADE or None This soft key will only b
341. sor to highlight a TFR symbol yellow circle Press ENT 2 TheTFR details will be shown 3 Press the small MFD knob or ENT to return to the Weather page InkEORHATIDH FR LOCALIZED TFA TTLET EFE linm Tanai a LIBELLIYE SEDC RGE Figure 4 60 XM Weather Textual TFRs and Legend pJezey Y 29 gt zZ e T E e rar 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 81 Sec 4 5 N au A ix GARMIN 4 8 20 XM Cell Movement Cell Movement data shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by a ground based system Cells are represented by yellow squares a br S s with direction of movement indicated with short orange arrows LEGEND ALERTS Figure 4 61 XM Weather Cell Movement On most applicable maps Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD On the Weather Data Link Page Cell Movement data can be selected independently Cell Movement Data Viewing Range The Cell Movement Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range and below where Cell Movement weather products will appear on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected Cell _ Movement will not be shown Where a value such as 100 NM is selected Cell z 4 Movement data will be shown at map ranges of the selected value 100 NM and lower 1 While viewing Weather Setup 2 2 menu turn the large
342. splayed a the same time WARNING Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in So near or around areas of hazardous weather Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions 4 112 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC WARNING Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission the weather information shown by gt the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age UJe1s g 4 10 1 GFDS Registration 4 10 1 1 Register With GFDS am It is necessary to register the GDU with GFDS to utilize the weather products 1 Call Garmin Customer Service to create a GFDS account Provide the GDU System ID and airframe info model tail number etc 2 Customer Service will issue an access code to enter on the GFDS Registration page qil 3 While viewing a WX Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options 4 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight Register With GFDS Press ENT pJezey 7 29 gt z T E e rar EIEE oc ncm Linkk FOL Press the HFD knob to return to bose poge Figure 4 92 Select GFDS Registration 5 Turn the
343. splayed within the installed aviation database service area METAR METeorological Aerodrome Report known as an Aviation Routine Weather Report is the standard format for current weather observations METARs are updated hourly and are considered current METARs typically contain information about the temperature dew point wind precipitation cloud cover cloud heights visibility and barometric pressure They can also contain information on precipitation amounts lightning and other critical data METARS are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them Cursor Location Selected METAR VFR Figure 4 126 FIS B Weather Graphic METARs METAR Viewing Range The METAR Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value METAR weather products will be shown on the selected MFD FIS B Weather Map page 1 2 or 3 When Off is selected METARs will 7 22 gt zZ e T E e rar pJezey not be shown For a value such as 150 NM selected METAR data will be shown at map ranges of that value 150 NM and lower 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 147 A TOC GARMIN 1 While viewing a FIS B Weather Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor tlashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the METAR Data Viewing Range value 3 Turn
344. t is always a good idea to put the radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode the system automatically switches to Standby mode on landing Operatin Antenna P Mode Stabilization Weather Alert wn GWX Only SEA TILT Precipitation 2 Control P Scale Window SECTOR SCAN LIGHT GAIN WEATHER RADAR MAP W E DFF STANDBY HEATHER GROUND ADVISORY Figure 4 76 Horizontal Scan Display 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 101 A TOC GARMIN 4 9 6 1 Displaying Weather on the Weather Radar Page 2 A NOTE Distances on the Weather Radar page are always shown in NM 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the MODE soft key 552 While on the ground press the STANDBY soft key A warm up period is initiated countdown is displayed on the screen GWX radars only After the warm up is complete the radar enters the Standby Mode Pe 3 When the aircraft is airborne press the WEATHER soft key OR xE 4 Select the WEATHER soft key A confirmation window is displayed CAUTION Activating rodar on ground Reod and follow oll safety precautions Continue activating rodar Sec4 5 te No ae lt Figure 4 77 Caution for Radar Activation Confirmation 5555 Turn the large MFD Knob to highl
345. t option Viewing Textual METARs Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather WX pages 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag Press ENT 2 The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown Press the WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint Figure 4 50 XM Weather Textual METARs 3 Usethe small MFD knob or the large MFD knob to scroll through the available information 4 Press the small MFD knob to return to the previously viewed page 4 74 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 8 16 XM Winds Aloft The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will be shown on the selected MFD Wx Data Link Map page 1 2 or 3 Altitude can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the surface up to 42 000 feet MSL ALT UNAVBL is displayed when the altitude is unsupported for a specific product and will never show data on the map Pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft keys steps down or up in the 3 000 foot increments In the figure below where 9000 feet is selected Winds Aloft data will be shown at 9000 feet WINDS ALOFT US Date Time CH Dote Time a KNOTS Ed Eh a LESS 10 KNOTS OF LESS 50 KNOTS OF LESS Figure 4 52 XM Weather Winds
346. ta will not be shown Where a value such as 250 NM is p E selected NEXRAD data will be shown at map ranges of that value 250 NM and lower eatures Sec 5 LL Sec 6 o 1 While viewing a FIS B Weather Map page of the WX page group press the 38 MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT E 2 The NEXRAD Data Viewing Range value will be highlighted Turn the small amp MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted E e Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Appen Ji naex etx 4 138 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN gt lt S e w gt A a gt pieze 7 29 FIS B WEATHER HAP 1 M F LEGEND ADWISORY Figure 4 118 FIS B NEXRAD Precipitation and Legend 4 11 5 3 NEXRAD Legend The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of displaying an abbreviated version of the NEXRAD legend in the top right region of the MFD The full legend is available by pressing the LEGEND soft key 1 While viewing a FIS B Weather Map page of the WX page group press the MENU key to display the Page Menu Options The cursor flashes on the Weather Setup option Press ENT 2 Turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Legend value
347. the AUX SYSTEM STATUS page for details on the installed Airport Directory database IDENT FACILITY CITY AIRPORT ODTRECTORY Facility Hours Time one Fuel Max Puri Light Intensity Elevation Mag or Frequencies Information FBOs Handlers Fuel Only Sites SEBRING FLT Call Cut o ron UEnCy Location Hours Emi I Website AIRPORT DIRECTORY Hi sss APT DIR Figure 3 103 Airport Bien Information 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the APT DIR soft key to view more information about the waypoint 2 Press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor 3 Use the small or large MFD knob to scroll through the information 4 Pressthe small MFD knob to deactivate the cursor Press the APT DIR soft ey again to return to the Waypoint Information page 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 75 GARMIN 3 3 2 4 Waypoint Weather Information Optional The Weather information function is available if a data link receiver is installed and weather information is available for the selected waypoint METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Waypoint Weather Information Page Pressing the WX NOTAM soit key will show the weather information page Highlighting the Product selection and turning the small MFD knob will display METAR data Terminal Area Forecast TAF information and NOTAMs as they are available NOTAMS are also available when FIS B is availa
348. the GDU 620 MFD Nav Map Page or FPL Page SEN 2 The appropriate frequency is the active frequency in the navigator 3 The CDI selection on the GDU 620 is changed to NAV course pointer for the active navigator epi 9QJU D NOTE If the NAV course pointer is displayed for the active navigator mo when the approach is activated and the localizer frequency is tuned the pilot will need to switch to another CDI source and then back to NAV for the course pointer to Auto Slew 9Jn1eoJ uOHniD C Uhuuy 9 29S For example if NAV1 is currently selected the pilot must press the CDI soft key twice NAV1 gt GPS1 gt NAV1 OR L press the 1 2 soft key twice NAV1 gt NAV2 gt NAV1 E NOTE For LOC BC approaches the course pointer will slew 180 degrees from the inbound course o g xipuaddy 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 25 A TOC GARMIN Example of activating Auto Slewing in the G500 600 Foreword Sec 1 System Course Pointer slewed to 312 for the ILS WOOL CO HIOOE NDOIE 99 NN NW 1 05 JUN 2008 15 03 AL 2008 Mm D A Sec 4 Hazard Avoidance MAC SC or L ILS or LOC RWY 22 Figure 2 35 Auto Slewing HSI with ILS Loaded and Shown with the Corresponding Approach Plate Sec 5 Additional Features 1 The aircraft is flying vectors to final on an active ILS approach with the appropriate approach in the GPS navigator Sec 6 Annun amp Alerts
349. the GSR 56 for communicating _ The phone is in use by another service and the call may not be 352 made The GSR 56 is dialing the called number L Incoming Call A call is being made to the GSR 56 S N Connecting Call The GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the called j b number S Changing Volume The volume level on the GSR 56 is changing o e Hanging Up The GSR 56 is disconnecting from the current call Unavailable The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the Iridium phone system Table 3 8 Iridium Phone Status 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 3 59 A TOC GARMIN Call Suppression controls calling when use of the Iridium phone system is gt allowed 1 Turn the large MFD knob to reach the Aux page group Turn the small MFD knob to reach the Iridium Phone page 2 Press the small MFD knob to select the Call Suppression type Status Description Off Call Suppression is turned off Calls may be transmitted and received through the Iridium phone Call Suppression is turned on The incoming call pop up will not be shown The call may still be answered on the phone page Outgoing calls are not affected On During APR Call Suppression is turned on during Approach Missed Approach MAPR TERM and Terminal operations The incoming call pop up will not be shown The call may still be answered on the phone page Outgoing calls are not affected Table 3 8 Call Suppression 2
350. the HSI and the current ground track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond The HSI also presents turn rate course deviation bearing and navigation source information The MSG annunciation will be shown in the HSI when I oO an unacknowledged message is present on the selected navigator When the message is acknowledged the MSG annunciation will clear OO 219 ave eP e m a Y E P C S PPS ENS xo amp OC OO OOO Turn Rate Indicator Course Pointer 3 Heading Bug 4 Navigation Source 11 To From Indicator C PA E TT Trend Vector a eviation Indicator reni eado 7 Rotating Compass Card 15 Lubber Line 8 OBS Mode Active Figure 2 27 Horizontal Situation Indicator HSI 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 0 6066 C Lateral Deviation Scale GPS Level of Service 12 Current Track Indicator G Aircraft Symbol 13 Turn Rate Heading MSG Message on Navigator 4 19 Alesso 5 sioqui S su Jy s n e 4 DULpIONY JN WaIsAs plomao4 Q 299 S unuuy Jeuonippy piezeH 289 289 y xipueddy Xapul g xipueddy p 28 G 298 9 29 Sec 4 Sec 5 Sec 6 A TOC GARMIN The 360 HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator CDI with a Course Pointer To From Indicator and a sliding deviation bar and scale The course pointer is a single line arrow GPS1 VORI and LOCI or a double line arrow GPS2 VOR2
351. the self test y xipueddy Xapul g xipuaddy Figure 2 48 Radar Altimeter Failure Annunciation 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 2 33 Ex GARMIN 2 10 Fast Slow Indication Foreword The Fast Slow indication as provided from an external system is shown on the left side of the PFD along the horizon line See your AFM for details on operation System U D WY Pointer Fast Slow Scale Zs 7 Figure 2 49 Fast Slow Scale and Pointer f E 8 a a 2 11 PFD Display Units 3 E The PFD display units may be set to standard or metric units by the installer The MFD display units may still be selected by the user in the System Setup page of Aux mode Sec 6 Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Appendix B Index 2 34 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 3 MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY MFD The MFD displays a color moving map with navigation information Moving map information is shown on the two Navigation Map pages and the optional Weather WX pages The Navigation Map displays aviation data e g airports VORs airways airspaces geographic data e g cities lake highways borders topographic data map shading indicating elevation and hazard data e g traffic terrain weather The map options set for Navigation Map page 1 are used as the default settings for the optional Weather WX pages Which data is displayed can be controlled by
352. the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 4 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Viewing Textual METARs Textual METARs can be viewed by selecting an airport on the Map or Weather WX pages 1 While viewing a Map or Weather page Use the small and large MFD knobs to move the cursor to highlight an airport with a METAR flag Press ENT 2 The Waypoint Information page for that airport will now be shown Press the WX soft key to view weather information for the waypoint IDENT FACILITY CITY WAYPOINT INFORMATION V MAP BWY FREC TO CN NOTE ADVISORY Figure 4 127 FIS B Weather Textual METARs 4 148 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 11 5 8 Winds Aloft Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface lt and at selected altitudes Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the surface up to 42 000 feet MSL by pressing the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up soft keys WINDS ALOFT HE KNOTS S KNOTS OR LESS 10 KNOTS OR LESS gt 00 KNOTS OR LESS Figure 4 128 FIS B Weather Winds Aloft Legend The Winds Aloft Data Viewing Range option allows you to select the map range where at and below that value Winds Aloft weather products will appear on the
353. titude and heading indications North of 70 North latitude and south of 70 South latitude An area north of 65 North latitude and between longitude 75 West and 120 West An area north of 70 North latitude and between longitude 70 West and 128 West An area north of 70 North latitude and between longitude 85 East and 114 West An area south of 55 South latitude between longitude 120 East and 165 East 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide li 5 gt w LL A TOC GARMIN WARNING Do not use Terrain SVT information for primary terrain avoidance Terrain SVT is intended only to enhance situational awareness CAUTION The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment Portions of the Garmin GDU 620 utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID NAVAID Therefore as with all NAVAIDs information presented by the GDU 620 can be misused or misinterpreted and therefore become unsafe CAUTION The Garmin GDU 620 does not contain any user serviceable parts Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and the pilot s authority to operate this device under FAA FCC regulations CAUTION Th
354. tup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight gt the NEXRAD Legend value 5 2 Turn the small MFD knob to highlight Ott or On Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to XE the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 63 A Ex GARMIN 4 8 9 NEXRAD Source The NEXRAD Legend selection provides the option of using US or Canadian Nexrad data Foreword WEATHER SETUP Sec 1 System Mop rinntntion HEXRAD Doto Vieving Range Legend Sec 2 PF Source Echo Top Data Viewing Rerge Cloud Top Date Viewing Roran Sec 3 MFD Figure 4 42 NEXRAD Source Selection While viewing Weather Setup 1 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight the NEXRAD Legend value Turn the small MFD knob to highlight US or Canada Press ENT to accept the displayed value a m S lt Features Sec 5 Additional Sec 6 Sec 8 Sec 7 Annun Glossary Symbols amp Alerts Appendix A Appendix B Index 4 64 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC 4 8 10 XM Echo Tops NOTE Due to similarities in color schemes the display of Echo Tops is mutually exclusive with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD Echo Tops data shows the location elevation and direction of the highest radar echo The high
355. ueddy G 29 T S q Annun FU UCI A TOC GARMIN 4 9 2 2 Ground Returns The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the ground target Angle of Incidence and the reflective properties of that target The gain can be adjusted so shorelines rivers lakes _ and cities are well defined Increasing gain too much causes the display to fill in between targets thus obscuring some landmarks Cities normally provide a strong return signal While large buildings and structures provide good returns small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings As the aircraft approaches and shorter ranges are selected details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and edges of the city become more defined Z Bodies of water such as lakes rivers and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good returns The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned They can appear as dark areas on the display However rough or choppy water is a better reflector and will provide stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves Avoidance Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna but also block 5 the areas behind However over mountainous terrain the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off canyon walls u
356. uirement to carry paper charts aboard the aircraft See the AFMS for more information Additional Features A NOTE The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance Flight Plan and Procedures are separate from Charts and do provide vertical and lateral course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight Plan page The term Chart Unavailable means that the chart cannot be viewed on the Charts due to either a chart not being published or an error in the Chart database but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system The absence of a chart for a particular Departure Arrival or Approach does not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan The absence of i a particular Departure Arrival or Approach under the Flight Plan does not OG preclude the ability to view the Chart JI nn a A NOTE Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground maneuvering SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the requirements of AC 20 159 and are not qualified to be used as an airport moving map display AMMD SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by x the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot Zs situational awareness during ground operations 5 2 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H
357. up will show that the call is connected and the cumulative call time will be shown 1 3 66 When an incoming call is available press the ENT key or the ANSWER soft key to answer the call Or press the CLR key or the HANG UP soft key to not answer the call and hang up INCOMING CALL Press ENT to answer Press CLR to hangup NAVIGATION MAP 1 ANSWER HANG UP Figure 3 88 Incoming Call Pop Up After a called is accepted and connected the connection time will be shown on the pop up Press the ATT soft key to attenuate the call volume pressing it again will return to normal volume Press the HANG UP soft key to end the call Press the VOL or VOL keys to adjust the call volume CONNECTED Call Time B 18 Press CLR to hide NAVIGATION MAP 1 MT Y HANG UP Y Figure 3 89 Connected Call Pop Up Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H GARMIN 10c 3 3 Flight Plan Pages Use the Flight Plan page group to view details about your flight plan route lt Ihe Flight Plan Function shows the Current Flight Plan that is active in the navigation source displayed on the CDI 3 3 1 X Active Flight Plan Page The Active Flight Plan box shows all of the legs of your flight plan with the current leg indicated in magenta Listed are each leg with the Desired Track DTK Distance DIS and Estimated Time of Arrival ETA for the legs METARs are shown for waypoints in the flight plan In the Mi
358. upercooled Large Droplet SLD icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft SLD threat areas are depicted as black and red blocks over the Icing colors Icing and SLD data are shown between 1 000 feet and 30 000 feet in 3 000 foot increments 1 While viewing Weather Setup 2 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to highlight 7 the Icing Data Viewing Range value 2 Tum the small MFD knob to highlight the desired value Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Figure 4 66 XM esther king and SLD 4 Press the WX Alt Dn or WX Alt Up keys to increase or decrease the reporting altitude of icing in 3 000 foot increments The selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude Keys 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 8 A TOC GARMIN 4 8 25 XM Turbulence 5 Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high altitude E air mass associated winds Turbulence is classified as light moderate severe or extreme at altitudes between 21 000 and 45 000 feet Turbulence data is _ intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs 1 While viewing Weather Setup 2 2 menu turn the large MFD knob to
359. ure 3 45 Dual Unit Synchronization 2 Tum the small MFD knob to select ON or OFF 3 Press ENT 3 36 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC The following information is always synchronized between both GDU 620 units Selected Altitude e Selected Heading DJOM9JOJ e Selected Course Ul91s g 29S e Selected Vertical Speed Airspeed Bug Values ddd C 295 Airspeed Color Band Values e System Pressure Units e System Temperature Units The following information can be synchronized between GDU 620s or changed independently depending on the Crossfill Synchronization Settings e Barometric Correction default ON Selected CDI default OFF When Barometric Correction is synchronized any changes to the Barometric Setting on either GDU will change it on both GDUs DULPIOAY pJezep SoJn eo euonippy G 29 When the CDI is synchronized any changes to the selected CDI on either GDU will change it on both GDUs Either pilot can change the OBS course on either GPS If the pilot selects GPS1 on the CDI and GPSI is in OBS mode any course changes will move the OBS on GPS1 GDUI and GDU2 if the copilot has GPS1 displayed on the CDI Similarly if the pilot selects GPS2 on the CDI gt and GPS2 is in OBS mode any course changes will move the OBS on GPS2 GDUI and GDU2 if the copilot has GPS2 displayed on the CDI AHRS 1 and ADC 1 will only be displayed on GDUI AHRS2
360. ure 4 4 86 Horizontal Scan m WATCH Figure 4 87 Horizontal Scan with WATCHT 4 9 6 8 Weather Alert GWX Radars Only The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy radar returns beyond the currently displayed range Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low a weather alert can be generated by ground returns Weather Alerts Figure 4 88 Weather Alert Display If a Weather Alert is detected within 10 of the aircraft heading an text alert will be displayed on the MFD in the Alerts Window These text Weather Alerts can be deactivated without deactivating the red bands on the radar display 1 While viewing the Weather Radar page of the Wx page group press the MENU key 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 4 109 gt lt e a rT E e a gt piezey Y S A TOC GARMIN 2 To activate or deactivate Weather Alerts turn the large or small MFD knob to highlight either Enable Weather Alert or Inhibit Weather Alert E 4 9 6 9 X Altitude Compensated Tilt ACT GWX 70 only Altitude Compensated Tilt ACT automatically adjusts the tilt to compensate _ c lor altitude changes as you climb or descend 551 While viewing the Weather Radar Menu turn the small or large MFD knob to highlight Enable Altitude Compensated Tilt ACT and then press ENT PAGE TENU L
361. use the Vertical Scan feature The antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan 4 104 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN TOC Adjusting Antenna Tilt on the Horizontal Scan Display 1 Press the MFD knob 2 With the Tilt value highlighted in the Control window turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Tilt TILT BEARING SECTOR SCAN GAIN Figure 4 80 Adjusting Tilt Adjusting Antenna Tilt on the Vertical Scan Display Not available with all radars 1 While in the Vertical Scan view press the CONTROL and then the TILT soft keys This displays the Tilt Line OR Press MENU and turn the large or small MFD knobs to highlight the Show Tilt Line menu item and press the ENT key This displays the Tilt Line 2 Press the MFD knob to activate the Tilt Adjustment in the Control window Turn 2 5 x the large MFD knob to highlight the Tilt value 3 3 Turn the small MFD knob to adjust the Tilt value lOAY oo N aA 2 a Pe a re a 1 4 9 6 4 Adjusting Gain The gain is used to adjust the sensitivity of the radar receiver It can be used to adjust the characteristics of the returns Gain adjustment is shown in the Gain bar graph The white reference line on the right side of the bar graph indicates the calibration reference point WA
362. uting GPS Altitude for TAWS TAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal g position and altitude GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements gt GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level MSL based altitude GPS MSL eee and is used to determine TAWS alerts GPS MSL altitude accuracy is _ affected by factors such as satellite geometry but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices GPS MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude Therefore GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude x source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS are referenced to Mean Sea Level Using the GPS position and GPS MSL altitude TAWS displays a 2 D or 3 D with SVT picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft Furthermore the GPS position and g GPS MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircrafts flight path s in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles In this manner TAWS can Xt utes advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions 24 2 2 Baro Corrected Altitude Versus GPS MSL Altitude Baro corrected altitude or indicated altitude is derived by adjusting the z altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions The
363. vides the ability to gt display graphic weather data overlaid on the MFD Nav Map and Weather Data Link pages The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS or TIS traffic data in relation to the aircrafts current position and altitude The Traffic option is designed to assist in detection and avoidance of other aircraft 190 00601 02 Rev H Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 5 1 UJ91SAG J si UJA 1 I J d C 2 CIAN 3 U M JD i M e 2 D e ct 5 D unuuy XIDU A TOC GARMIN The optional Synthetic Vision Technology SVI is a visual enhancement to o the G500 600 SVT is displayed as a forward looking display of the topography z immediately in front of the aircraft SVT information is shown on the primary flight display PFD 5 1 Viewing FliteCharts and ChartView 7 When the Chart function is available charts will be shown on the third page of the Flight Plan page group The chart page will default to the nearest airport c If no flight plan or destination airport is present While you are on the ground the displayed charts will default to the current airport location regardless of flight plan Both ChartView and FliteCharts may be geo referenced The icon will have 1 an x through it the selected chart does not support geo referencing ae 2 e NOTE The availability of SafeTaxi ChartView or FliteCharts in electronic form may not preclude the req
364. way Information While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the RWY FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor Use the large MFD knob to highlight the Runway and use the small MFD knob to display the available runways 3 Press the small MFD knob to cancel editing s Facility Frequency Selection The Frequency window at the bottom of the Waypoint Information page shows the frequencies available for the selected waypoint A scroll bar is shown 2 on the right side of the Frequency window if more frequencies are available TRCOUENC ILS Figure 3 102 Waypoint Frequency Information 1 While viewing the Waypoint Information page of the FPL page group press the RWY FREQ soft key to view information about the waypoint and then press the small MFD knob to activate the cursor 2 Turn the small MFD knob to scroll through the available frequencies v 3 Press the small MFD knob to exit 3 74 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 00601 02 Rev H A GARMIN is 3 3 2 3 Airport Directory The Airport Directory lists extensive information about the selected airport and the surrounding area The RWY FREQ and APT DIR soft keys are greyed out and not functional unless the selected waypoint is an airport or heliport A NOTE Airport Directory information comes from a database provided by various 3rd parties Refer to the Database information in
365. which can cause alterations in radar scans e NOTE At present NEXRAD data can age significantly by the time the mosaic image is created Although such situations are not believed to be typical in extreme latency and mosaic creation scenarios the actual age of the oldest NEXRAD data in the mosaic can exceed the age indication in the cockpit by 15 20 minutes Even small time differences between the age indicator and actual conditions can be important for safety of flight especially when considering fast moving weather hazards quickly developing weather scenarios and or fast moving aircraft 4 8 6 XM Weather Page Map Orientation The Orientation option sets the orientation of the Wx Data Link Map pages 1 While viewing the Wx Data Link Map 1 2 or 3 of the Wx page group press the MENU key With Weather Setup highlighted press ENT 2 Turn the small MFD knob to select Weather Setup 1 2 and press ENT 3 With the Map Orientation option active turn the small MFD knob to change the highlighted value Features amp Alerts WEATHER SETUP Heo Orientation HEXRAD Deto Viewing Ronge Figure 4 40 Weather Page Map Orientation 4 Press ENT to accept the displayed value The next option will be highlighted 5 Press the small MFD knob to cancel selection or to end editing and return to the Navigation Map page or turn the large MFD knob to the next option Appendix A Index 4 62 Garmin G500 600 Pilot s Guide 190 006

Garmin Part 23 AML STC Pilot's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents